Pdfhelp en Us PDF

Introduction
Introduction
What is ScriptCase
ScriptCase is a complete development tool. Through a friendly web interface, ScriptCase creates PHP
applications extremely fast with quality, saving time , lowering costs, increasing productivity and team integration.
How does ScriptCase work?
The developer can connect ScriptCase to the databases available in the market, such as SQL Server, Oracle,
DB2, MYSQL, Postgres, and also create applications using multiple databases.
You will be able to develop easily and really fast:

Grid
Reports
Charts
Filters
Forms
Menus
Tabs
PDF documents
Blank applications
Dashboard
Calendars
Always looking for new technology, ScriptCase has a variety of components:

Ajax Support
Auto-complete
Master-Details
Editable Grid
HTML Editor
Database Dictionary
Documentation creator
Installed in a web server, Scriptcase can be simultaneously used by many developers through a browser,
allowing remote and collaborative development. The source code is PHP and works independently of the tool,
allowing its publishing on any PHP enabled Web server.
Source code
ScriptCase generates the source-code (PHP, JavaScript, HTML and AJAX). The generated source is totally
independent of the tool, and can be published on any PHP enabled Web server. The PHP language is free (GNU)
and can be used in Windows or Linux (every PHP processing is made in the server).
Extra Tools
ScriptCase brings some extra tools:
SQL Builder
A Tool to assist the SQL creation in wizard form to grid applications. It allows the choice of the database, tables,
fields, order by and where clauses, as well as, the built command simulations saved for posterior use.
Database Builder
A Tool to manage your database. A complete database manager tool that allows to build or edit databases, tables
and fields.
To-Do List
New functionality that allows to create a user-level TO-DO list, making the routine with remote developers even
easier and more organized
Message Center
Seeking a better integration of resources, a system was implemented so that developers can communicate using
Scriptcase interface itself, through the exchange of messages between different users of the same installation.
Image Management Center

With the new Image Management Center you can control all the images used in the development in one place. Is
it possible to manage the images at the user-level, project or public, organize into folders and upload multiple
image files at the same time.
Access, EXCEL and CSV Import tool

Now you can import spreadsheets (.XLS), ACCESS databases and CSV files to be used within the Scriptcase
creating new applications.
Data Dictionary
Allows to mantain a data dictionary. It creates data repository, synchronize tables and much more.
Express Edit
System tool to bulk edit applications for faster developement.
Helpcase
Used to create webhelps, standardizing your documentation and helping the end user to understand the system
and/or applications.
Buttons Management
Allows system´s buttons standardization and centralized features management
Themes Editor
User friendly themes editor to manage CSS settings.
Databases
ScriptCase doesn't execute commands directly in databases. It uses a “layer” of access - ADODB. This layer
makes an abstraction of the database, allowing the use of SQL statements to different databases (ODBC or
OLEDB standard).
Compatible databases:
Scriptcase Installation
Overview
ScriptCase installation process will be described according to the type of operating system.
For installation is simple, select your operating system and proceed with the tutorial and learn in a few steps to
install and use ScriptCase.
Scriptcase Installer - Linux
Using the scriptcase installer
ScriptCase's installer is an executable file for linux. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE,
PHP and SCRIPTCASE on your Operating System.
Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer:
1 - Apache Web Server 2.4.3.

2 - PHP 5.6 with the mbstring, zip and gd extensions enabled.
3 - Zend Guard Loader 3.3.
4 - Scriptcase Version 8.1
* Before we proceed with the installation it is recomended to not have any other web environment (such as
XAMP, Zend Server, etc...) installed on the machine.
* It is aways recommended to have some basic knowledge of environment in order to use the terminal.
* We recommend the use of SQLite database.
This manual will teach you to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps:
1. Step 1:Execute ScriptCase's installer.
2. Step 2:Choose the installer settings.

3. Step 3:Execute ScriptCase.
Step 1: Execute ScriptCase's installer.

1 - Find the installer accessing the folder and subfolders using the CD command.
Ex:
user@computer:~$ cd /home/your/download/folder
HINT
Scriptcase Installer requires to be executed with administrative permissions to make changes on your computer.
We need to require admin permissions (aka "root permissions") in order to execute the installer.
2 - Require root access by using SUDO SU and typing your password (if needed).
Ex:
user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ sudo su
3 - Grant the Execute permissions to the file.
Ex:
user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ chmod -x scriptcasev81_installer.run
4 - Run the installer.
Ex:
user@computer:~/your/download/folder$ ./scriptcasev81_installer.run
Step 2: Choose the installer settings.

In the images below we are able to see all the installation properties.
1 - Select the installer language.
1. Language: Select the language that will be shown on the installation process. This will not select
ScriptCase's Language.
Click on "Forward" to continue...

2 - Welcome message.
This screen shows the installer welcome message.
3 - License agreement.
1. Do you accept this license?: You must read and accept the terms before continuing.
Click on "Forward" to continue.
4 - Installation directory.
HINT
The default installation path is "/opt/NetMake/v81/". Don't change this path unless you know what you are doing.
1. Installation Directory: Type here the path for installation.
2. Browse: This button allows you to browse your system folders to choose the installation path or create a
new folder.
5 - Apache Configuration.
1. Port: This will define the port that Apache service will run on. We recommend to use the default value.
2. Email Administrator: This is the Apache's administrator e-mail. This is the configuration for Apache only,
not ScriptCase.
3. Apache Domain: Apache domain must be defined here.
4. PHP Timezone: Select the option corresponding to your time zone.
6 - Install.
The installer will start the installation process now.

1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.
7 - Completing the Setup.
1. View Readme File: When you finish the installer, it will show the README file.
2. Open Scriptcase 8.1: When you finish the installer, it will open ScriptCase.
Click on "Finish" to complete.
Step 3: Start Using ScriptCase.

Now to access your Scriptcase, you must enter the IP adress and the port you choose for Apache.
Ex: http://127.0.0.1:8081/scriptcase
Scriptcase Installer - Macos
ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for MacOS. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE,

4 - Scriptcase Version 8.1.
MacOS X 10.9 and later For MacOS 10.8 and later, before running the installation program it is
required to change the permission level to run applications. On the Security and Privacy settings, check
the "Anywhere" option in "Allow applications downloaded from".
* Before we proceed with the installation it is recomended to do not have any other web environment (such as
* It is aways recommended to have some basic knowledgment of environment in order to use the terminal.
* We recommend the use of the SQLite database.
This manual will teach you to install ScriptCase in 2 simple steps:
1. Step 1:Choose the installer settings.

2. Step 2:Execute ScriptCase.
Step 1: Pick the installer settings.

1 - Select the installer language.
ScriptCase's Language.
HINT
The default installation path is "/Applications/NetMake/v81/". Don't change this path unless you know what you
are doing.
1. Installation Directory: Type here the path for the installation.
new folder.

6 - Install.
Click on "Next" to continue.


Now to access your scriptcase, you must enter the IP adress and the port you choose for Apache.
Scriptcase Installer - Windows
ScriptCase's installer is a executable file for Windows. An application for self-extracting and configuring APACHE,

4 - Scriptcase Version 8.1
* Before we proceed with the installation is recommended to do not have any other web environment (such as
* We recommend the use of the SQLite database.
This mannual will teach you to install ScriptCase in 2 simple steps:
1. Step 1: Choose the installer settings.
2. Step 2: Execute ScriptCase.
Step 1: Choose the installer settings.

1 - Select installer language.
ScriptCase's language.
Click on "Ok" to continue.
HINT
The default installation path is "C:\Program Files (x86)\NetMake\v81". Don't change this path unless you know
what you are doing.
1. Installation Directory: Type here the path for the installation.
new folder.
2. Email Administrator: This is the Apache's administrator e-mail. This is the configuration for Apache only,
not ScriptCase.
3. Apache Domain: Apache domain must be defined here.
6 - Install.


Now to access your scriptcase, you must access on the browser the IP adress and the port you choose for
Apache.
Scriptcase Manual Installation
Requirements:
Web server with PHP support, such as Apache, IIS, Abyss and more.
PHP 5.6, with modules mbstring, GD2 and zip enabled.
Zend Guard Loader 3.3.0 or higher.
Standard SQL database (SQLite, MySQL, MSSQL, PostgreSQL, Oracle and DB2) available to PHP. *
*We recommend using the SQLite database
Related links:
PHP (Official Site).

Zend (Site).
Apache (Official Site).
With the environment already installed, you must download the Scriptcase.zip in the downloads section of the site
http://www.scriptcase.net.
After configuring your environment, extract the file to a temporary folder, using the "extract here" file
decompressor.
It will create a folder with the name: scriptcase.xxx.
Rename it to scriptcase and move to the root of your web server.
Finally, open the browser and access ScriptCase to start the installation process.
Example: http://server:port/scriptcase
The screen below shows the choice of language (English) to use during the installation.
Check enabled extensions. If you check the not installed extensions, ScriptCase tries to configure the php.ini file
to recognize these extensions.
Now, you will choose whether you prefer the Typical Installation or a Customized installation.
Typical Installation
Scriptcase will install everything automatically. After choosing a typical installation, you will be automatically
directed to your Scriptcase development environment. By default the user is: admin and password: admin.
Customized Installation
You could choose on which database you wish to install ScriptCase and the default username and password to
access it.
ScriptCase needs some permissions to work properly. Check the permissions.
NOTE: In case of IIS Web Server, requires permission of Writing, Reading and Execution
IUSR_NOMEDOSERVIDOR to the user, in the following directories:
1 - PHP installation directory.

2 - ScriptCase Directory.
3 - File cmd.exe on Windows.
This step consists in defining the database in which ScriptCase is installed, the default option is SQLite
(Recommended), requires only that your PHP module is enabled, but you can do the installation in other
databases.
The tables used by ScriptCase were created successfully.
Here you create a login and password for the ScriptCase administrator.
If the installation has been successful this screen appears. Click continue to boot ScriptCase.
Login screen to access ScriptCase. Type in the username and password defined earlier.
Installing A Manual Php 5.6 Environment - Linux
This article will explain how to install and set-up a PHP 5.6 environment with Apache 2.4 so that it will run
Scriptcase.
Follow the steps below with caution.
Note: This article was based on the Debian Jessie distribution
Installing the PHP 5.6
Use the following command to install PHP 5.6
sudo apt-get install php5-dev php5-cli php5 php5-pear
Accept the installation of the dependants.
Verify the PHP version with the command:
php -v
Important: By default PHP has some disabled functions that will be necessary for Scriptcase. So access your
php.ini (/etc/php5/apache2/php.ini) and change the variable disable_functions according to the example:
To enable the databases, we've selected some installation command examples:
MSSQL Server use this command sudo apt-get install php5-mssql
PostgreSQL use this command sudo apt-get install php5-pgsql
MySQL use this command sudo apt-get install php5-mysql

SQLite use this command sudo apt-get install php5-sqlite
Firebird use this command sudo apt-get install php5-interbase
Odbc use this command sudo apt-get install php5-odbc
Activating the GD library
Use the command sudo apt-get install php5-gd to activate the GD library.
Accept the installation of the dependants.
Activate Zend Guard Loader
Download the Zend Guard Loader for linux, on link below and place it like this /usr/lib/php5/Zend.
Download ZendGuardLoader x86
Download ZendGuardLoader x64
Set the permissions 777 recursive on the folder /usr/lib/php5/Zend
sudo chmod 777 -R /usr/lib/php5/Zend
Open the php.ini (/etc/php5/apache2/php.ini) and at the end of the file, add the line:
[zend]
zend_extension=/usr/lib/php5/Zend/ZendGuardLoader.so
zend_loader.enable=1
zend_loader.disable_licensing=0
zend_loader.license_path=
After this procedure restart Apache using the command:

sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 stop
sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 start
Manually installing Scriptcase
Download Scriptcase with the extension zip or tgz at www.scriptcase.net and extract the zip in the root of the
Web Server which was installed previously (/var/www/html).
After extract the zip, rename the folder to scriptcase.
Access Scriptcase from your browser using the example below:
Ex.: http://127.0.0.1/scriptcase
The page below shows the options of the installing language of ScriptCase.
Here it verifies the extensions installed. If you mark the check-boxes of the extensions not installed, it will try to
configure the php.ini file to recognize the extensions selected.
Now you will choose to do a Typical Installation or a Customized Installation.
Scriptcase will install everything automatically. After choosing the Typical Installation, you'll be redirected
automatically to your Scriptcase development environment. By default the username is: admin and the password
is: admin.
You can choose what database Scriptcase will use to install and choose the default username and password to
access your development environment.
Scriptcase needs some permissions to work properly , at this moment it checks the permissions.
This step consists in defining the database that ScriptCase will be installed. The default option is SQLite, that
requires only its module to be active in PHP, but it is possible to install it on others databases by clicking on
'Change Database'. Going to the next step the tables will be created.
The tables were created with success.
Here you will create the login and the password for the administrator of ScriptCase.
If everything was ok in the installation, the following page will show. Click on Next to start Scriptcase.
The login page of Scriptcase with the user-name and password previously informed.
Installing A Manual Php 5.6 Environment - Windows
This article will explain how to install and setup a PHP 5.6 environment with Apache 2.4 so that it will run
Scriptcase.
Follow the steps below with caution.
Download the Apache 2.4 , mod_fcgid and PHP 5.6 on the following links:
Apache download
mod_fcgid download
PHP 5.6 download
Note: The PHP that should be downloaded is the Non Thread Safe and all downloads need to be in the
32-bit architect.
After downloading Apache and PHP 5.6, extract both of them in the root of the C:\ Drive
Rename the folders to Apache24 and PHP, like the example below:
Extract the Mod fcgid, copy the file mod_fcgid.so and paste it in the directory C:/Apache24/modules
Setting up the Apache

Open the file C:/Apache24/conf/httpd.conf and add the following lines above the line IfModule unixd_module
of the file:
LoadModule fcgid_module modules/mod_fcgid.so

FcgidInitialEnv PHPRC "c:/php"
AddHandler fcgid-script .php
FcgidWrapper "c:/php/php-cgi.exe" .php
In the same file, search for#ServerName www.example.com:80 and change it to ServerName localhost:80
Search for:
<IfModule dir_module>
DirectoryIndex index.html
</IfModule>
And change it to
<IfModule dir_module>
DirectoryIndex index.html index.php index.phtml
</IfModule>
Add the text: Options ExecCGI in the option Directory "c/:Apache24/htdocs"
Search for IfModule mime_module above this option, add the text below:
Adding the service of the Apache in Windows

Open the Command Prompt(CMD) as Administrator and type the following command:
c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k install
Important: In case of an error, and you're informed that the file msvcr110.dll is missing, you can download the
file clicking here. Extract and place the file in the directory : C:\Windows\System e C:\Windows\System32. Run
the command again in the command prompt(CMD).
Setting up PHP 5.6
Open the folder C:\php and rename the file php.ini-development to php.ini.
Now open the file php.ini (C:\php), and search for the variable extension_dir and set the value "C:/php/ext" like
the image below.
Remove the comments of the extensions listed below (to uncomment the extensions, just remove the ";" from the
starting point of each extension).
extension=php_bz2.dll
extension=php_curl.dll
extension=php_gd2.dll
extension=php_imap.dll
extension=php_interbase.dll
extension=php_ldap.dll
extension=php_mbstring.dll
extension=php_exif.dll
extension=php_mysql.dll
extension=php_mysqli.dll
extension=php_oci8.dll
extension=php_pdo_firebird.dll
extension=php_pdo_mssql.dll
extension=php_pdo_mysql.dll
extension=php_pdo_oci.dll
extension=php_pdo_odbc.dll
extension=php_pdo_pgsql.dll
extension=php_pdo_sqlite.dll
extension=php_pgsql.dll
extension=php_pspell.dll
extension=php_shmop.dll
extension=php_sqlite.dll
extension=php_sqlite3.dll
extension=php_xmlrpc.dll
extension=php_xsl.dll
extension=php_zip.dll
Set-up the TimeZone according to your region following the list that's available at the php website. Still with the
php.ini opened look for the variable date.timezone and insert a value available in the list.
Save all the modifications done in the php.ini and close it.
Restart the Apache running the command c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart
Activating the Zend Guard Loader
Download the Zend Guard Loader dll for Windows, on link below and place the dll in the C:/php/ext.
Download ZendGuardLoader
Open the php.ini (C:/php/php.ini) and at the end of the file, add the line:
[zend]
zend_extension=C:/php/ext/ZendLoader.dll
After this procedure restart Apache using the command c:\apache24\bin\httpd.exe -k restart in the CMD.
installing Scriptcase Manually
Download the Scriptcase with the extension zip at www.scriptcase.net and extract the zip in the root of the Web
Server which was installed previously (C:\Apache24\htdocs).
After extracting the zip, rename the folder to scriptcase.
Access Scriptcase from your browser using the example below:
The page below shows the options of the installing language of ScriptCase.
Here it checks the extensions installed. If you mark the check-boxes of the extensions not installed, it will try to
configure the php.ini file to recognize the extensions selected.
Now you can choose to do a Typical Installation or a Customized Installation.
Scriptcase will install everything automatically. After choosing the Typical Installation, you'll be redirected
automatically to your Scriptcase development environment. By default the user-name is: admin and the password
is: admin.
Note: For IIS Web Server, it is necessary to grant permissions to Write, Read & Execute for the user
IUSR_SERVERNAME, on the directories:
1 - Directory of the installed PHP.
2 - Directory of ScriptCase.
3 - And the cmd.exe of Windows.
This step consists in defining the database that ScriptCase will be installed. The default option is SQLite, that
requires only the module to be active in PHP, but it's possible to install on others databases by clicking on
'Change Database'. Going to the next step the tables will be created.
The tables were created with success.

The login page of Scriptcase with the user-name and password previously defined.
Installing A Manual Php 5.6 Environment - Macos X
This article will explain how to install and configure a PHP 5.6 and Apache 2.2 environment to receive Scriptcase.
Follow the steps below very carefully.
Note: This article was based on the distribution Mac OS X Yosemite.
Installing PHP 5.6
Run at the terminal to install the PHP 5.6:
sudo curl -s http://php-osx.liip.ch/install.sh | bash -s 5.6
After installation PHP 5.6 will be at the following location /usr/local/php5
Configuring Apache
Run the following command in the terminal:
sudo nano /etc/apache2/httpd.conf
At the end of the modules add the following line:
LoadModule php5_module /usr/local/php5/libphp5.so

Add the path of PHP in MacOS environment variable.
Run the following command in the terminal:
sudo nano /etc/paths
In the opened file above, add the following line:
/usr/local/php5/bin
Once finished PHP 5.6 and Apache is configured on your machine.
Enabling Zend Guard Loader
Download the dll Zend Guard Loader for MacOS by using the link below and place it in
/usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions.
Download ZendGuardLoader
Open the php.ini (/usr/local/zend/etc/php.ini) and the end of the file add:
[zend]
zend_extension=/usr/local/zend/lib/php_extensions/ZendGuardLoader.so
After this restart apache using the following commands:
sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl stop
sudo /usr/sbin/apachectl start
Manual installation of Scriptcase
Download Scriptcase with zip extension from www.scriptcase.net and extract it in the root of your web
environment previously installed (/etc/apache2/htdocs).
After the extract, rename the folder to scriptcase.
Access Scriptcase in your browser following the example below:
The screen below shows the choice of language (English) of the installation process of ScriptCase.
Here it checks the installed extensions. If you mark the checkboxes of the not installed extensions, it tries to
configure the php.ini to recognize those extensions.
Now you can choose between the Typical installation or Custom installation.
Typical installation
The Scriptcase will install everything automatically. After choosing the typical installation, you will be automatically
directed to your Scriptcase development environment. By definition, the user is: admin and password: admin.
Custom installation.
This step consists in defining the database in which ScriptCase will be installed. The default option is SQLite,
which only requires your module is enabled in PHP, but you can install other databases by clicking 'Change
Database'. To continue tables will be created.
The tables used by ScriptCase were successfully created.
The login page of Scriptcase with the user-name and password previously informed.
Accessing Scriptcase
User Authentication
Enter the user login and password at the login page as in the image below. Use the following information to login
after a default installation:
user : admin
password : admin
Image1: Login interface.
After user/password validation and according to user profile, ScriptCase displays the options and projects
available to that user.
Note:The ScriptCase user administrator has access to all ScriptCase functionally , including functions to add new
users.
Start Page
When accessing Scriptcase, if you don't have any project, you will see a start page with the first steps you should
take to create your project.
If you already have a project, you will see a screen to select or create a project.
After select/create a project, the Scriptcase Workspace is displayed.
Scriptcase Workspace
Layout Overview
Scriptcase workspace - layout Overview

The Scriptcase workspace lets you view applications, object properties and operations available. Using a
integrated workspace, all options are into a single larger application window.
Once authenticated / logged in the ScriptCase, the user is redirected to a Home page similar to the "Windows
Explorer". From there the user can select actions such as: create folders to organize applications, display
applications previously created, copy, rename, etc.
Image1: Workspace Layout Interface.
1 Main Menu 2 Toolbar 3 Taskbar 4 Project Explorer 5 Application List

Main Menu
At the top of the page is available a hierarchical menu containing all ScriptCase functionallity options.
Image1: Main menu interface.
Hierarchic Menu options:
FILE
Create a New Project It will create a new proejct
Open Project Show a list with the project that the logged user has access to
Close Project Close the current opened project
Create a New Project It will show the interface of new application creation inside the current opened project
Create a Batch Allows the user to create multiple applications
Applications
Restore Applications Displays the last published applications may choose a restore point and the name in
which the application will be restored.
Restore Application Used to restore a especifc version of a application
Export Project Used to export one created project created with Scriptcase
Import Project Used to import projects created with Scriptcase
Main Menu Navigate to the main page of Scriptcase
Exit Log out from Scriptcase
View
Source code Show last source code generated through the
application being edited. (Enabled only with an
open application )
Data in Session Display all ScriptCase session variables
including the executed applications. (Enabled
only with an open project)
Project
Properties Display the project´s information and allows to
edit it.
Default values Display a list of standard values for the current
project.
Versions History Display all project versions.
Increment version Creates a new version of the current project.
Generate source Generate the source code for applications in
code opened project. (Enabled only with an open
project)
Deploy Opens publication wizard of the current
project.
Export Applications Generates current project export file.
Import Applications Imports a backup file to current project.
Delete Deletes current project.
Reports - Display project´s applications.
Applications List
Reports - Display applications by developer.
Developers
Summary
Show Diagram Display project´s diagram.
Application Search Search text in project´s applications.
Database
New Database Connection Creates a new connection in the current project.
Edit a Database Connection Edit the connections of the current project.
Import ACCESS It is used to import an ACCESS database.
Import EXCEL It is used to import an EXCEL spreadsheet.
Import CSV It is used to import a CSV file.
SQL Builder Tool for rapid creation of SQL commands.
Database Builder Tool for rapid creation of tables in the database.
Application
Save Save the opened Application.
Generate Generate the application source code.
Run Run the selected application.
Tools
Data Dictionary Allows the user to set defaults for tables (names and types of fields, etc.).
Express Edition Open a window to edit multiple applications at the same time.
HelpCase Tool for creating documentation.
Library Allows the creation of standards routines that will be used in many applications.
TO-DO List Create a TO-DO List
Mensages Sends messages between the developers of the messages.
Conversor Performs conversion from V5, V6, V7 to V8.
Layout
CSS Applications This option allows the Creation/Edition of themes.
(Themes)
CSS Buttons This option allows the Creation/Edition of themes to the buttons.
HTML Templates This option enables you to make changes in the various HTML elements that will make
your application.
CSS Menus This option enables you to make changes in CSS of the menus.
Image Manager This option manages the existing images in the projects to add, delete, and copy an
image.
Chart Themes This option allows you to set paramentros Some of monetary unit, date and number
according to the country or region where your application will be used.
Locales
Language of the Applications Allows you to create premade messagens to your system
Regional Settings Allows you to change the regional settings from a specific project
Modules
Security Used to apply security in your project.
Log - Create/edit Used to apply a log module in your project.
Log - Applications Used to apply a log module in your project.
Log - Create Used to create the log module applications.
Application Log
Options
Settings Configure the ScriptCase settings.
My ScriptCase Scriptcase settings by user level.
Change password Change the current password.
My Toolbar This option allow the user to customize the
availability and order of the toolbar items.
Help
Webhelp Scriptcase manual.
Support Access ScriptCase on-line support.
Diagnosis Display the environment / server configuration
where ScriptCase is running.
Check Version View ScriptCase's current Version.
Update Version Access ScriptCase's update center.
License Access to enter your Scriptcase License key
Registration
About Information about ScriptCase.
Toolbar
Use the Toolbar icons to access ScriptCase features
ScriptCase functionality icons:
Toolbar - Main menu
Main Menu Returns to the Scriptcase's Main Menu.

Create a new Create a new project.
Project
Open a Project Show a list of projects that this user has
permission to edit
Close a Project Closes the current project
New database Create a new database connection
Connection
Edit a database Allows the user to edit the dabatase connection
Connection
SQL Builder Runs the SQL Builder tool
Create a new Show the new application creation interface
application
Batch application Create applications using the batch express
creation creation.
Save the current Save the current application. (*)
application
Generate Source Generate the source code of the current
Code application.(*)
Run the current Save, generate the source code and run the
Application current application. (*)
Deploy project Deploy the current application.
Data Dictionary Allows the end user to pre-define some settings
based on the database (Fields label, type,
length, ...).
Language of the Allows you to create custom messages to be
Applications used in different applications.
Help Online documentation from Scriptcase
Exit Closes Scriptcase..
(*) The options Save, Generate, Run and Deploy are available when
an application is being edited.
Other toolbar attributes :
User: Display active user name.

Project and version: Display selected project / version.
Taskbar
The Taskbar displays the applications opened for editing, allowing to edit more than one application at the same
time.
Image1: TaskBar Interface.

Project Explorer
In the Main Menu page are listed the folders and the applications developed with ScriptCase.
Image1: Project Explorer.
1 - Folder functions It allows to manage folders in the project:

Create Create a new folder to organize the
project applications.
Rename Rename the selected folder.
Delete Delete the selected folder.
2 - Filters
It is used to filter applications in the current folder of the project.
All applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders.

My applications It lists all applications of the folder and subfolders developed by the current user.
Recents It lists all applications generated recently.
3 - Folders Structure
List of folders and subfolders existing into the project.
4 - Search
Search for applications names or descriptions in the project. The search is done within the selected folder, and
the search results are highlighted with yellow.
Applications List
Displays folders and applications. Each line offers action icons at application level.
1 - LABELS
Application Application Name.
Friendly URL Application Friendly URL
Description Application Description.
Creator Application Developer.
Generation Date Generation.
Status Application Status (updated e outdated).
2 - OPTIONS
Run Run the application. If it is outdated the source
code will be generated before the execution
Edit Open the application for editing.
Copy Creates an application copy. Enter a name to
the copy.
Rename Changes the application name.
3 - Footer
It allows to run a function for multiple applications at the same time:
The checkbox allows to select all applications listed in the application list.
Other options are:
Generate Generate the source code.

Deploy Deploy the applications.
Delete Delete the selected applications.
Copy Copy the applications to another project.
Move Move the applications to a different folder.
Export Export the applications.
Project
Project
Scriptcase uses projects to manage the applications development. A practical and intuitive way of organizing the
development environment.
The project elements are: the applications (forms, grids, menus, tabs, etc.) and connections to the database.
The user can create and maintain a Project Version History, he can link users to projects, themes, languages,
and generate source codes, deploy or export part of or all the project, using the Project mangement resources.
Within a project you can define patterns to create applications,
This topic includes the available resources to project management, which are:
New Project
Created Projects using Scriptcase
Properties
Default Values
Open Project
Delete
Versions History
Increment Version
Generate Source-Code
Deploy
Export Applications
Import Applications
Report
Show Diagram
Application Search
Export Projects
Import Projects
Security
Log
New Project
Scriptcase uses the concept of projects to help the developers to organize their development, a project can
contain one or more application. This option is used when we want to create a new project on Scriptcase.
Image1: New Project.
The project creation process is divided in 5 different steps, they are:
Start (Project Settings) - Set the project name, description and icon to be used on the project.
Languages - Select or add one or more languages you will use in your project.
Themes - Select or add one or more themes that you will use in your project.
Databases - Select the type of database that you want to make the connection to use it in the project.
End - This is the project confirmation step, after the project creation Scriptcase will redirect to the application
creation interface.
Image2: Project Creation Progress Bar.
Step 01: Start - Project Settings

Image3: Creating a new project.
Attributes:
Project Name - Define a name to your project. Blank spaces can't be used there.
Project Description -Project short description.
Version - Initial Project version.
- Select an image to represent your project .
ScriptCase provides examples of projects demostrating what can be done with the tool. These projects can be
downloaded and imported to your Scriptcase, it will import the project itself and will also import the tables, the
database tables can be imported to MySQL, Postgres, SQLite, Oracle, SQL Server, Firebird and Access.
Step 02: Locales

Locales - Select the languages available in the project from the list and set the project default language. Use the
interface below to add or remove languages to the project. Click in Set default to change the project default
language. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the user
browser values or the system settings.
Image4: Selecting project locales
Regional Settings - It is not only the language, it will also include the way numbers are displayed (decimal
separator), how Currency values are displayed, including the currency symbol, time and date notations, such
as the date separator and whether the clock should be in 12 or 24 hours.
Charset - Consists of a given repertoire with a sequence of natural numbers and text used by a specific
alphabet.
Step 03: Themes
Themes - It is the layout and CSS of the generated application, the selected themes are going to be avaliable to
be used in the ScriptCase Applications.
Image 5: Selecting themes for the project.
Step 04: Databases

Databases - Scriptcase supports connection with MySQL, Oracle, MSSQL Server, PostgreSQL, DB2, Informix,
MS Access, SQLite, Sybase and Firebird.
Image 6: Selecting the database connection.
To connect to a database with Scriptcase all we need is the physichal location of the database, it can be installed
locally in your machine, in a server in your local network or either in a server in the internet, you will also need the
username and password, with all set the last step will be choose the database name that will be used. To learn
how to setup a connection to your favorite database click in this link
Step 05: End

The project was sucefully created and now you can create your first application by clicking on the "Create First
Application" button.
Systems
It is possible to download eleven different systems made using Scriptcase, they are:
Security System
Training / Course Organizer System
Online Shop
Helpdesk System
Project Management System
Samples
News System
Album System
Document Library
Cash Flow / Financial System
Recruitment Tracker
These systems are available for download on the project creating process.
Image 01: Create new project screen.
When importing the systems we have to choose which database Scriptcase will export the system tables.
MySQL
SQLite
MS SQL Server
PostgreSQL
Oracle
MS Access
Interbase/Firebird
Properties
This option changes the project´s attributes.
Image1: Project Properties Interface.
Image2: Edit Project Interface.
Attributes:
Project Short Description - Update project short description.
Use index page - This option allows you to call the applications of your project without inform the filename.
For example: The application "http://mydomain/project/form_01/form_01.php" could be called just using
"http://mydomain/project/form_01/"
It is possible also to update the project complete description. Use the textarea with editor features provided by
ScriptCase.
Select the languages available in the project from ScripCase language list and set the project default language.
Use the interface below to add or remove languages to the project. Click in Set default to update the project
default language. When a default language is not selected ScriptCase will select a default value based on the
user browser values or the system settings.
Image3: Selecting project locales
Locales - It is the combination of language and regional settings. So a country with more than one language may
have a regional setting and more than one language, ex.: English (Canada) and French (Canada). These
relationships (locales) are available at project creation or editing.
Image4: Selecting themes for the project.
Themes - Define schemes available to the applications.

Default Values
Using the Default Values is possible to customize a series of Project attributes, avoiding repetitive tasks and
increasing productivity.
Image1: Default Values Access
Image2: Default Settings Interface.
1 - Common Settings:
Logo - Standard logo image used in applications.
Records Per Page- Record quantity per page, used in grids and forms applications.
Display Line number- .
Display Title- .
ShowSummary- Display Summary in Grid Applications. It is implemented via an SQL count and as such can
add performance overhead .
2 - Application Settings:
There we can set some default values to each type of application, such as:
To Set the table width.
Select a template to the header and footer.

To set the field aligments.
Select which buttons in the toolbar will be available by default when creating an application.
etc.
3 - HTML Editor
Configure the toolbar attributes used in 'editor html fields' in form or control application.
Attributes:
Localization- Define the toolbar position in the editor box.

Buttons Alignment - Define the toolbar buttons alignment (right, left or center).
Statusbar - Define the toolbar display status.
Toolbar Count - Define the toolbar quantity (see image below).
Buttons's Organization - Select buttons to display in Toolbar.
Preview - Display the selected buttons.
4 - Libraries
Select and enable the libraries to use in applications events.
Open Project
You can open or go from one project to another one anytime acessing the menu File -> Open Project.
Image1: Open Project Menu.
Select to open an existent project.
Image1: Selecting a Project.

Delete
Delete a Project, all applications and connections. Project users are not excluded.
Note: Confirm project deletion (Image2) since it is final and not reversible. A project without back-up cannot be
restored.
Image1: Delete Project Menu.
Image2: Delete confirmation.

Version History
Maintain project history using Version History. Delete, open/close or edit a project version.
Image 1: Version History Menu.
Image 2: Version Description Interface.
Attributes:
Delete - Delete all applications of the Project for selected version.
Status - Open/Close a version of the Project.
Edit - Edit the version of the Project. Only available if the versions status is "Open"
After clicked to 'Edit' a release, Scriptcase opens that project release.
Image2: Versions Description of Scriptcase interface.

Increment Version
Increment version allows to manager the Project development, by separating the versions that has been
developed.
Image 1: Increment Version Menu.
When a new project version is generated, it will keep a copy of the previous version, allowing the development of
the new version.
Image 2: Increment Version Interface.
Attributes:
Current version - Current Version of the Project.
New Version - Id number of the New Version.
Description - Project Description.

Generate Source-code
Generate the project applications source code.
Image 1: Select application Menu.
It allows to generate the entire project source code or selected applications.
If the option Selected applications is used, so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder.
If the threads are enabled you can see which applications are being compiled for each thread.
Image 2: Showing Threads.
Or you can see the log of generated applications.

Image1: Showing Log.
Deploy
The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP
supported WEB server.
For more information, Click here.

Export Applications
Image 1: Export Project Menu
It allows to export all applications of the project or just selected applications.
If the option Select applications is used, so the application are listed in accordance with its type or folder.
Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.ZIP). Click on the link to download it.
Image 2: Routine backup Interface .

Import Applications
Use it to upload and import an exported zip file to your project.
Image 1: Import Applications Menu.
Select the zip file that were exported by ScriptCase.
Image 2: Import Applications Interface.
Check the list of applications contained in the zip. Click on Restore, then click OK after finish the process.
Report
Provide two types of project report: Applications List and Developers summary.
Image1: Project Reports Menu
Applications List
The Applications List displays historical and analytical information about the project applications.
Image2: Applications List.
The Applications List allows to display all the table inserts (SQL) existing in the project.
Clicking in SHOW INSERTS, the following screen is displayed.
Image4: Applications insert Interface.
Image5: Table Insert Interface.
Developers summary
The Developers summary report display a developer application distribution in a detail or chart format.
Image6: Report Menu (Summary by Developers).

Image7: Report (Summary by Developers) Interface.
Show Diagram
Image1: Show Diagram.
Image2: Diagram.
Application Search
Search for an attribute in all applications:
Image1: Application Search Menu.
Image2: Application Search Interface.

Export Project
Use this option to save the project and all project applications in a zip file that you can import in another
ScriptCase.
Image 1: Export Project Application Menu.
Select the project to export.
Image 2: Export Application Interface.
Then ScriptCase generates a link to the backup file (.ZIP). Click on the link to download it.
Image 3: Routine backup Interface .
Import Project
Use it to upload and import a zip exported file to your open project.
Image: Import Applications Interface.
Step 1 - Select the zip with Project that were exported by ScriptCase.
Image1: Import Applications Interface.

Security
Security
Making use of ScriptCase security resources you can implement access rules for the system being developed,
further decreasing development time of a project, considering that ScriptCase will generate access applications
and all validations automatically.
Image 1: Security Module Menu.
1. Type - The First step is used to select the level of security. There are three security levels and each level is
based on a data model for storing information such as user accounts, passwords, access profiles, groups, etc.
Image2: Security Module - Type.
Types:
User - It creates an application based on the security for user level (where the application is linked to user
login).
Application - It creates an application based on the application level security (where the application is
related to the user).
Group - It creates an application based on security for the Group level (where the access of each group to
certain applications is defined).
2. Select Connection - The second step is common for any type and it is used to select what database
connection will be used to create the Security module.
Image 3: Security Module - Select Connection.
Select Connection:
Connection - Selects a database connection from the project.

Existing or Create Tables - You can choose if Scriptcase will create the tables in your database or it it will
use existent tables.
Table prefix - Prefix used to create the table names.
Delete tables if they exist - Deletes the tables to create new ones.
Protect logged users - Deletes the tables to create new ones.
3. Associate - The third step is different to each type of security level and it is used to associate the fields from
the security module with the fields from the database. So it is just needed if you have selected the option to
use "Existing Tables" in the last step.
User
Based on user level security (where the application is linked to the user login).
Image 4: User Interface.

1 - User:
Table - Defines the table "Users" used by the system.

Login - Sets the field to store the User login.
Password - Sets the field to store the user password.
Name - Sets the field to store the user name.
E-mail - Sets the field to store the E-mail.
Active - Sets the field to store if the user is active or not.
Activation code - Sets the field to store the activation code.
Administrator privilege - Set the field to store if the user has administrator privileges.
2 - Login:
Table - Sets the table "Online User" used by the system.

Login - Sets the field to store user login.
Login Date - Sets the field to store the time that the user performed the login in the system.
Session - Sets the field to store the user session.
IP Addresses - Sets the field to store the user's IP.
User / App
Based on application level security (where the applications are related to the user).
Image 5: User / App Interface.
1 - User:

Login - Sets the field to store the user login.
Administrator privilege - Sets the field to store if the user has administrator privileges.
2 - Application:
Table - Sets the table to store all project applications.

Code - Defines the field to store the code or the application name.
Description - Sets the field to store the application description.
Type of application - Sets the field to store the application type.
3 - User / Application:
Table - Sets the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications.
Login - Defines the field to store the User Login.
Application Name - Defines the field to store the application name.
Access Privilege - Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to access the application.
Insert Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to insert new records in the
application.
Delete Privilege - Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to delete records in the application.
Update Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to update records in the application.
Export Privilege - Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to export records in the application.
Print Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to print records in the application.
2 - Logado:

User / Group / App

Based on security for the Group level (where the access of each group to certain applications is defined).
Image 6: User / Group / App Interface.
1 - User:

Login - Sets the field to stores the user login.
Administrator privilege - Sets the field to store if the user has administrator privileges.
2 - Group:
Table - Sets the table to store the groups created in the system.
ID - Defines the field that will store the group code.
Description - Sets the field that will store the group description.
3 - Application:
Table - Sets the table to store all project applications.

Code - Defines the field to store the code or the application name.
Description - Sets the field to store the application description.
Type of application - Sets the field to store the application type.
4 - User / Group:
Table - Sets the table to store the relationship between users and groups in the project.
Login - Sets the field to store your login.
Group Code - Defines the field to store the group code.
5 - Group / Application:
Table - Sets the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications.
Group Code - Defines the field to store the group code.
Application Name - Defines the field to store the application name.
Access Privilege - Defines the field to store if the group has privilege to access the application.
Insert Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the group has privilege to insert new records in the
application.
Delete Privilege - Defines the field to store if the group has privilege to delete records in the application.
Update Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the group has privilege to update records in the application.
Export Privilege - Defines the field to store if the group has privilege to export records in the application.
Print Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the group has privilege to print records in the application.
6 - Logado:

4. Configuration - The fourth step is used to inform the settings used on the security module.
Image 7: Settings Interface
1 - General:
Prefix applications - Creates the security applications with a prefix in the name.
Encryption - Defines if the password will use encryption.
Enable Security - Enables the option "use security" in each application.
Use Captcha - Enables the option to use CAPTCHA in the login screen.
Folder - It creates a folder in the project to security applications.
Theme - Defines the theme to the applications.
Log - Defines the Log Scheme used in the security applications.
Menu - It allows to create or select a Menu application to include the security module.
Menu Type - Defines the Menu type, if the option to create a new menu applications was set in the item
above.
2 - Login:
Minimum size - Minimum size of characters typed by the user.
Maximum size - Maximum size of characters typed by the user.
Send e-mail link for new password - Define which characters the end-user can type.
3 - Retrieve Password:
Send email with password - Defines if the user can retrieve the password receiving it by e-mail.
Reset password and send new email - Defines if the user can retrieve the password reseting the old
and receiving a new one by e-mail.
Send e-mail link for new password - Defines if the user can retrieve the password receiving a link by
e-mail to register a new password.
4 - New Users:
Allow the registration of new users - A link is created on the login screen allowing the new user to
registrate.
Require activation by email - New users receive an activation link by email.
Send email to administrator - When a new user is registered, the administrator receives an email to
allow that user to access the system.
5 - E-mail Settings:
SMTP Server - Defines the SMTP server.
SMTP Port - Defines the SMTP port.
Secure Connection - Defines the Security for the SMTP, whether it's SSL or TLS .
SMTP User - Defines the SMTP user.
SMTP Password - Defines the SMTP password.
SMTP E-mail - Defines the SMTP e-mail.
6 -Logged Users :
Show logged users - By checking â??yesâ?? Scriptcase creates a Grid application inside the Security
Module to control and display all the logged users inside the project.
Brute Force attack protection - Option to use Brute Force attack protection for unsuccessful login
attempts. It is a way to combat Brute Force attacks.
Brute force protection period (in minutes) - If you decide to use Brute Force attack protection you
must set here for how many minutes the user will be not able to log in.
Retries number before lock - If you decide to use Brute Force attack protection you must set the
maximum number of unsuccessful login attempts, before blocking the user.
Important note: This logged users options will be available only if you check the option "Protect logged users"
during the step 2. Security Module - Select Connection (step 2).
5. Insert data - The fifth step is used to populate the tables Users and Groups.
Image 8: Insert Data Interface
Insert data:
Login - User Login.

Password - User password.
Name - User name.
E-mail - User E-mail.
Active - Activate the user.
Administrator privileges - Defines if the user has administrator privileges (all features enabled).
Group - Name of the administrator group.
6. Add applications - The sixth step is used to populate the table Applications.
Note: This step is not needed if you are using the "User" security type.
Image 9: Add Applications Interface
Checking this option, Scriptcase will insert the name of each application existing in the project, in the Applications
Table .
7. Profile - The last step is for saving all settings in a profile so that they can be used in other projects.
Image 10: Profile Interface
You can save a profile to any Scriptcase user, just for that user or just to be used in a project.
LDAP
See the LDAP documentation:
LDAP Documentation
Ldap Security
Ldap Security
There are two ways to use LDAP for Scriptcase applications authentication:
LDAP option.
Total Control
Authentication Only
LDAP Tutorial
Total Control
This LDAP authentication method allows the admin to select users from LDAP who will have access to the
applications and which applications will be accessible for each user.
1. Connection - The connection will be used to create or associate the security module.
Image 1: Connection settings.
Connection - Select a database connection from the project.

Existing or Create Tables - You can choose if Scriptcase will create the tables in your database or it it will
use existent tables.
Table prefix - Prefix used to create the table names.
Delete tables if they exist. - Delete the tables to create new ones.
2. Associate - It is just needed if you have selected the option to use "Existing Tables" in the previous step.
User:
Table - Define the table "Users" used by the system.
Login - Set the field to stores the User login.
Password - Set the field to stores the User Password.NOT USED
Name - Set the field to stores the User Name.
E-mail - Set the field to stores the E-mail.
Active - Set the field to stores if the user is active or not.
Activation code - Set the field to stores the Activation code.NOT USED
Administrator privilege - Set the field to stores if the user has administrator privileges.
Application:
Table - Set the table to store all project applications.

Application Name - Define the field to store the code or the application name.
Description - Set the field to store the application description.
Type of application - Set the field to store the application type.
User / Application:
Table - Set the table to store the relationship between groups and project applications.
Login - Define the field to store the User Login.
Application Name - Define the field to store the application name.
Access Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to access the application.
Insert Prvilege- Define the field to store if the user has privilege to insert new records in the application.
Delete Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to delete records in the application.
Update Prvilege- Define the field to store if the user has privilege to update records in the application.
Export Privilege - Define the field to store if the user has privilege to export records in the application.
Print Prvilege- Defines the field to store if the user has privilege to print records in the application.
3. Configuration - This step will define the settings used on the security module.
General:
Prefix applications - Create the security applications with a prefix in the name.
Encryption - Define if the password will use encryption.NOT USED
Enable Security - Enable the option "use security" in each application.
Use Captcha - Enable the option to use CAPTCHA in the login screen.
Schema - Define the theme to the applications.
Log - Define the Log Scheme used in the security applications.
Menu Type - Define the Menu type, if the option to create a new menu applications was set in the item
above.
Login:

Allowed Characters - Define wich characters the end-user can type.
E-mail Settings:
SMTP Server - Define the SMTP server.

SMTP Port - Define the SMTP port.
SMTP User - Define the SMTP user.
SMTP Password - Define the SMTP password.
SMTP E-mail - Define the SMTP e-mail.
LDAP:
Server - Define the LDAP server adress.

Domain - Define the LDAP domain to be used.
DN - Define LDAP's Distinguished Name to be used.
Group - Define the LDAP Group to be used.
4. Test User - The fifth step is used to activate one user as administrator.
Insert Data Interface
Insert data:
Login - Valid LDAP user Login.

Password - Valid LDAP user password.
Name - User name
E-mail - User e-mail.
5. Add applications - The sixth step is used to populate the table Applications.
Add Applications Interface
Checking the option, Scriptcase will insert in the Applications Table, the name of each application existing in the
project.
6. Profile - The last step is used to save in a profile all settings used on the steps to be used in other projects.
Profile Interface
You can save a profile to any Scriptcase user, just to that user or just to be used in that project.
Authentication Only
This LDAP authentication method allows the usersto get access to all applications through LDAP validation of
their Login/Password.
1. Connection - The connection will be used to create or associate the security module.
Image 1: Connection settings.
Connection - Select a database connection from the project.
2. Configuration - This step will define the settings used on the security module.
General:
Prefix applications - Create the security applications with a prefix in the name.
Encryption - Define if the password will use encryption.NOT USED
Enable Security - Enable the option "use security" in each application.
Use Captcha - Enable the option to use CAPTCHA in the login screen.
Schema - Define the theme to the applications.
Log - Define the Log Scheme used in the security applications.
Menu Type - Define the Menu type, if the option to create a new menu applications was set in the item
above.
Login:

Allowed Characters - Define wich characters the end-user can type.
LDAP:
Server - Define the LDAP server adress.

Domain - Define the LDAP domain to be used.
DN - Define LDAP's Distinguished Name to be used.
Group - Define the LDAP Group to be used.
3. Test User - The fifth step is used to activate one user as administrator.
Insert Data Interface
Insert data:
Login - Valid LDAP user Login.

Password - Valid LDAP user password.
Name - User name
E-mail - User e-mail.
4. Profile - The last step is used to save in a profile all settings used on the steps to be used in other projects.
Profile Interface
You can save a profile to any Scriptcase user, just to that user or just to be used in that project.
Ldap Database Creation
In order to understand better how to use LDAP Security on ScriptCase, we are going to learn how to create a
LDAP Database and get the data to build, on ScriptCase, a security module using it. On Windows Server, there is
a native way to install and configure the Active Directory with the LDAP database:
Creating a LDAP Database on Windows Server.
Creating a simple LDAP Database on Linux.
Creating a LDAP Database on Windows Server.

Server Manager
Image 01: Server manager option on the startup menu.
In Windows Server is natively possible to create a LDAP database to feed an Active Directory structure. We will
need to access the Server Manager to install the Active Directory service. First, locate the Server Manager on the
Startup Menu and launch it.
&nbsp
Image 02: Server Manager Main window.
In its main window, access the "Roles" Option, and create a new role using "Add Roles"
Image 03: Roles.
&nbsp
Add Role Wizard
Image 04: Add Role Wizard home.
Read and follow this page recomendations and then continue.

Image 05: Choosing services to install.
This page allows us to choose the services we want to install to the role we are adding. Check the option "Active
Directory Domain Services" and continue
Image 06: Active Directory Domain Services.
There is some important notes about the Active Directory Domain Services in this page.
Image 07: Installation.
This page show what will be installed from now. To proceed with the installation click the "Install" button. After the
processing, there will be shown the "Results" window with the installation log.
Image 08: Results.
Domain Controller
Image 09: Active Directory role page.
Image 10: AD DS Install Wizzard.
This wizzard will create our domain(or associate an existing one).

Image 11: OS compatibility.
Image 12: Creating a new tree.
To create a new tree, select the "Create a new domain in a forest" option and click "Next" to set up its name.
Image 13: Setting up a domain Qualified Name.
For this example we are going to use admartini.scriptcase.com as the domain name.
Image 14: Setting the functional level for admartini.scriptcase.info.
This step will define the computers that will be able to become domain servers or delegate controllers.
Image 15: Additional options.
To make sure that other computers will be able to find this domain, turn it on a DNS server or use your default
DNS server, relationing the domain name to the AD server's IP adress.
Image 16: Defining database, log and SYSVOL path.
Here you can define the path for the LDAP database, the log files and the SYSVOL. There is no need to change
this in most of cases.
Image 17: Setting up a Restore Mode password.
This password will allow you to access the AD server's Restore Mode, it is not related with the LDAP admin
password.
Image 18: Installation summary.
Image 19: Installation progress.

Image 20: Installation finished.
Creating a New User
Image 21: Creating new user Object.
Select the "Active Directory Users and Computers" option under the AD DS menu, then select your domain and
right click to create a new user object. Insert the user data and define a new password for it. Then confirm the
changes to finish the process.
Image 22: New User data.

Image 23: Defining user's password.
Image 24: Object Created.
Results
This tutorial created a LDAP authentication environment. The authentication data for this example are:
Domain ADMARTINI
DN DC=admartini,DC=scriptcase,DC=info
User CN=Henrique C. Barros,DC=admartini,DC=scriptcase,DC=info OR
Name hbarros@admartini.scriptcase.info
Creating a simple LDAP Database on Linux.

Installing and configuring slapd
We are going to use OpenLDAP(slapd) to build a LDAP database accessible for the security module WITHOUT
simulating an Active Directory. This tutorial will create an LDAP server and a single user for access.
Image 01: Installing slapd.
In a Debian-based system, we need to use apt-get to retrieve and install slapd.
Image 02: Using dpkg-reconfigure to change slapd settings.
After the installation, we must configure the settings for the slapd. To do so, we must use dpkg-reconfigure to
build.
Image 03: Configuring slapd.
Select the "No" option and press Enter to continue.
Image 04: Defining domain name.
Choose your domain name.

Image 05: Defining organization name.
Type the organization name and press Enter to continue.
Image 06: Setting up admin password.
Define the admin password and press Enter to confirm it.
Image 07: Defining database engine backend.
This screen allows us to choose the Database backend. We recommend you to use HDB. Press enter to proceed
and then choose to clean your previous DB.
Image 08: Purging previous DB.
Image 09: Moving old files.
Adding a new user
First of all, you must create a LDIF file with the info about the user on it:
user@computer:~$ touch hbarros.ldif
This is the content we are using for this sample file:
# Object 1: uid=hbarros,dc=admartini,dc=scriptcase,dc=info
dn: uid=hbarros,dc=admartini,dc=scriptcase,dc=info
objectclass: account
objectclass: simpleSecurityObject
objectclass: top
uid: hbarros
userpassword: {MD5}6jAUXhUfuutm7cbFC6oVUA==
Now we are ready to put it on the database itself.
Get admin rights:

user@computer:~$ su
Stop the lapd service:

root@computer:/home/user# /etc/init.d/sladp stop
Use slapadd to import the file:

root@computer:/home/user# slapadd -l /home/user/hbarros.ldif
Restart the service.

root@computer:/home/user# /etc/init.d/slapd start
Results
This tutorial created a LDAP authentication environment. The authentication data for this example are:
Domain ADMARTINI
DN DC=admartini,DC=scriptcase,DC=info
User Name UID=hbarros,DC=scriptcase,DC=info
Log
Making use of ScriptCase Log resources you can implement a complete Log system to your projects. Storing all
data that was updated or deleted by the end-user and which applications they are accessing.
Image 1: Log Module Menu
Create / Edit
This option is used to create or modify a new scheme of Log module to your project.
Image 2: Creating a Log Scheme.
Once you already have a Log Scheme created, they will be listed to be edited or erased.
Image 3: Log Scheme List.

Applications
Here we can define which applications and events will be tracked.
At the top we can apply actions to all lines or we can though the list and select an action to each line individually.
Image 4: Applications Interface.
At the bottom of the page we have options to filter the applications that are being listed.
Image 5: Toolbar on the bottom.

Connecting Your Database
Connecting Scriptcase To Your Database
CONNECTING - DATABASE
Access
Access
Currently Scriptcase offers the connection witht the Access database using the driver MDAC28SDK or Newer (
Windows ) and UnixODBC ( Linux ).
Itâ??s
quite simple to enable the extension, select the operating system e continue with the tutorial and in a few
steps youâ??ll learn how to enable the extension and create a connection with Scriptcase.
If youâ??re using your own environment, pre configured, then the extension needs to be enabled in the PHP.
Select your operating system to verify how to do the connection with Access.
Windows
Connecting With Access Using Odbc
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the MS Access
database
Step 1: Access your Scriptcase, for example, http://localhost:8081/scriptcase/ on the toolbar go to the marked
icon in the image below, referring to â??New Connectionâ??.
Step 2: After clicking â??New

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the MS Access
database image.
Step 3: On the following image, place the required information:
Connection Name - Define the name of your new connection.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, bey default itâ??s MS Access ODBC.
Test Connection - Validates the connection and informs if it was successful or not.
ODBC Name - On this field, inform the name of the ODBC created on your system.
User - Inform the user of your ODBC connection if it has one.
Password - Inform the password of your ODBC connection if it has one.
For more details on configuring the connection of the database click on Advanced
Decimal Separator - Select the type of separator, between coma and period.
Persistent Connection - Persistent connections are connections that donâ??t close after running your script.
Use the schema before the table name - Allows the use of schemas before the table names.
Filter - Clicking on this tab, the following page will appear:
Show - Allows to show Tables, Views, System Tables and Procedures.

Searches - Allows to define which tables and owners will be shown.
Step 4: Always test your connection before saving, if the message â??Connection Successâ??appears, then save
the connection. If it fails to connect, revise the fields that were informed, especially Username, Password,
Database and Server/Host.
Verify if the module is enabled in the diagnosis.

Linux
Connecting With Access Using Odbc
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the MS Access
database

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the MS Access
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, bey default itâ??s MS Access ODBC.


Ibm Db2
Ibm Db2
Currently Scriptcase offers the IBM DB2 connection through the DSDriver IBM DB2.
The extension comes disabled in our installer.
To enable the extension is quite simple, select your operating system and continue with the tutorial and in a few
steps youâ??ll learn how to enable the extension and create a connection on Scriptcase.
Windows
Connecting With Ibm Db2
Drivers DB2
Drivers DB2
Currently Scriptcase offers four drivers to connect with the DB2 database: DB2, DB2 ODBC Native , DB2 Generic
ODBC and DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower.
You can see the features below:
DB2 ODBC Native ( Recommended ) : Allows the connection to be made using the native driver of the DB2
database.
DB2 : Allows the connection to be made using the native driver of the DB2 database.
DB2 Generic ODBC : Allows the connection to made using a DB2 ODBC Data Source.
DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or lower: Allows the connection to be made using using a DB2 6 or lower ODBC Data
Source.
If not, then follow the steps below to enable the extension, DB2:
Enabling the extension

1. First, do the download of the instant client compatible with the architecture of your operating system, x64 or
x86 bits
Instant Client for Windows x64 bits

Instant Client for Windows x86 bits
2. After downloading the file, follow the steps in the installation wizard clicking on next and keeping the default
values.
Image1: Configuring the DB2 Instant Client.
3. Accept the terms and continue with the installation.
4. Click on Next, and keep the default values of the installer

5. Click on Installer, to start the installation process
Image4: Installing the DB2 Instant Client.
6. Click on finish, to finish the installation.
Image5: Installing the DB2 Instant Client.
Creating a Connection on Scriptcase

Now weâ??ll access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the DB2 database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the DB2
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s DB2 Native ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the DB2 database.
Database Name - Inform the name of your DB2database.
User - Inform the user of your DB2 database.
Password - Inform the password of your DB2 database.
Schema - You can tell the Schema (Optional), if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema.
autocommit - Enable or disable autocommit feature.
i5_lib - A character value that indicates the default library that will be used for resolving unqualified file
references.
This is not valid if the connection is using system naming mode.
i5_naming - Enables or disables the appointment so DB2 UDB CLI iSeries system. Files are qualified using
the slash (/) delimiter.
Unqualified files are resolved using the library list for the job.
i5_commit - Select desired option for treating IBM DB2 data reading.


Linux
Now weâ??ll access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the DB2 database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the DB2
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s DB2 Native ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the DB2 database.
Database Name - Inform the name of your DB2database.
User - Inform the user of your DB2 database.
Password - Inform the password of your DB2 database.
Schema - You can tell the Schema (Optional), if you wish to use only the tables belonging to the schema.
autocommit - Enable or disable autocommit feature.

i5_lib - A character value that indicates the default library that will be used for resolving unqualified file
references.
This is not valid if the connection is using system naming mode.
i5_naming - Enables or disables the appointment so DB2 UDB CLI iSeries system. Files are qualified using
the slash (/) delimiter.
Unqualified files are resolved using the library list for the job.
i5_commit - Select desired option for treating IBM DB2 data reading.

Mac
Unfortunately it's not possible to do the connection with the DB2 database, because there isn't an Instant Client
for Mac OSX later then 10.8.
For more information, click here.

Firebird
Firebird
The automatic installation of Scriptcase already comes with the FireBird extension enabled in the PHP by default,
only needing to create a connection in Scriptcase.
If youâ??re
using your own environment, pre configured, then the FireBird extension needs to be enabled in the
PHP.
Select your operating system to verify how to do the connection with FireBird.
Windows
Connecting With Firebird
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the FireBird
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the Firebird
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Firebird.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the Firebird database.
Database Name - Inform the path to the Firebird database.
User - Inform the user of your Firebird database.
Password - Inform the password of your Firebird database.


Linux
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Mac
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Informix
Informix
Currently Scriptcase offers the connection for the Informix database, using the driver Informix PDO.
The Informix extension comes disabled with our installer.
To enable the extension is quite easy, select your operating system and go through with the tutorial and in a few
Windows
Connecting With Informix Pdo
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the Informix
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the Informix
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Informix PDO.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the Informix Server.
Database Name - Inform the name of your database.
User - Inform the user of your Informix database.
Password - Inform the password of your Informix database.
Filter - By clicking on this tab, you will see this page:


Linux
Connecting With Informix Pdo
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Mac
Connecting With Informix
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Interbase
Interbase
The automatic installation of Scriptcase already comes with the InterBase extension enabled in the PHP, by
default, only needing to create a connection in Scriptcase.
If youâ??re
using your own environment, pre configured, then the InterBase extension needs to be enabled in the
PHP.
Select your operating system to verify how to do the connection with InterBase.
Windows
Connecting With Interbase
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the InterBase
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the InterBase
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Interbase 6.5 or Higher.
IP:PATH - Inform the server in format IP:path.
User - Inform the user of your Interbase database.
Password - Inform the password of your Interbase database.


Linux
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Mac
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Mysql
Mysql
The Scriptcase installer enables in the PHP, the MySQL module by default, leaving only the user to connect to
the database through Scriptcase.
If you're using your own preconfigured environment, then the MySQL extension needs to be enabled in the PHP.
Select your operating system to see how to do the MySQL connection.

Windows
Connecting With Mysql
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the MySQL
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the MySQL
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s MySQL PDO.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the MySQL database.
Port - Inform the port to be used for your connection. By Default port is 3306.
Database Name - Select the name of your database.
User - Inform the user of your MySQL database.
Password - Inform the password of your MySQL database.


Linux
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Mac
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.



Oracle
Oracle
Currently Scriptcase offers the Oracle connection through the Oracle Instant Client.
The extension comes disabled in our installer.
Windows
Connecting With Oracle
Now weâ??ll access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with Oracle.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the Oracle
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher.
TSNAME - Inform the IP of the Server where the Oracle database is installed and the name of the instance
created.
User - Inform the user of your Oracle Database.
Password - Inform the password of your Oracle Database.
client_encoding - Your database encoding.


Connecting With Oracle Odbc

database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Oracle ODBC.



Linux

database image.

created.


Connecting With Oracle Odbc

database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Oracle ODBC.



Mac

database image.

created.


Postgresql
Postgresql
The Scriptcase installer enables in the PHP, the PostgreSQL module by default, leaving only the user to connect
to the database through Scriptcase.
If you're using your own preconfigured environment, then the PostgreSQL extension needs to be enabled in the
PHP.
Select your operating system to see how to do the PostgreSQL connection.

Windows
Connecting With Postgresql
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the PostgreSQL
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the PostgreSQL
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s PostgresSQL 7 or Higher.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the PostgreSQL database.
User - Inform the user of your PostgreSQL database.
Password - Inform the password of your PostgreSQL database.


Linux
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s PostgresSQL 7 or Higher.


Mac
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s PostgresSQL PDO.


Sql Server
Connecting To Ms Sql Server
The MS SQL Server connection to ScriptCase can be done in different ways according to your operating system.
Select below which connection you want to enable in Scriptcase.
TO PERFORM THE MS SQL SERVER CONNECTION ON WINDOWS, SEE THE TABLE

BELOW:
MS-SQL Server Compatibility
Win
Win Windows Windows
Server Win 7 Linux /
Server Win 8 Server Vista
2008 R2 SP1 MacOS
2012 2008 SP2 SP2
SP1
Native SRV PDO - - -
Native SRV - - -
ODBC -
SQL Server Client
TO PERFORM THE MS SQL SERVER CONNECTION ON LINUX, SEE THE TOPIC

BELOW:
See topic: Connecting to SQLServer on Linux
TO PERFORM THE MS SQL SERVER CONNECTION ON MAC OS X, SEE THE TOPIC

BELOW:
See topic: Connecting to SQLServer on Mac OS X
Windows
Connecting With Ms Sql Server Native Srv Pdo
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with MSSQL Server
Native SRV PDO.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the MSSQL
Server image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s Native SRV PDO, Native SRV ,
MSSQL Server ou ODBC.
Server/Host (Name or IP) -Inform the server IP or name where the database is installed.
Database Name - Enter the MySQL database instance name.
Username - Enter a valid database user name. If you are connecting with a remote database server, check if
the database user has remote access.
Password - Enter the valid password.


Connecting With Ms Sql Server Native Srv
Now weâ??ll
Native SRV.

Server image.



Connecting With Ms Sql Server Odbc
Now weâ??ll
ODBC.

Server image.



Connecting With Ms Sql Server
Now weâ??ll access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with MSSQL Server.

Server image.



Linux
Drivers MSSQL Server

Currently Scriptcase offers four drivers to with MSSQL Server database: MSSQL Server Native SRV, MSSQL
Server Native SRV PDO, MSSQL Server ODBC and MSSQL Server.
Currently Scriptcase offers two drivers to connect with MSSQL Server database: MSSQL Server ODBC e MSSQL
Server.
Currently Scriptcase offers two drivers to connect with MSSQL Server database: MSSQL Server ODBC e MSSQL
Server.
You can see the features below:
MSSQL Server Native SRV PDO ( Recommended ) : Allows the connection to be made, using the native driver
for MSSQL Server for Windows.
MSSQL Server Native SRV : Allows the connection to be made, using the native driver for MSSQL Server for
Windows.
MSSQL Server : Allows the connection to be made, using the native PHP driver for MSSQL Server.
MSSQL Server ODBC : Allows the connection to be made using a MSSQL Server ODBC Data Source.
MSSQL Server ( Recommended ): Allows the connection to be made, using the native PHP driver for MSSQL
Server.
MSSQL Server ( Recommended ): Allows the connection to be made, using the native PHP driver for MSSQL
Server.
1 Performing the XAMPP Download

1.1 On this image you will see the website apachefriends.org, where we can download XAMPP. Make the download of PHP 5.6 version
1.2 Downloading directly through wget
2 Installing XAMPP
2.1 We have to make XAMPP an executable file ( command chmod -x ).
Set up the permission for execution ( command chmod 777 ).
And execute the file that was downloaded ( command ./).
2.2 We will type 'Y' for all the options of the XAMPP installer.
Note.: XAMPP default directory will be '/opt/lampp'
2.3 Complete installation.
2.4 Now just access from your Linux server'/'

2.5 Access the file info.php and check the settings of MS SQL module.
3 Downloading the production environment
3.1 Set the production environment
The production environment is a common function library used in applications generated by ScriptCase. It should
be used and configured together with published systems.The production environment is a common function
library used in applications generated by ScriptCase. It should be used and configured together with published
systems.
For more information about publication visit the topic Publication Scheme.
On the image below we will see the direct link for the production environment download.
3.2 Copying ScriptCase production environment for your web server
Copying and unzipping the ".zip" file in the root of the web server, originating to the production environment.
3.3 Renaming the directory to 'prod_scriptcase' and giving full permission for this directory.
4 Setting FreeTDS
4.1 FreeTDS It is a library that enables the connection to MS SQLServer from a Linux station.
Inside the directory '/opt/lampp/etc' there is a file called 'freetds.conf', which is setting file of FreeTDS.
4.2 Accessing the setting file of FreeTDS
The settings used in our case are highlighted.
[SQLSERVER] --> This is the name that will refer to my dabatase server.
host --> This is the IP of my database server.
port --> This is the port where my database is installed.
tds version --> This is my SQLServer version.

5 Creating a connection from my production environment
5.1 Accessing the production environment through the URL --> '/scriptcase/prod/'
Accessing the production environment with the default password 'scriptcase'.
5.2 Change the default password of the production environment.
5.3 Creating a new connection.

5.4 Selecting SGBD.
Connection performed successfully.

Mac Os X
Now weâ??ll access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with MSSQL Server.

Server image.



Sqlite
Sqlite
The Scriptcase installer enables in the PHP, the SQLite module by default, leaving only the user to connect to the
database through Scriptcase.
If you're using your own preconfigured environment, then the SQLite extension needs to be enabled in the PHP.
Select your operating system to see how to do the SQLite connection.

Windows
Connecting With Sqlite
Now weâ??llaccess Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the SQLite
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the SQLite
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s SQLite PDO.
PATH - Inform the full path to the file SQLite database file (file.db).


Linux
database.

database image.



Mac
database.

database image.



Sybase
Sybase
Currently Scriptcase offers the connection to Sybase database through the client Sybase ASE.
The Sybase extension comes disabled in our installer (Windows e Linux ), but the Mac installer comes with the
extension enabled.
Windows
Connecting With Sybase
ï»¿
Now weâ??ll
access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the Sybase
database.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the Sybase
database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, by default itâ??s sybase_ct.
Server/Host (Name or IP) - Inform the location of the Sybase database.
User - Inform the user of your Sybase database.
Password - Inform the password of your Sybase database.


Linux
ï»¿
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, bey default itâ??s sybase_ct.


Mac
ï»¿
Now weâ??ll
database.

database image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used, bey default itâ??s sybase_ct.


Generic Odbc
Generic Odbc Connection
The Generic ODBC connection is normally used to create connections with the databases dBase (.dbf),
Progress, Dataflex, Paradox, Visual FoxPro, etc.
Only needing to have the ODBC driver for the corresponding database.
If youâ??re using your own environment, pre configured, then the ODBC extension needs to be enabled in the PHP.
Select your operating system to verify how to do the connection with ODBC.
Windows
Connecting With Odbc
Now weâ??ll access Scriptcase from Scriptcase from the browser and create a connection with the Generic ODBC.

Connectionâ??,the page for creating connections will appear, click on the Generic
ODBC image.

DBMS Driver - Allows you to define the driver thatâ??ll be used.


Linux
Connecting With Odbc

ODBC image.



Mac
Connecting With Generic Odbc

ODBC image.



Working With Applications
Overview
Working with Applications

Each page created by Scriptcase is called "Application". The following types of application are available:
GRID - Applications used for data visualization and analysis. ScriptCase Grid applications combine search
functions and report formatting functions including generating output in PDF, XLS, XML, RTF and other formats.
FORM - Applications for data update. ScriptCase creates applications with all resources: records inclusion,
update, exclusion and navigation. Scriptcase offers a flexible range of form types to accommodate the business
needs. See below the options available .
Simple - A record per page

Multiple Record - Multiple records per page. Record lines are inserted, updated or deleted at the same time.
Editable Grid - Multiple records per page. Each record must be edited at a time. All record lines are enabled
to edit.
Editable Grid View - Multiple records per page. Each record must be edited at a time. The record lines are
disabled. To edit a record line, first it must be enabled to edit.
CONTROL - Applications to manage the system infra-structure, like capturing data (parameters) that will be
passed to other applications. Ex.: system login, company selection, access selection and etc.
SEARCH - Filter form to link to any application that needs to receive a string having a WHERE clause.
MENU - Applications to create a system hierarchic navigation structure. It is a extremely useful resource, once
that it organizes the applications visually, facilitating the user access to the applications.
TREE MENU - Applications to create a system TreeView navigation structure (similar to the windows explorer).
TABS - ScriptCase combines many developed applications in a structure where each tab corresponds to an
application.
PDF REPORT - Create PDF files. ScriptCase provides a tool to generate quality reports using pre-defined
formats. Use this application to generate reports for government institutions or other organization that required
specific format.
DASHBOARD - Allows you to display various types of applications nested in Widgets similar to those for iGoogle.
BLANK - Allows developers to write PHP / HTML code and display a result of the process.
CALENDAR - It allow to generate Calendar applications. Great to build applications with Scheduling and
Appointments.
Creating Applications
How To Create Applications?
Working with Applications - Creating Applications

ScriptCase offers a Standard mode and a Batch mode to create applications. To access the Standard Mode, just
click on File >>Create new application Menu or on the toolbar button Create new application.
Image1: New Application through Menu.
Image2: New Application through Toolbar.
To see more about creating applications, click on the following link:
Creating applications
Batch Creation
Scriptcase has an option to Create Multiple Grid and Form Applications at once. (Batch)
Image 3: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Menu.
Image 4: Acessing Batch Express Creation through Toolbar.
See more details about the Batch Express Creation Mode.

Express Mode
The Express mode helps to create applications faster than Wizard Mode. Just trivial data must be informed. All
information is in the same screen.
Image1: Express Mode Interface.
The user selects the application type to create on the left side and all necessary settings are displayed on the
right .
Connection - It indicates a database to use. The connection must be previously created in the project.
Table - It allows to create a SQL Select command based on a table (or view) from the database. It will get all
fields from the table.
SQL Select Statement (only for Grid and Search applications) - Displays the SQL Select Statement. It
can be edited or you can use "SQLBuilder" Tool to build the SQL.
Name - Define a name to the Application.
Localization - Define the Language and Regional settings used in the Application.
Batch Express Mode
Batch Express mode creates multiple applications (Grids and Forms).
Image1: Batch Express Mode Interface.
First a connection must be selected. Then a list with all tables availabe on that database (connection) is displayed
(Image1).
Image2: Selecting Tables.
When a table is selected then ScriptCase displays an option to create Form and Grid based on that table
(Image2).
Click on "Next" to see a list of Grid and Form applications selected on previous step. Inform the name, a
description and the type if it is a Form. (Image3)
Image3: Applications Descriptions Interface.

On the bottom, there is an option to generate the source code and/or to open the applications to be edited after
creating them.
Then click on "Finish" to create the applications.
Image5: Creating the applications.
After created the applications are listed in the Project Home.(Image5)

Editing Applications
How To Edit Applications?
Working with Applications - Editing Applications

Each application type has a great variety of settings. These settings can be edited by opening the application edit
panel.
To edit an application you can click on the application name or on the "Edit" option in the Application list panel.
Image1: Editing an application.
An application workspace has 2 panels. The first is the applications settings groups (a tree menu divided in
Groups). The second panel opens the settings option selected in the first.
Image2: Editing an application.
1 - Application Settings Groups
It groups the access to application settings using Tree Menus inside an Accordion Menu. It helps to subdivide
categories of settings.
2 - Application Settings Panel
It opens the settings option selected from the Application Settings Groups (Menu on the Left).
Grid Applications
Overview
Grid applications
Grid applications are powerful information analysis resource. Grid applications display data retrieved from a
database using a SELECT statement. The displayed information is organized in a grid layout.
The grid applications generated are complete web reports with the following functionality:
Feature Description
Search Search form associated to the grid. Use the search page to
filter the displayed data.
Paging Define the number of rows to display per page and page
navigation.
Data Exporting Generated grids can export data to many formats : RTF,
XML, XLS and CSV.
Groups In one click is possible to create break down lines and group
data by N levels or fields.
Totals Summarize columns using different functions such as: SUM ,
AVG , MAX , MIN.
Summary Display a summary page based on groups and totals,
displaying only the summary data.
Charts Charts based on grid´s data can be displayed in different
styles like: Bars, Columns, Pie , Dots and more
Sorting Single sort is automatically created on reports columns
header, cascade sort is also available at run time.
Fields The end user can select at runtime which columns to display
selection in the grid.
Printing Print the generated reports in PDF- or HTML-formats.
options
Links creation Create links to other applications.
Events Customize grid events PHP code, used to create calculated
programming fields, business rules, etc.
Data formatting Format the grid data, field types such as: date , currency ,
decimal values, integer values, images, text. Automatic data
formatting can also be integrated to the regional settings.
Image1: Simple grid application running.
Image2: Grid application using group and total.
Image3: Grid's Search

Grid
Grid Modules
Grid - Modules
The grid application can take a variety of exibition formats of content. Therefore, the menu "Grids Modules" offers
a simple and friendly interface to se tup the application for each exhibition formats.
Figura1: Interface Módulos da Aplicação
The option "Initial Module" has a list of the states that the grid can start, below check out some informations about
each one:
Search: Starts by a search form that makes a filtering in the query data.
Grid: Module that shows the result of a query in a one or more tables of the database.
Summary: Module that summarizes the data of one Group By of grid.
Chart: Data displayed in Chart format.
Print: Organizes the application to the print mode.
PDF: Displays the application on mode to view or download the PDF.
Word: Displays the application on mode to view or download the Word document.
Excel: Displays the application on mode to view or download the Excel document.
RTF: Displays the application on mode to view or download the RTF.
XML: Displays the application on mode to view or download the XML.
CSV: Displays the application on mode to view or download the CSV.
Below you can see the setup otions for the grid modules:
Search:
Filter module: Application module where search is applied.

Use Iframe: Defines if the search will be displayed alone or on the same page that the module choosen in
the option above.
Initial State: If the previous option is marked like "Yes", this option defines if the application will be displayed
on the first visit together with the search.
Iframe Height: Defines the height of the Iframe, case the option "Use Iframe" is marked like "Yes".
Search Modal: Defines if the search will be displayed on "Modal" format.
Search Height: Case the option "Search Modal" is marked "Yes", this option defines the height of this modal.
Width Search: Case the option "Search Modal" is marked "Yes", this option defines the width of this modal.
Table Width: Width value for the application table.
Table Width Unit: Measure unit for the width.
Grid:
Orientation: Orientation format of the grid records, being: Vertical, Horizontal, Slide ou Free Format.
Fixed label: This option will freeze the column labels on top of the screen during the page scrolling.
Paging: Type of paging for the records, being: Total, Partial or Lazy loading.
Lines per Page: Define the default amount of lines for the page, in case the selected option is "Partial".
Infinite Scroll implementation: Amount of new lines that'll appear as soon as the Infinite Scroll is triggered.
This option is only enabled if "Infinite Scroll" is selected as the type of paging.
Open windows in a Modal: In the Grids with the Infinite Scroll enabled, the links between applications and
details of the Grid, that are setup for displaying in an iframe, will be altered to open in a modal. This option is
only active if the selected option for paging is "Infinite Scrollâ??.
Maintaining State: When navigating to another window and returning, maintain the amount of records
displayed. This option is only active if the selected option for paging is "Infinite Scrollâ??.
Height of the Grid: Define the height of the Grid in pixels when using Infinite Scroll. When this option is
empty, the Infinite Scroll will run in the whole page.
Width of the Table: Table's width value of the application.
Unit of the Width of the Table: Unit measurement used to set the width of the table.
Detail:
Display Detail: Detail record display mode. Options: Beside the grid, Below the grid, In another page, In
another window or Modal.
Alignment: Case the option "Display Detail" is marked like "Beside the Grid" or "Below the grid", this option
defines the alignment mode of the fields values in the record detail.
Detail page width: Width value for application detail.
Measure unit of the detail: Measure width used for the application width.
Summary:
Summary Display: Summary display page.
Chart:
Charts display mode: Locale where the chart will be displayed. Being able: New window, Same Page or
Another Page.
Display before summary: Defines if the chart will be displayed before the summary.
Number of columns: Quantity of charts per line (one chart for each column).
Margin: Margin between the charts.
Horizontal Alignment: Charts horizontal alignment. Being able: Left, Center or Right.
Vertical Alignment: Charts vertical alignment. Being able: Top, Center or Bottom.
View settings in the chart window: Allows you to view the settings in same window as the chart.
Settings
Image2: Grid Settings.
Attributes:
Friendly URL - This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application. Allowed
characters are the same available on URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, -_. This option can also be changed on the home
screen, on the â??Friendly URLâ?? column at the applications list.
Display Line Number - Display the line number in the begin of each line.
Display Titles - Display the field title (labels).
Line break in Titles - Allows the line break in the heading titles (labels).
Horizontal Alignment - Application horizontal alignment.
Margins - Define the margin of the application (up, down, right and left).
Alignment - Slide or vertical grid fields alignment.
Table Columns:
Informed - It will assume the informed width values at field level in the configuration of the visualization.
Calculated - Calculate size according with the type and the field size.
Automatic - The alignment will be a browser criteria.
Refresh Interval - Interval in seconds to refresh (reload) the grid records.

Edit Fields
New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields.
Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field.

2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application.
3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type.
Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Defines which fields are displayed in the application.
Figure 1: Select Fields.
Note: The list on the left displays all fields retrieved from the SQL select query for the application. The list on the right displays which fields will be displayed in the application
(select a field and click on the right arrow to include it in the form).
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons
for each part independently. A button can even be part of both parts simultaneously.
It is also possible to separate which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed on a Mobile
Device.
Desktop: Configures the toolbar for exibition type "Classic Web Version", i.e, these configurations will be
used when it is accessed by a Desktop.
Mobile: Configures the toolbar for exibition type "Mobile Version", i.e, these settings will be used when it is
accessed by a Mobile Device.
Image1: Toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid.
Next Advance to the next page of the grid.

Previous Return to the previous page of the grid.
First Locates in the first page of the grid.
Last Locates in the last page of the grid.
Exit Quit the application.
Navigation by page Display links to pages. eg: 1 2 3 4 5
Exports - Define the formats that must be generated. The ScriptCase can generate:
Print Create the grid in HTML format.

PDF Create a complete report, having all grid data in PDF
format.
WORDCreate a complete report, having all grid data in WORD
(.doc) format.
XLS Create a complete report, having all grid data in Excel
format.
XML Create a complete report, having all grid data in XML
format.
RTF Create a complete report, having all grid data in RTF
format.
CSV Create a complete report, having all grid data in CSV
format.
Other
Jump to Define a button that allows to skip ( and position)

to a specific record.
Rows limit A button to define a maximum number of line per
page.
Search When clicked lead to the search form.
Columns Selects columns to display (or hide).
Group By Selects a "group by" rule to be used in the
application.
Sorting A button that allows the user to sort the page by
Order multiple criteria ( column ).
Summary A option in the toolbar that displays a summary
line with result set records info.
Gantt A button to display the Gantt's chart.
Languages A combo box to select the language.
Themes A combo box to select the theme (available in the
project properties).
Rows Display a rows counter in the application.
Counter
Web help A button to display the current page help.
Quicksearch Executes a search in any field of the application.
Separator Image used to separate the buttons group.
Group of Buttons
Export Define a button that allows to open a float menu with

a group of buttons.
Separator
The Group option allows to be created groups of buttons.

Image2: Option Group.
Add:
Image3: Interface to add a group
Name: Value for the name of buttons group.

Label: Value that will be displayed on the application.
Hint \ Title: Value that will be showed when the cursor is over the button.
Button Type: Type of button to be displayed. (Button, Image or Link)
Image: Image to be displayed.
Display: Mode how the button should appear, it may assume three formats: Only Text, Only Image or Text
and Image.
Display Position: Option to choose the position of text and image. The option "Display" is like "Text and
Image".
After group creation, so that the buttons are part of it, it is necessary to position it below and more to the right of
the buttons group name, like the image below:
Image4: Interface to organize the buttons on toolbar

Buttons Settings
Image5: Buttons Settings.
OPTIONS
Image6: Grid Toolbar Options.
Attributes:
Display summary - Display summary at the bottom of each page.

Format rows counter - Display format of the rows counter. eg.: [1 to 10 of 200]
The amount of links displayed - The amount of page links to display if the option navigation by page is
enabled.
Lines per page - Amount of record lines per page.
Jump to - Jump to page, or record.
Rows to choose - Show which options will be displayed for amount of rows in the combobox. eg. 10,20,30
Export
Note: The Grids and the nested grids are only shown in the PDF export.
This screen allows to configure the PDF file to generate by the grid to export.
Image1: PDF Settings Interface.
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape.

PDF Format - Define the PDF form type (letter, A4, etc.).
Print type - Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic.
Records per page - Applicable only for horizontal lined up grids, define the number of records printed per
page.
Rows per page in summary - Define number of rows printed per PDF page summary.
Complete lines until footer - Fill with lines (empty) until footer.
Open PDF directly - Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page.
Create Charts - Creates summary charts in PDF.
Configurable PDF - Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application.
Page numbers format- Define the display format: simple (1,2,3,4,5,...), complete (1/n, 2/n, 3/n,…) or it will
not use numeration.
Upper Margin - Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF upper margin.
Bottom Margin - Enter a value in mm to be applied on the PDF bottom margin.
Right Margin - PDF right margin in Millimeters.
Left Margin - PDF left margin in Millimeters.
Print Background - Allow the user to print the PDF with the background or not.
JS Execution Time - The max execution time to wait the JS proccess.
Configure the WORD format of the grid.
Image2: WORD Settings Interface.
Attributes
Print Type - Character used to separate lines of registers.

Rows per page in grid - Define number of rows printed per WORD page.
Rows per page in summary - Define number of rows printed per WORD page summary.
Open WORD directly - Opens the generated WORD file without displaying an intermediated link page.
Configure the CSV format of the grid.
Image2: CSV Settings Interface.
Attributes
Lines separator - Character used to separate lines of registers.

Columns separator - Character used to separate the data columns.
Text delimiter - Character used as a data delimiter of a column.
Opening CSV Directly - Open the CSV generated file without the displaying an intermediated page link.
Add Label - Adds label to the columns.
Image4: Other formats Interface.
Open XLS directly - Open the generated XLS file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Format - File format (XLSX or XLS).
HTML Print
Configure the HTML format of the grid.
Image3: HTML Print Interface.
Attributes:
Print Mode - Select what will be printed: Both, Current Page and Complete Report.
Print Type - Selecting the print mode (color): Both, Black and White and Colorful.
Rows per Page - Define the quantity of rows to display per page.
Rows per page in summary - Define the quantity of rows to display per page in PDF summary.
Print Background - Show Background printing HTML.
Other Formats
Image4: Other formats Interface.
Open XML directly - Open the generated XML file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Open RTF directly - Open the generated RTF file without displaying an intermediated page link.
Sql
Image1: Interface of SQL Configuration.
SQLSelect Statement - Display the SQL select command. Edit the statement to add or delete fields,
functions, etc.
Tip: Use the SQL Builder for statement fast assembly.
SQL Preparation - Enter SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the main select.
Connection - Display the (database) connection name used. This connection can be changed for another
that has the same tables (SQL).
Use Customized Message - Define a customized error message to be displayed when the application has
no records(EOF).
No Records Message - Message displayed when the application has no records. Field associated to “ Use
Personalized Message”.
Font Face - Error Message font face. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.
Font Size - Error Message font size. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.
Font Color - Error Message font color. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.
Variable for Table - Variable name used for replacing the table name. Also inform the part of the table name
that will be changed by the contents of the variable.
Note: Fill the first box with the variable name. The second box must be filled with a part of the table name to be substituted.
Fields Variables - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each dynamically
determined field, enter the name of the variable and the field that will be substituted.
Note: Fill the first box with variable name, in the second select the name of the field to be substituted.
Case Sensitive - Apply case sensitive.

Sorting
Figure 1: Sorting initial setting for each application field.
Configuration for fields that allow ordering setting
This property is useful to define the fields that will allow sorting options. The field sorting is already applied inside
the generated application, just by clicking on the name of the column (field) that the user wants to sort. By default
the Group By settings will be considered for the fields sorting.
Also by default, the first six fields are already checked (showing a star on the field left side), they can be sorted so
that the user does not have to worry about that detail.
Figure 2: sorting Fields Configuration
Note: Use the on/off function to include or remove a field.
Sort Fields
Sets the initial sorting for each application field, it can be "ascending" or "descending" sort..
Defines the fields that are available by clicking in the "Sorting" button inside the Grid.
Figure 3: Advanced Sorting
Use displayed fields - Sets all the fields that are displayed in the Grid and that are available by clicking the
Ordering button.
Use columns - Sets all fields configured in the columns option as available by clicking in the Grid sorting
button.
Define Columns - Allows that the fields are chosen freely, according to the available fields:
Group Label
With this option, you can enter one or more titles to your columns in your applications and can change its size, its
color, font and position them as desired.
Note: If you have dynamic displayed fields, the Group Label wonâ??t work.
Image1: Edit Cell Properties
Attributes:
Title - Choose the title that will appear on your Group Label.
Source Text - Choose the font that the title appears.
Font size - Set the font size of your title.
Horizontal alignment - Sets the alignment of the title horizontally. It can be in either on the left, center or in
the middle.
Vertical alignment - Setting the alignment of the title vertically. It can be below, within or on top.
Text Color - Choose the color of the title text that appears when the application runs.
Background Color - Sets the background color of the space where the title appears.
Image2: Grid with Group Label.
Security
Attribute:
Use Security: With this option selected, the application is only accessible when the sc_apl_status macro is
enabled. Disabled applications display the message "Unauthorized user" when accessed.
Access to applications may be granted through a control application to authenticate users. See the examples
below.
Example 1: Activating an application called grid_categories.
In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user), insert the
following macro call:
sc_apl_status('grid_categories','on');
Example 2: Creating a rule to authenticate by user type in a login form containing a field called userid.
In the login application onValidate event (control form application used to authenticate a user), insert
the following code:
// two users: john and mary with permission to access different applications
if({userid} == 'john') {
sc_apl_status('form_categories','on');
sc_apl_status('grid_products','on');
sc_apl_status('form_products','on');
}
elseif({userid} == 'mary') {
sc_apl_status('grid_products','off');
sc_apl_status('form_products','off');
}
else{
sc_error_message("Unauthorized user!");
}
Example 3: Authenticating applications using a database table.
In the login application onValidate event, enter the following code:
URL output of the security (denied access URL redirection): It redirects the user to this URL, if he does
not have access to the application.
Use Password: An application password setting is required (See image below).
At run time a text box is displayed requiring the access password. If the password is not entered correctly, an
"Unauthorized user" message is displayed.
In the development environment it is possible to suppress the above steps purely for testing purposes,
thereby avoiding repeated password requests (or access denied) for each application execution. Disable
the options Enable use of security and Enable Use of Password in the Configuration menu | My
ScriptCase.
Request password just once - Requests the password only once per session, not needing to request to inform
the password everytime you open an application in the same session. Enable direct call by URL - Allows the
application to be called directly from the URL of the browsers. Enable CSRF - With this option enabled,
Scriptcase prevents malicious attacks to a page on which the unauthorized command are transmitted from a user
that the page trusts. These attacks are known as "Cross-Site Request Forgery". (This option is available only for
Control and Form applications).
Log
New interface included in V8. It will allow the user to change the log's configuration for the application.
Image 1: Log Interface.
Options:
Scheme - Scheme of log to be used for the application.

All Fields - Use all fields in the log.
Events - Which event the log will save the application changes.
Quick Search
Quick Search is an option that allows us to make searches in multiple fields through a text input field in the
toolbar.
In the Quicksearch settings we have the following options:
Button within the search - Option to inform if the search button is inside of the text box (input object).
Quicksearch show combobox - Show combobox if there is only one quicksearch option.
Quicksearch Watermark - Watermark showed in quicksearch.
Quicksearch width - Quicksearch width in pixels.
Display the Quick search old format - Displays old format for selected fields of the Quick search.
Then we must select which fields can be searched.

And we can select several search criterias.
Note: You must add the quicksearch button on the "Toolbar" Settings to use it.
Gantt
The Gantt chart is used to illustrate the progress of the different stages of a project.
Gantt Chart options:
Output Format - Output format of the Gantt chart.

Field label - Field containing the record label of the Gantt chart.
Start Date - Field containing the start date of the registration in the Gantt chart.
End Date - Field containing the end date of registration in the Gantt chart.
Percent Completed - Field containing information regarding the percent completed of the task in the Gantt
chart.
Resource - Field containing the name of the resource allocated to the task in the Gantt chart.
Fields
Fields - Overview
Overview
In this session just the fields that are part of the grid are displayed, these are the fields that were selected in the
menu â??GRID - SELECT FIELDSâ??.
A series of attributes are defined to each field. The user can set the attributes specific to a field data type using
the update attribute settings page that reloads according to selected type.
Text
Image1: Field General Settings.
Attributes:
Data type- Define the application field type. Text fields accepts all characters.
Label - Field title in the display. For example: a field identified in database as fld_client_name, could be label
Client Name. That is because the label is a field nickname in the application layer.
Case Settings - Converts the field text depending on the option:
Show HTML content - Define the field as HTML. HTML fields store HTML tags processed accordingly by
ScriptCase. If marked as "Yes", the HTML will be displayed, if it's marked as "No" the HTML will not be
displayed
Grid Mask - Define the field display mask. See below the characters used to define the mask.
CharacterDescription
X Placeholder to any character. Replaced by any character. If number
of characters entered are less then the mask size, the field value is
completed with zeros (Filling full size field entry is required).
Z Replaced by any character retrieved from database. Suppress zeros
at field left (Complete field filling is optional). When used combined
with the mask character X it should be placed at the mask left.
Examples:
Mask Field Value Formatted Value

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Do Not Repeat Value - Display the field only once (for records with equal values). See below.
Repeating value Without repeating value
Remove the HTML tags - If the option is set to "Yes", Scriptcase will remove the HTML tags from display
within the field, if set to "No", the tags won't be removed. (This option will only be available if the option
"Show HTML content" is set to "Yes").
SQL Type - Define the field type in the database.
Grid Lookup
Used to modify the display of a grid field. For example, a field gender in the database with values M or F is
displayed as Male or Female (see lookup manual) or the display values retrieve from a database table (see
lookup automatic).
Before Lookup After Lookup
Grid Lookup - Automatic

Lookup used to modify a field display dynamically, retrieving the values from a database table.
Figure3: Automatic Grid Lookup Interface.
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - Define the SQL statement to retrieve the grid field display value. The statement has
the following format "SELECT display_field FROM table WHERE key_field = {grid_field}".
The grid field should be enclosed in curly brackets. During execution the field enclosed in curly brackets is
substituted by its table value.
Multiple Options - Select Yes when the Select Command entered returns more than one informed value.
Delimiter - Define the delimiter between the multiple values returned by the Select Command. Use this
option when Multiple Options = Yes.
Use lookup in:
Grid Apply the lookup in all grid types (HTML, PDF, XML
, CSV and RTF).
Summary Apply the lookup summary only (HTML and PDF).
Both Same as selecting Grid and Summary.
Default Value - Define a default value used when the select command does not return any value.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Select Command return value.
Otherwise, the field original value and the Select Command return value separated by the character defined
in Separated by.
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the Select Command
return value. Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Choose connection - Select a different connection available in the project.
Grid Lookup - Manual

Lookup used to modify a field display with predefined values.
Figure1: Manual Grid LookupInterface.
Attributes :
Lookup Types - Define the lookup operation mode: Single Value , Multiple Values (Delimiter), Multiple
Values (Position) and Multiple Values (Binary).
Single Value
Display a single value to the field by direct substitution. The value store in the database is
substituted by a label defined in a list.
Figure1.1: Single Value lookup settings.
Label - Text displayed in the grid.

Value - Attribute stored in the table. For example, M is displayed Male.
Multiple Values (Delimiter)

Display more than one value for the selected field by replacing the string saved in the table by
full description. The string values are separated by a defined delimiter. For example, the
stored value S;M is displayed Sports(S) and Movies(M) in a list.
Figure1.2: Multiple Value lookup settings (delimiter).

Value - Attribute stored in the table.
Delimiter - Define the character used to separated string values.
Multiple Values (Position)

full description. The values are retrieved based on the string position and size.
For example, in a string to save Gender (one byte), Marital Status (one byte) and Hobby
(two bytes) the information stored includes label, start position in the string and size in bytes
that each info occupies in the list:
Label Value Start Size

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2
A string saved as MMBO is displayed: MaleMarried Books .

Figure1.3: Multiple Value lookup settings (position).

Start - String start position for the data stored. (First position is always 1).
Size - Data size in bytes in the string.
Multiple Values (Binary)

full description. In this options the values are stored as decimal and retrieved by specific
algorithm.
For example, the following information list has the data and the value automatically attributed
relative to the position that each value occupies. (the values are displayed):
Attributed Lookup Description

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
To display the info 11 and 12 (stored in the database), according to the list above, use the
following algorithm:
11 = 1 + 2 + 8 = (Sports - Movies - Traveling)

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
12 = 4 + 8 = ( Books - Traveling)

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Figure1.4: Multiple Value lookup settings (Binary).
Insert - Add the values entered in Label and Value to the value list .
Update - Update selected item.
Remove - Remove selected item.
Clear - Clear the attributes.
Save - Save the values entered to the "lookup definitions" list to be used afterwards (for reuse).
Load lookup definitions - Loads a pre-defined Values List to use in lookup.

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Summary Apply the lookup only in (HTML and PDF).
Default Value - Define a default value used when the selected command does not return any value.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the Label value . Otherwise, the field original
value and the Label value are displayed separated by the character defined in Separated by.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Scriptcase will attribute to the field the options bellow.
Figure5: Display Settings
Attributes:
Font Style - Field font type.

Font Size - Font size.
Italic Text - Uses Italic font.
Bold Text - Apply bold formatting to the field.
Number of characters - Characters limit in the field.
Horizontal Alignment -Field horizontal alignment.
Vertical Alignment - Field Vertical alignment.
Background Image - Uses a background image in the field.
Line Break - Uses line break in the field.
Font Color - Font color (Select from color palette).
Background color - Background color (Select from color palette).
Width - Field width.
Height (px) - Field height.
Title Horizontal Aligment - Horizontal alignment of the title.
Title Horizontal Aligment - Vertical alignment of the title.
Bold - Apply bold formatting to field title only.
Column Chart
Display an icon on the side of the Field Title to display a chart.
Column Chart Interface.
Attributes:
Group by Label - Column group by label. Similar to the effect of a group by in a Select.
Summary Function - Summary function applied: Count, Sum, Max, Min or Avg.
Configurable Chart - User configurable Chart parameters.
Display Values - Display Chart Values.
Column for Label - Column Label.
Chart width - Chart width, in pixels.
Chart height - Chart height, in pixels.
Legend height - Maximum height, in percentage between the chart and the space (on top) reserved for
captions.
Multiple Lines Text
Figure1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. Multiple line text fields display line breaks (like HTML tag <BR>).
displayed
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Remove the HTML tags - If the option is set to "Yes", Scriptcase will remove the HTML tags from display
within the field, if set to "No", the tags won't be removed. (This option will only be available if the option
"Show HTML content" is set to "Yes").
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Integer
Figure1: Field General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Integer fields are formatted according to integer formatting rules.
Accumulated - When set as Yes, defines that the field will be accumulated by values from another field. This
option is only available for virtual fields (fields created for the application only).
Accumulator field - Available when Accumulated option is checked as Yes. This setting decides which field
is used to accumulate the values. The chosen field must be: integer, currency, or decimal.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Figure2: Values Format Interface.
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If No is selected the attributes Digit
Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative format of number are displayed(See regional settings).
Digit Grouping Separator - Define the character used as unit separator.

Negative Sign- Define the character used to display negative values.
Number negative format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).
Negative Color - Define a different font color to negative values.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
Line Chart Type - There are two types that can be used:
Bar Chart : Display a bar chart relative to working column. The calculation of the bars size is done in
relation to the Grand Total of the column values. The chart width defines the images size to be
displayed.
Note: Chart width 200px.
Icon Chart -Display icons relative toworking column. The amount of icons calculated is the division of
the column value by icon quantityentered.
Note: Icon Quantity is 1000, thus, the amount of stars beside, is display value divided by 1000.
Display value - Display value and chart simultaneously (at the left or right side of the bar or icons).
Quantity Icon - Determine how many icons (figures) will appear for each value in this field.
Chart Width - Chart width in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bar Graph. Default value is 200px.
Chart Height- Chart height in pixels. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.
Margin - Chart Margin. This field is only used by the option Bars Chart.
Image / Positive Color - Enter color to be used.
Image / Negative Color - The same as Image / Positive Color above. This parameter is used if the field
value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Decimal
General SettingsInterface
Figure1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Decimal fields are formatted according to real numbers
formatting rules.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Image: Values Format Interface.
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. When selecting No the attributes
Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed (See
regional settings).
Decimal Separator - Define the character used as decimal separator.
Negative Signal- Define the character used to display negative values.
Negative Color - Define a different color to negative values.
Decimal Precision - Value decimal precision.
Complete with Zeros - Define the decimal precision to be completed with zeros at the right. Example: The
value is $125.50 with decimal precision of 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.

value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Percent
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Percent fields are like a number field, but displaying the
percentage symbol after it.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Decimal Format
Attributes:
regional settings).
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.
value is negative.
Column Chart

Attributes:
captions.
Currency
Figure 1: Interface General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the type of field application. Currency fields are formatted according to currency formatting
rules.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Attributes:
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If selecting No the attributes Digit
Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign, Currency positive format and Currency negative
format are displayed.(See regional settings).
Monetary Format - Define if the field is displayed in monetary format.

Monetary Symbol - Define the character used as the monetary symbol.
Negative Sign - Define the character used to display negative values.
Currency positive format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).
Currency negative format - Define the character used to display negative values.
Complete with Zeros -Define the decimal precision is to be completed with zeros to the right. Example: The
value is $125.50 with decimal precision 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.
value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Html Image
Figure1: Field General Settings.
Attributes:
Data type – Define the application field type. Html image fields are used to display images.
Image - Define the image to display.
The icon "Choose image" displays Scriptcase standard images. Alternatively click in "Upload image" to send
an image from a different location to the server (images need to be in the same server to be displayed).
Border - Image border width in pixels.
Width - Define image width in Pixels.
Height - Define image height in Pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:
Calculated Percent
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Calculated Percent fields are calculated based on the total value
of a related number field.
Related Field - Related number field to calculate the total value.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Decimal Format
Attributes:
regional settings).
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.

value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Date
Image1:General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules.
Image2: Values Format with regional settings.
Image3: Values Format without regional settings.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option
Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display . To set one of the
attributes accordingly note the definitions below (See Regional settings).
Display - Show a list of predefined date display formats.

Detail Mask - Define the grid display format to the field, according to the PHP Date function.
Examples:
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 14:30:11
PM
l, d \d\e F \d\e Y Thursday, January 25
2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table
j day of the month "1" to "31"

d day do month with zero "01" a "31"
at left
n month "1" a"12"
m month with zero at left "01" a"12"
M month (written format "Jan"
with 3 char)
F month (written format "January"
complete)
y year with 2 digits "09"
Y year with 4 digits "2009"
D weekday with 3 char "Mon"
l weekday (written format "Monday"
complete)
g hour 12-hours format "1" a "12"
G hour 24-hours format "0" a "23"
h hour 12-hours format "01" a "12"
with zero at left
H hour 24-hours format "00" a "23"
with zero at left
i minutes "00" a "59"
s seconds with zero at "00" a "59"
left
a pre and pos meridian "am" a "pm"
A pre and pos meridian "AM" a "PM"
#h hours accumulator
#i minutes accumulator
#s seconds accumulator
\ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters Y, M and
D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format.
Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represent the year, the position 5 and 6
the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represent the month and the positions 3
and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Time
Image1: General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option
attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).

Examples:
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table

at left
n month "1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
complete)
with zero at left
with zero at left
left
\ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters Y, M
and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format.
Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represent the year, the position 5
and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represent the month and the
positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Date And Time
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific date
and time rules.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date and time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes)
the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display. To set one of
the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).

Decimal of seconds - Number of decimals for seconds.
Examples:
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table

at left
n month "1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
complete)
with zero at left
with zero at left
left
\ escape
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Image(database)
Image (database)
Image1: General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the images are retrieved from the database in
binary.
Image Border - Image border width in pixels.
Image Height - Define image height (in Percent or Pixels).
Image Width - Define image width (in Percent or Pixels).
Maintain Aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in Another Window - Open another window and displays original image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Image (file Name)
Image1:General SettingsInterface
Attributes:
Data type – Define the application field type. The images are saved in a sever directory and the file name in
a table field in the database.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files (it is added under the directory defined in Images
Directory. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local variables, in the subdirectory name.
Image Cache - Time in minutes to keep the image in cache memory.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Document (database)
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the files are retrieved from the database in
binary.
Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type.
File name - Define the field to store the document file name (it is database field).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:
Document (file Name)
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. The file is saved in a server directory and the file name in a table
text field.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Credit Card Number
Attributes:
Data type - Credit Card Number fields are formatted according to specific rules.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
E-mail
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type â?? Define the application field type.

Email fields are formatted according to specific email rules.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Url
Image1: General SettingsInterface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type.URL fields are formatted according to specific URL rules.
Other Page - Open the link in another page.

Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:
Data Type - Field data type.

Label - Field title.
SQL Type - Database Field type.
Barcode
Attributes:
Type - Type of barcode.

Text - Text to designate the barcode.
There are 18 types of barcode, which are listed below:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Defines the CSS values for fields individually.
Figure 1: CSS Definition interface.
Title CSS
Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application field.
Font Size - Used to select the font size that will be applied to the application object.
Font Color - Used to select the color to be applied to the font using a color palette.
Background color - Used to select the color that applies to the background of the application title using a
color palette.
Bold - Used to apply bold type to the font.
Underlined - Used to apply an underlined type to the font.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the title.
Border Color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the title using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-top,
middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the title width.
Height - Sets the title height.
Field CSS
Attributes:
Font Color - Used to select the color that is to be applied to the font using a color palette.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application field using a
color palette.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the field.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the field using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form field label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top, text-
top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the field width.
Height - Sets the field height.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
Font - Used to select the font type that will be applied to the application object.
Background color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application object using
a color palette.
Border Size - Used to increase the border size of the object.
Border color - Used to select the border color to be applied to the object using a color palette.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form object label to the desired location (baseline, sub, super, top,
text-top, middle, bottom, text-bottom).
Width - Sets the object width.
Height - Sets the object height.
Help Settings
Documents the application. Create on-line instructions, describe business rules and save comments in the
System Help to allow users to better understand the system and instruct them in the best way of interacting with
the applications.
Figure 1: Help Configuration using a pop-up window.
Attributes:
Tooltip - Add text that will be displayed when the user hovers his mouse over the field.
Help Type:
Pop-up - Displays the help text in a pop-up window when the help icon displayed beside the field is
clicked.
Hint - Displays the help text in a hint window when the mouse cursor hovers over the field.
Text - Display the specified help text beside the field.

Youtube
General settings
Attributes
Data Type - Application field type.

Label - Field label in the application.
Display Mode - The way the video is displayed, modal or new window.
Width - Video width in pixels.
Height - Video height in pixels.
Link Type - Type of the link: button or text.
Link Text - Text of the link.
Disable Field - Define whether the field will be disabled in "insert mode", "update mode" or in "insert and
update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Google Maps
This feature allows you to display maps using the Google API.
Data Type: - Select Google maps as the data type.

Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table and is
displayed as Client Name.
Home - Define the method for passing parameters to the Google API.
Display Mode - Defines how the map will be opened. It can either be opened in Modal window or in a New
window.
Width - Defines the width of the map.
Height - Defines the height of the map.
Zoom - Defines the initial zoom factor (available on the Google API) for the map.
API Key- You need to enter your Authorization Key to view maps using Google API.
Note: The API Key is a unique key composed of an alphanumeric string (text), which is nothing
more than the license to use this service. When you register to use the service, the key is tied to a
domain and a directory on the server. All pages (ScriptCase applications) that are using the API
must be located in the directory that was specified when registering for the Google Maps API.
If you have a web server on your machine, you can just get a key for local testing, and that's
specified as http://localhost in the field during registration.
To get your API Key just visit the following site:

https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/javascript/get-api-key#key
Link Type - Define the link type. This can be a text link or a button link.
Text Link - Specify the text for the link to the map.
update mode".
SQL Type - Displays the SQL (database) field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Qr Code
General Settings
Atributtes:

Values Format
Atributtes:
Level of error correction - Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed–Solomon error correction algorithm
with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less storage capacity.
Image Size - Size of the QR code.
Margin - Margin of the QR code image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Layout
Layout
Configure display formats by determining attributes such as display schemes, organizing fields in blocks, and
defining header formats, amongst other options.
Blocks
Settings
Header & Footer
Blocks
Conceptually a block is a “container” in which a Form Application, Control or Grid fields are located.
By default the applications created in ScriptCase only consist of one block, bearing the same name as the
application. You can add as many blocks as you need and you can organize them to best suit your purpose. The
figure bellow shows an ORGANIZATION column, used to define the position of the next block (positioned to the
side or below in the series of blocks).
Figure 1: Block settings interface.
To the left of each block there are two icons: to edit the block properties; and to delete the block.
Organising Blocks and Changing position
See below how to modify the page block display order.
Click to select the block in order to modify its position.
This is how to remove a block from being displayed.

Click on the block and drag it to “Blocks not shown”.
To change the page block is displayed in, all you have to do is drag it to the desired page as indicated below.
Attributes:
Block (name) - Block title header displayed.
Title (Display) - Flag that controls whether the block title is displayed.
Label (Display) - Flag that controls whether the field label is displayed inside the block.
Label (Position) - The label options are:
"Above" - Displays the label above the field.
"Beside" - Displays the label beside the field.
"Below" - Displays the label below the field.
Fields (Columns) - Number of columns to be displayed side by side within the block.
Fields (Position) - Position of fields within the block:
“Below” - The fields are displayed below each other while observing the number of columns.
"Beside" - The fields are displayed beside one another while observing the number of columns.
"Line" - The fields are displayed side by side (in line) without tabulation (aligned in columns).
Organization (Next) - Organization of blocks on the page:
"Below" - Indicates that the next block is displayed below the previous one.
"Beside" - Indicates that the next block is displayed beside the previous one.
"Tabs" - Indicates that the next block is displayed as a tab.
Organization (Width) - Defines the width of the block in pixels or as a percent.
Organization (Height)- Defines the height of the block in pixels or as a percent.

Add New Block
To add new blocks to an application, just click .
Figure 2: Add New Block interface.
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Label - Block label.
Edit Block
Click to edit the block properties and click Save.
Figure 2: Edit Block interface.
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Title - Block Title.
Display Title - Whether to display a line containing the block title.
Title Font - Block title font applied.
Font size - Block title font size applied.
Font color - Block title font color.
Background color - Block title line background color.
Background image - Block title background image.
Title Height - Block title line height (in pixels).
Horizontal Alignment - Block title horizontal alignment (Left, Center or Right).
Vertical Alignment - Block title vertical alignment (Top, Middle or Bottom).
Display Label - Display block field labels.
Columns - Number of block field columns.
Column Width - Calculate the block columns.
Label color - Field label display color.
Field Organization - Block field organization.
Label Position - Field label position.
Next Block - Position of the next block in relation to the current one.
Border color - Block border color.
Border width - Block border width.
Block width - Block width.
Block height - Block height.
Cellspacing - Spacing between the block cells.
Settings
Figure 1: Layout Settings interface
Is used to define the Application Theme. (CSS)
Attributes:
Header Template - Used to select the Header format.

Footer Template - Used to select the Footer format.
Theme - The interface is used to select an existing Theme (colors, fonts, etc) for the application.
Header
Figure 1: Header Interface.
This interface format can change depending on the selected option in "Layout >> Settings >> Header Template".
Display Header - This flag determines whether or not the Header is displayed.
Application Title - Defines the Header title to be displayed in the application. (A Form Applications has 2
titles: one for Insert mode, and another one for Update mode).
Header Variables - The variable fields can be filled with any of the types displayed in the Combobox.
Depending on the type, you may need to associate content with it. See the available types below:
Field: Displays a field value according to the field selected from the Combobox. A Combobox listing the
fields that are part of the application's data source (“Select” query) are displayed beside the header variable
when the “Field” type is selected. The selected field value is then displayed in the header line.
Title: Displays the value entered in “Select Title” in the header .
Date: Displays the system date in the header line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many
display formats that can be set based on the server date and time. To see all the available date formats, click
to bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field
alongside it.
Image: Enter an image name saved on the server. To locate existing images and select one, click on the
“Choose an image” icon and to upload new images to the server click on the “Upload an Image” icon .
Value: When the “Value” type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the header
line. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. For example: “Employee name: [v_name].
Search Criteria - The search criteria selected by the user in the Search form are displayed in the header
(available only in Grid applications.
Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the header.
Each condition is displayed on a new line. (available only in Grid applications)
FOOTER
Figure 2: Footer Interface.

This format of this interface may change depending on the option selected in "Layout >> Settings >> Footer
Template".
Display Footer - This flag determines whether or not the footer will be displayed.
Footer Variables - The variable fields can be populated with any of the types listed in the Combobox.
fields that are part of the “Select” (application's data source) are displayed beside the Footer variable when
the “Field” type is selected. The selected field value is displayed in the footer line.
Title: Display in the Footer the value entered in “Select Title”.
Date: Displays the system date in the footer line in the following format dd/mm/yyyy. There are many display
formats that can be set based on the server date and time. to see all the available date formats, click to
bring up a help window listing date format parameters and examples. Enter the format in the text field
alongside it.
Value: When the “Value” type is selected, the contents of the text field to the right is displayed in the footer
line. Enter text and/or “Global Variables”. For example: “Employee name: [v_name]”.
(available only in Grid applications).
Search Criteria (one per line) - The search criteria selected in the Search form are displayed in the footer.
Each condition is displayed on a new line (available only in Grid applications).
Events
Events
Scriptcase uses the concept of events to enable the developer to customize application code. Events allow the
developer to define custom actions at a specific execution time (e.g. After a record is inserted, when it is loaded,
upon submitting a form, ...) and for a specific type of application.
OnInit - This event is executed just one time, before the main select of the application execution. In this scope,
normally, the macros that update the select, are executed as these: sc_select_field, sc_select_order,sc_select_
where(add) and etc.
onRecord - This event is executed before displaying each grid record.
onHeader - This event is executed immediately before displaying the grid header. Use this event to print some
calculated value in the header for example.
onFooter - Used to display some calculated value. Write in this event the necessary calculation to display the
result in the footer.
Any event can use pre-defined functions (macros) that are available in Scriptcase. These functions are called
"Scriptcase Macros".
Read more about Scriptcase Macros.

Ajax Events
Using AJAX reduces the amount of unnecessary data traffic with the server thereby speeding up application
processing. It allows individual data components on a page to be updated without the need to refresh the entire
page.
Figure 1: AJAX event interface.
The following events are available in ScriptCase.
onChange - This event fires when the field has focus and the field value is changed and the focus is then
directed to another object.
onClick - This events fires when the field is clicked.
onBlur - This events fires when the field has focus, the field value is NOT changed and the focus is directed
to another object.
onFocus - This events fires when the field has focus.
Only the onClick event is available to Grid applications.
See the example below: The user field is validated against a database (table). For valid users it returns the name.
For invalid users a message is displayed.
Example:
1 - Select the field and the event used by the AJAX process, (in PHP code). Passing parameters is optional.
Figure 2: Selecting fields and events for AJAX processing.
2 -Enter the PHP business rule in the PHP editor. The code is processed by the Server and the XML result is sent
to the browser.
Figure 3: Programming PHP with AJAX.
1. PHP editor - Use it to type in your PHP code.
2. Insert Code - ScriptCase provides you with a number of predefined blocks of code that can be inserted into
the PHP editor and then amended accordingly.
3. Parameters (Fields) - Use this to create parameters retrieving field values.

Buttons
Buttons
In addition to the buttons of your own applications, you can also create buttons that are displayed on the toolbar.
Figure 1: Create new button.
New Button
To create a new button, click on the New Button option and enter a name and the type of the button.
Buttons Types : (Javascript, PHP, Link).
Image2: Edit button function.
Deleting a button
To delete a button click the Delete icon in the right of the button name at the application menu under the Buttons
option.
Javascript Button
Creating a Javascript Type Button

To create a new button, click on "New button", enter the name and select the type of button.
There are three types of display buttons: (Button, Image and Link).
Deleting a button
option.
Php Button
Creating a Php Type Button

Link Button
Creating a Link type button

The link button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is an
option to create new links.
Follow the steps below to create the link required and configure the new Link button to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

1 - Using the link option click in new link, as in the image below.
Image2:Create new Link.
2 - Select the link type Buttons and click in next (as Image below).
Image3: Link Type Interface.
3 - Select the application that will be called and click in Next.
Image4: List of Applications Interface.
4 - Define the parameters passed. It can be of three types: Field, Variable, Value or Empty.
Field - Enter the field used to pass the content.

Image5: Parameters Definition Interface - Field.
Variable - Enter a global variable existing in the application.
Fixed - Enter a fixed content to be passed.
Image6: Parameters Definition Interface - Value.
Empty - No value will be pass.
Image7: Parameters Definition Interface - Empty.
5 - Define the form link properties - Iframe display.

Image8: Link/Form Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - How the link is displayed

Open in the same window- Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search and going
to the form.
Open in other window- Open another window to show the form.
Open in a Iframe- Show the form in the same window that the search. Below the search an Iframe is
created to display the form.
Exit URL for the target application - Web address accessed when the user exits the grid.
Link Hint - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Form Properties - Select the buttons displayed.

Run Button
Creating a run type button

This new option in the Grid allows to create a button to process a PHP code for selected records (checkbox).
Image1: Button Configuration Interface.

Edit Button: Display Mode (Button)
Image1: Buttons Settings Interface.
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Button).
Label - Button Title in the application.
Hint - Hint message.
Confirmation Message - To not display the message, leave the field empty.
Edit Button: Display Mode (Image)

Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link).
Icon - Button display icon.
Edit Button: Display Mode (Link)
Display mode - Display mode of the button in the toolbar (Link).
Label - Button Title in the application.
Css Style - CSS style class name, created in the schema editor buttons. (Layout buttons)
This button Type Uses 2 events to process PHP Codes.

OnRecord: Executed on each selected record.
Image2: PHP Code Interface.
OnFinish: Executed after process all selected records.
Image3:PHP Code Interface
Detail
Detail
About
The detail is an interesting grid feature. It allows to organize the information displayed according to its importance.
Display more important information in the grid and complementary data in detail form.
Click on displayed at each grid line to enable the feature.
To enable the details, go to the Grid Settings, as shown below, and enable the checkbox:
Detail Settings
Select the fields to display in detail page.
Image1:Detail Settings.
Attributes
Choose the fields to display in detail page - Click field and click in On/Off to select (or unselect) fields.
Display Detail - Define display detail according to following options:

Beside the Grid - Display detail at the right side of the record, in the same window that displays the grid.
Below the Grid - Display selected record detail, below the record at same window (use the detail button
to select the record detail).
In another page - Display just the detail for the selected record hiding the grid.
In another window - Display detail in popup window.
Alignment - Define detail alignment configuration of each field (left, right, center).
Detail's page width - Define the grid detail page HTML width.
Measure unit of the detail - Define grid detail page HTML width unit as percent or pixel.
Detail Keys
Define the fields that will be a part of the where clause to search selected record.
Image2: Detail Keys.
Choose detail field keys to display - Configure the fields to be passed by the WHERE clause:
Turn On/Off - Select field to display in the detail. An asterisk is displayed by the selected field .
All - Select all fields.
None - Uncheck all fields.
Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts: superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons
Image1: Toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Display navigation checkboxes that can be displayed in the grid.
Exit Quit the application.

Exports - Define the formats that must be generated. ScriptCase can generate the following:
PrintCreate the grid in HTML format.

PDF Create a complete report, having all grid data in PDF
format.
Separator
Buttons Settings
Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Group By
Group By Settings
Define the Group By criteria. The fields that will be grouped and the sequence the field breaks should occur.
Image 1: Group by Interface.
Attributes:
Enable Treeview - Turn on/off the group by. This option is not available for paging Infinite Scroll.
Group By Line - Select the breaking position: Before and after the records.
Before the records - It shows the Group By Title before its records.
After the records - It shows the Group By Title after its records.
Group By Header - Display break header in all pages.

Keep Group By Order - Order the fields in group.
Display Titles - Display fields label on the breaking line.
Record Count - Define a column title for the amount of registers.
Value Separator - Define a separator between the title and the value of a field in the breaking.
Tab a Group By - It defines the left margin of the Group By.
Separates the Group By - It defines the margin from a Grouping to the next one.
Dynamic Group By
To configure the Dynamic Group By we must select which fields are available in the application, so this way the
end user can select and then apply the Group By dynamically at runtime.
The End User may select more than one field when you apply the Group By in the generated application.
Image 1: Interface of Group By rules.
Attributes:
Use dynamic Group By - Option to enable the use of dynamic Group By.
Hide the help line of the dynamic group by - Option used to hide the title of the dynamic group by in the
generated application.
Fields - There you can check/uncheck one or more fields to create the Group By and define the level of
each Group By field.
Example:
Image 2: Group By Rule settings.

Image 3: Button to select a Group By Rule in a generated application.
Image 4: Selecting the Group By Rule.

Image 5: Results of a Group By Rule selected.
Static Group By
The static Group By is used when the developer needs to create a set of preset Group Bys allowing the end user
to select which Group Bys he wants to apply in the application at runtime.
The Group By may have one or more levels.
Image 1: Interface of Group By rules.
Attributes:
Name - Each rule must have a name to identify it.

Label - It is the rule name that will be displayed to the end-user.
Fields - There you can check/uncheck one or more fields to create the Group By and define the level of
each Group By field.
Settings:
Use empty Group By - Configuration used when we want the Grid Application to be started without any
Group By.
Initial Group By - Initial Group By that will be used in the initial generated application.
Use dynamic totalization - Allows the use of dynamic totals in the Summary's groupings.
Group By sorting - Interface used to select the group by order that will be displayed in the Grid Application.
Image: Group By interface configuration.

Example:
Image 2: Group By Rule settings.
Image 3: Button to select a Group By Rule in a generated application.
Image 4: Selecting the Group By Rule.

Image 5: Results of a Group By Rule selected.
Events
OnGroupBy - This event is always performed when breakings occurs, independently of the level, and allow the
manipulation of the totalization fields. ScriptCase has all totalization variables of the grid scope. Guessing that an
application which has two levels of breakings (state and city) and which totalizes two fields (parcel and balance),
we can have access to the totals, in the scope of â??calculate for each registerâ??, in the following way:
{count_ger} - contains the total amount of the registers;
{sum_parcel} - contains the total sum of the field “parcel”;
{sum_balance} - contains the total sum of the field “balance”;
{count_state} - contains the total amout of the registers of the

breaking of “state” which has been processed;
{sum_state_parcel} - contains the total sum of the field “parcel” of the

field of “state” which has bem processed;
{sum_state_balance} - contains the total sum of the field “balance” of the

field of “state” which has bem processed;
{count_city} - contains the total amout of registers of the breaking

of “city” which has been processed;
{sum_city_parcel} - contains the total sum of the field “parcel” of the

breaking of “city” which has been processed;
{sum_city_balance} - contains the total sum of the field “balance” of the

breaking of “city” which has been processed;
Considering that the formulas defined to be processed in the scope of “calculate during the breakings” will be
acting for the some levels of breaking, the special variables of totalization, in this scope, they are mentioned
substituting the breaking name by the key word “breaking” that means:
{count_ger} - contains the total amout of registers;
{sum_parcel} - contains the total sum of the field “parcel”;
{sum_balance} - contains the total sum of the field

“balance”;
{count_groupby} - contains the total amount of registers, of the

breaking which has been processed;
{sum_groupby_parcel} - contains the total sum of the field “parcel”

of the breaking which has been processed;
{sum_groupby_balance} - contains the total sum of the field

“balance” of the breaking which has been
processed;
Ex: In an application which has breakings by state and city and which totalizes a field balance in the breakings
total, we wish to show the average in substitution to the balance. It creates a method in the event OnGroupBy
with the following content:
{sum_groupby_balance}= {sum_groupby_balance} / {count_groupby};

Fields
Data Type - Define the application field type.

Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Group By Settings
Image1: Group By Fields Interface.
Attributes:
Fields Position - Define the group by fields display organization.

Columns - Define how many columns are used to display the break down info.
Display Label- Display the field label on break down.
Line break - Display break down line.
Summary line (grid) - Display summary line in the grid.
Total line (summary) - Display line total in the summary.
Total line message - Define the text message displayed in the total line. Ex.: Orders total in the state.
Records amount - Display the amount of records displayed in the break down.
PDF Grid Break Pages - Display each grid break in a separate PDF page. Ex.: Display each state orders in
a different report page.
PDF Summary break page - Display each summary break in a separate PDF page.
HTML Grid Break Pages - Display each grid break in a separate HTML page.
HTML Summary break pages - Display each summary break in a separate HTML page.
Start TreeView - TreeView initial state.
Sorting - Order in which the field will appear in the Group By.
Fields - Select the fields (VALUE and SUM) displayed in the group by line.
Group by line layout (Label)
Image2:Group by line layout (Label) Interface.
Attributes:
Text Font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label.
Font Size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label.
Text Color - Label color on the breaking.
Background Color - Breaking background color.
Bold Text - Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Group by line layout (Value)

Image3: Group by line layout(Value) Interface.
Attributes:
Text font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label.
Font size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label.
Text color - Label color on the breaking.
Bold text - Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Configure the total line layout
Image4: Configure the total line layout Interface.
Attributes:
Text font - Allow to define the font used on the breaking label.
Font size - Allow to define the font size used on the breaking label.
Text color - Label color on the breaking.
Background color - Breaking background color.
Bold text -Allow to turn on or turn off the bold label of the breaking.
Totals
Settings
Use this option to define fields with totals (on breaks or at the end).
Image1: Summarization Functions Interface.
Attributes:
Results in a single line - Display the title General Total and the total values in a single line.
"Yes"
"No"
Display Total - Define pages to display the General Total. Choose from : "Display in all pages ", " Display in
last page" or "Do not display".
Group SubTotal - It respects as the way will be visualized the totals of the breaking:
“Yes” - Show sub-totals of the breaking after it occurs.
“No ” - Show sub-totals of the breaking in the beginning before it occurs.
Record Count - Display the record count beside the General Total.
"Yes"
"No"
This interface defines the "Group By" field labels:
Image2: Layout Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Group By field - Group By Selected fields.

Label - Label Description displayed in the end application.
Display - Allows to display or hide the record count.
Grid - Select Fields
SELECT FIELDS
This interface is where you define which fields are totaled, and the type of aggregation of the field.
Image1: Summarization fields Interface.
The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be totalized. To
attribute an operation to be used in a column (field), just select the field and check the operation button.
Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated.
Average - Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field.
Maximun - Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field.
Minimun - Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field.
Weighted mean - Displays the calculation performed by the weighted average in the selected field.
Weighted for weighted mean - Option to choose the weight used to calculate the weighted mean.
Use the same configuration in the summary - Assign the same configuration of aggregation to the
summary.
Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report.
Positioning
Positioning
Overview
The positioning of the summary fields can be Default, Grouped or By field:
Default
Grouped
By field
Default
Default option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized.
Image1:Summary Fields Order Interface (Default).
The Total line is displayed in Credit Limit column. See below:
Image2: Default Order generated.
Aligment
Total aligment is the position where will display the "Total line message". They can be: Center, Left and Right:
"Left"
"Center"
"Right"
Label It allows to define what message will be displayed instead of Total:

Image3: Label Settings Interface.
Grouped
Grouped option returns a value just below the column that is being summarized. But they are in different lines to
each summarization type (Sum, Average, Max and Min).
Image1: Summary fields Order Interface (Grouped).
It is possible to change the summary positions clicking and dragging to up or down.
Image2: Changing the line positions.
This example , the Total displays the sum and average of Credit Limit :
Image3: Grouped Order.
Aligment
Total alignment is the position where will display the "Total line message". They can be: Center, Left and Right:
"Left"
"Center"
"Right"
Label
This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.
Image4: Edting labels.

By Field
By Field option organizes each summarized field by field name. It doesn't follow the columns layout.
Image1: Summary Fields Order Interface (By Field).
Break Line per Field

Enabling "break line per field" checkbox, it will display an unique field per line with selected summarizations
(Sum, Average, Max and Min).
Image2: "Break line per Field" enabled.
Disabling "break line per field" checkbox it displays each field side by side.
Image3: "Break line per Field" disabled.
Label
This Settings allows to change the labels of Summarization Types.
Figura4: Edição dos Labels.

Fields
Total Label Settings
Figura1: Total Label Settings Interface
Text font - Allow to define a font to the text field.

Font size - Allow to define the font size.
Text color - Allow to define the text color.
Background color - Allow to define the background color.
Bold text - Allow to format the text in bold.
Example:
Total Line (Data) Display Settings

Figura2: Total Line Display Settings Interface.
Text font - Allow to define a font to the text field.

Font size - Allow to define the font size.
Text color - Allow to define the text color.
Background color - Allow to define the background color.
Bold text - Allow to format the text in bold.
Example:
Summary
Summary Settings
Image1: Summary Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Title - Defines a title for the summary, if not informed, Scriptcase uses the default title for the summary :
"Summary ", but if you want no title to be displayed enter on the title a HTML tag " " as below.
Image2: Title Field informed with the HTML Tag.
Quantity title - Records count title.

Summary Display:
On every page - In the end of each search result page the summary is displayed below the grid.
On the last page - In the end of the last search result page (and only in this page) the summary is
displayed below the grid.
On another page - The summary is displayed in a separated page that is opened with a button the
toolbar is clicked (the summary button).
Record Count:
Do not show - Do not show the total of records per breaking.
Show just in the summary - Show in the summary the total of records per breaking.
Show in the summary and in the Chart - Show in the summary the total of records per breaking and
show chart.
Horizontal total - Display horizontal total on summaries.

Vertical total - Display vertical total on summaries.
The chart icon positioning - Chart icon positioning.
Positioning of the Total icon - Positioning of the Total icon.
Page width - Page width value for the summary.
Width unit - Measure unit used in the widths (Automatic, Pixels and Percent).
layout settings
Attributes:
GroupBy field - Selected break fields.

Position - Sets position on the x-axis or y-axis.
Sorting - Sets the sorting by the database value or the display value.
Fill empty labels - Defines whether the labels will be filled.
Link Grid - Creates a link in the selected field.
Alignment - Defines the layout alignment (centered, left or right).
Tabular format - Sets he tabular format for the summary.
Toolbar
In this screen we can do the referring configurations to the summary. The summary always occurs when the
application of search has to show the summary, summary type, summary position, summary ordinance, hot key,
amount of registers, graph type, Chart width, Chart height, Chart edge, Chart aspect, Chart in other window,
summary width and width unit of the summary.
Image1: Interface of Summary Configuration.
Attributes:
Formats - Allow to select the formats of summary generation.

Buttons - Allow to select the buttons which are shown in the toolbar.
Buttons Order - Allow to order the buttons in the toolbar as necessary, using the selection bar (right side of
the table).
Select Fields
This interface is where you define which fields are totaled, and the type of aggregation of the field.
Image1: Summarization fields Interface.
The buttons at the left side of the combobox allow the user to select the fields that will have to be totalized. To
attribute an operation to be used in a column (field), just select the field and check the operation button.
Sum -Define that a sum to the selected field values is generated.
Average - Calculates an arithmetic average for the selected field.
Maximun - Highlights the higher identified value for the selected field.
Minimun - Highlights the lower identified value for the selected field.
Weighted mean - Displays the calculation performed by the weighted average in the selected field.
Weighted for weighted mean - Option to choose the weight used to calculate the weighted mean.
Note: The selected fields are displayed when a break down occurs or in the end of the report.
Chart Settings
Here we can configure the chart settings. For example: chart type, chart width, chart height , etc.
If you we have 2 or more Group By rule, we must configure the chart options for each Group By rule created in
the application.
Note: The Analytic type Graph only works if the Group by has been configured to use 2 fields.
If the user has set more then 2 fields, then the Analytic Graph will be generated using the first two fields of the Group by.
Image1: Generate Column Chart Interface .
Image2: Generate Lines Chart Interface (Total).
These options are available only to Group By rules with more than one field.
Image3: Chart Stettings Interface.
All charts are using HTML5
Attributes:
Chart Type- Define the "Default" chart type displayed when the chart option is clicked and which chart types
will be available in the application.
Bar: Font Size - Define the font size used in the chart.
Subtitle - Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.
Bar - Orientation - Bars orientation - vertical or horizontal on
the chart.
Bar - Dimension - Bars dimension (2D or 3D) on the chart.
Bar - Stacking - Stacks the bars in a single bar (By series ).
Bar - Series Group - Group series in bar charts
Bar - Values on the side - Place the values on the side of
the bars.
Bar - Width - Can define the width between 20 and 70.
Bar - Guidance value - Defines the orientation of the chart, it
can put upright.
Bar - Positioning the value - Can be choose where the
value will be positioned.
Pie: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Subtitle- Define the subtitle displayed in the chart.
Pie - Format - Forms pie or donut formats.
Pie - Dimension - Image dimension on the pie chart.
Pie - Sorting - Sort the pie chart.
Pie - Values format - Data format displayed.
Line: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Line - Shape - Displays the format of the line.
Line - Series Group - Line grouping type.
Area: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Area - Shape - Area shape displayed in the chart.
Area - Stacking - Stacks areas in the chart.
Area - Series group - How to group series in the chart.
Gauge: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Gauge - Shape - Shape displayed in the chart.
Radar: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Funnel: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.

Funnel - Dimension - Funnel dimension (2D or 3D) on the
chart.
Pyramid: Font Size-Define the font size used in the chart.
Pyramid - Dimension - Bars dimension (2D or 3D) on the
chart.
Pyramid - Values format - Data format displayed.
Pyramid - Shape - Shape displayed in the chart.
Common Options
Summary chart type - Select the chart type between analytic or synthetic.
Synthetic and analytic charts are different forms of dealing with multiple group by criteria to create charts.
Synthetic charts will be restricted to the first group by condition and will allow the user to use links to see
details of the next group by criteria, increasing the level of detail.
Analytic charts are dawn with all the group by criteria, creating one full detailed chart which does not allow
linking to detailed charts.
Create link on the chart - Allows the charts to have a link on its elements to detailed grid applications or
charts. The data shown will be relative to the value clicked on the chart.
Displays Values - Displays values on generated chart .
Axis of Chart General Total - Display the chart of the General Total as a column or a line.
Display Y-Axis With Zero - Display Y-Axis With Zero.
Chart width - Generated chart width in pixels.
Chart Height - Generated chart height in pixels.
Values sorting - Sort chart values.
captions.
Chart display mode - Defines if the charts will be shown in a new window, side-by-side with the application,
or loaded in the same browser window.
Chart Layout
Image 4: Chart Layout Color Settings Interface.
Options
Chart palette color - Define the color used in the chart background.
Palette color for data plots - Define the color used in the chart data plot.
Positioning
Select the positioning of the totals in the summary.
Image1: Summary fields positioning Interface.
Drag'n drop the options to the desired position.

Sorting
Select which fields can use sorting in the summary.
Image1: Summary fields sorting Interface.
Attributes:
Fields - Select the fields you want to allow the sorting.

Default Sorting column - Select one field to initial sorting in the summary.
Sorting Order - Choose if the sorting will be ascending or descending.
Initial Sorting by the GROUP BY - Select one of the GROUP BYs to the initial sorting.
Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Nested Grids
What Is Nested Grids?
Nested grids are used to display information in reports hierarchically. For example the orders grid are nested to
the customers grid. It is possible to create as many nested grids as necessary. On the picture below you can see
nested grids that contain the orders for each customer:
Image1: Nested orders grid.
Read more:
How to use nested grids.

Nested Grid- Settings
Nested Grid Settings

On the Settings menu it is possible to edit the general attributes of the nested grids:
Image1: Nested grids menu.
Image2: Nested grids settings page.
Attributes:
PDF - This option allows to enable / disable the nested grids exporting to the pdf report, when disabling this
option only the "main grid" will be exported.
Enable Treeview - This option will force all the nested grids to be displayed using a "+" button on the "main
record". Watch it at the picture bellow.
Position - This parameter defines where the nested grids will be displayed in reference to the main grid:
OptionDescription
In one Display the nested grid in a new column after the last one.
column
Bellow Displays the nested grid below the main grids rows
the
record
Alignment - Allows to set up the nested grid horizontal alignment relative to the main grid. This option only
works when using the Position option Bellow the record. Select between left, right and center.
Define Individually
Any attribute that uses the option Define individually forces this attribute to be configured in each one of the links
(see Editing nested grids ).
New Nested Grid
To create a new nested grid link click on the New Link item as displayed on the picture bellow.
Image1: Create a new link.
Define name and label to new nested grid.
Image2: Name and label for the new "link".
Applications list
All the projects grids which uses or references global variables on SQL statement are displayed. See picture4.
Image3: Target application selection.
IMPORTANT: To use a grid as a nested grid is required that the nested application uses at least one parameter
or global variable in its SQL statement as on the picture bellow.
Image4: An order details grid, its SQL statement uses a parameter.
Parameters Settings
Define the parameter(s) that are passed between application.
Image5: Parameter var_cliente linkage.
On the picture above on the left side are displayed the nested grid inbound parameters (global variables).
Select one option and value to each variable located on the target application (on the right side of the above
image):
Field - Used to pass a field's value from the master grid.

Fixed - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter.
Empty - Nothing is passed as parameter.
Button Save - Saves all the link parameters and closes the "link wizard".
Editing Nested Grids
Find all the nested grids of your grid in the Links folder located in the Nested Grids Application menu.
General settings
Image2: Nested grid general settings.
It is possible to edit the following attributes:
Label - Nested grid title.

Link - Define target application and the passed parameters info.
Display - Display or hide nested grid following items:
1 - Header
2 - Sequential
3 - Total
Visualization - Nested grid theme is equal to grid´s theme.
Define Individually
If any nested grid settings are defined individually (as on picture4) define each nested grid parameters on the
nested grids edit screen.
Image3: Nested grids settings defined individually.
Read more about the attributes "Title in the same line", "Position", "Enable treeview" and PDF at: Nested grids
settings
Display settings
This options is displayed only if the info below is true.
Attribute Value
Title in the same line No
Enable treeview No
Position In one column
Horizontal Alignment - Defines nested grid horizontal alignment: Left, Right or Center.
Vertical Alignment - Defines nested grid vertical alignment (Top, Middle or Bottom).
Background color - Defines nested grid background. Empty forces the use of the default application color.
Title horizontal alignment - Defines nested grid title line horizontal alignment.
Title vertical alignment - Defines nested grid title line vertical alignment.
Bold - Defines the nested grid label in bold.
Sorting Rules
Sorting Rules Settings
Image1: Sorting rules settings interface.
Attributes:
Order of the rule order - Allow to update the sorting rule display order. When you configure this option, an
icon will be shown (config sort) which when it is clicked, it allows the choice of the field and its display order
ascendant (ASC) or descendant (DESC).
Integrate and Sort - Allow to choose the sort type, The options are: fields/rules sort - allow to apply the rules
which were created and the field order (ascendant or descendant), fields sort - Allow to apply the the fields
sort (ascendant or descendant) or sorting rules - allow to apply the sort according to the rules that were
created.
New Rule
New Sorting Rule
Image1: Sorting Rule Interface.
Attributes:
Name - Field to inform the rule name.
Label - Field to inform the name that will be shown in the application.
Sorting Rule Settings
Image2: Sorting Rule Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Label - Allow to inform a name which will be shown when the application is executed.
Select the sorting rules fields - Allow to select through the selection bar what fields will be shown (fields
which are found in the right side box) and the fields which are not shown (fields which are found in the left
side box). To order the fields in the wanted way , use the ordinance bar located at the right side of the box.
To apply the ordinance type to the field, you only have to select the field of the box at the right side and
select the ascendant mode, which will be shown beside the field a + or - if the ordinance is descendant.
Refined Search
Overview
The refined search is a feature that integrates a search interface besides the grid, restricting values according to
a data universe in the database.
See more about the Refined Search: How to use a Refined Search
Settings
Using this interface you are able to set some of the Refined Search configurations.
Please find below how to apply each of the options available.
Attributes:
Move searched above - When you use a field to search, regardless of the position, this field will be moved
to the top of the refined search options.
Show quantity - Shows the amount of results (COUNT) next to the field. Example: Countries(336)
Start mode - Sets whether the field will start: open or closed.
Minimum width - Defines the minimum width setting for the fields.
Maximum width - Defines refined search maximum width, allowing you to match the various inputs widths.
Minimum height - Minimum height of refined search results.
Maximum height - Maximum height for refined search results, a scrolling will be created case exceeds the
maximum height.
Select Fields
The refined search is automatically added to the grid, when, one or more fields are checked in the tab "Select
Fields".
After selecting the fields by clicking one by one or selecting all, you must to click on "SAVE" button before go to
the tab "Edit Fields", where you can customize the Refined Search option for each field selected.
Attributes:
Fields - List of selected fields from the "Select Fields" option.

Range - Activate the use of the slider component with intervals between the smallest and largest value,
available only for integer fields.
Increment - Sets an integer value for the range increment.
Show value - Option to display or not the value for the range.
Multiselect - Allows you to display the multiple records selection for the search.
Start opened - This option sets if the block with the field search options will start opened (yes or no).
See more - This option displays a link "See more", to show more or not records quantity inside the Refined
Search options.
Quantity - Sets how many records you want to display for the first the application open.
Date - Select the date format that will be displayed in the Search.
Sorting - Select the records sorting for the Refined fields (ASC or DESC).
Message for empty fields - Message for empty fields, the default message is: "-", this message will appear
when the field's record is empty, so using this option you will be able to set a customized message.
Search
Settings
Through the chart below we can define all the options that will be part of the Form application Filter.
Image1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes
EmptySearch - Display all records (for empty fields).

Search Criteria - Select the SQL "AND" or"OR" commands to define the search criteria.
Display Condition - Display search condition to user selection.
Using Auto-complete in the Fields - Field turns autocomplete automatically according to the existing
values in the database, if the user chooses "Yes", the autocomplete will be enabled automatically for all fields
that possess database relationship. If the option is set as "No" no autocomplete will displayed. If the selected
option is "Defined in the field" it will be respecting the individual configuration of each field.
Dynamic Search
New feature that allows the end user to perform searches in the form application without navigating to another
application, the developer will need to set which fields are available in the search feature.
Use Enter to tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Image1: Search configuration interface.
Image2: Field selection interface.

Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Quick Search
toolbar.

Search Criteria
Image1: Search Criteria Interface.
Allows to define filter options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the filter
options. To select options click on one option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on "Turn On / Off"
button.
Buttons:
Turn On/Off - Enable or Disable the field or selected option.

All - Mark all fields or options.
None - Unmark all fields or options.
Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows to not
display the criteria beside the field.
Advanced Search
Settings
The search settings allows to define all Search application atributes.
Image2: Advanced Search Settings Interface.
Attributes
Horizontal Alignment- Allows to define the search form horizontal alignment.

Margins - Defines the search form position (margins).
Keep Values - Keep last form values and display it upon return.
Preserver fields and orders - Determine which values to keep to each search form.
Required Fields
Define the required fields in the application.
Image 1: Required Fields Interface.
A marker (*) is displayed beside the field in the generated application. The required fields are validated and a
message is displayed if the field is empty.
Markers Positioning - Where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.
Display message - If selected this option displays a message upon validation.
Toolbar
The toolbar is divided in two parts: top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons
for each part independently. A button can even be in both parts simultaneously.
Image1: Search Toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Toolbar (Top / Bottom) - Select the buttons displayed in the search form toolbars and the buttons position.
Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) - Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar.
buttons settings
Image2: Settings Buttons.
Attributes:
Button - Button name.
Label - Define the label displayed on the button.
Hint - Define a hint in the button.
Access Key - Allows to define acess keys shortcuts.
Layout
Layout
Blocks

Attributes:
Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Display Settings
Layout Settings
Attributes:

Header And Footer
HEADER
alongside it.
FOOTER
Template".
alongside it.
Events
onInit - This event is executed in an unique time, before executing the application SQL Select Statement. In this
scope, normally macros are executed that modify the SELECT command. For example: sc_select_field,
sc_select_order, sc_select_where(add) and etc.
onRefresh - Occurs when the application is loaded.
onValidate - Is executed before submitting the form.
onSave - Runs when the application is saved.

Fields
Overview Filter
Overview
This session displays to edit just the fields that are in the search (Fields selected in â??GRID->SEARCH-
>FIELDSâ??).
Image1: Search Fields Interface.

New Field
It allows to add a new field in the application.
1º- When you click on a new button it is shown the image below, where we determine the amount of fields that will
be added.
Image1: Amount of fields Interface.
2º- After we determine the amount of fields that will be added, it is necessary to define the settings of the new
field (data type, name and label).
Image2: Interface of the Properties of the new field.
Note: The description of the field type is modified as the selection of the filed type.
Text
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a text it accepts letters, numbers
and characters.
Search Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as
nm_name, the agreement is more clearly if the same is simplified to Name. That is because the label is a
field nickname in the application layer.
Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the field that is
set in the grid, in this case the option filter label can not be used.
Maximum Size - Maximum Field Size.
SQL Type - Field type in the database.
Field's Behavior
Image1: Field's Behavior Interface.
Attributes:
Case Settings - Converts the field letters.
Submit on OnChange - Allows when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.
Show Condition - Allows when activated, to show the filter condition, the same just functions if the filter will
have at least one option.
AJAX PROCESSING
Reloads other selection type fields (Select, CheckBox, Radio and DoubleSelect) when the field onChange event
occours.
For example: a Select field "list of states", and a second one list of cities. It is possible to reload a cities list
field by changing the state selected.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Integer
Data type - Define the application field type.
nm_name, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Name. That is, the label is a field
nickname in the application layer.
Field's Behavior
>Figure1: Field's Behavior Interface.
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
Regional Settings - Define if the Regional Settings will be used (default values).
Separator - Group Separator.
Accepts negative - The field accepts negative values.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Currency
nm_name, the agreemen is more clearly if the same is simplified to Name. That is because the label is a field
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
Precision - Precision of the decimal field.

Decimal Separator - Decimal separator of the field.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal

nm_name, the agreement is more clearly if the same is simplified to Name. That is because the label is a
Width - Allows to determine the field width.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
Search Label - Defines the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database
as nm_name, the agreement is more clearly if the same is simplified to Name. That is because the label is a
VALUES FORMAT
Figure2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings to the field.

Display - Selects the display format of the field.
Internal Format - Allows to select the storage mode of the field in the database.
Use Combobox - Allows to select the data and the month through the combobox.
Display Format - Allows to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Display Calendar - Allows to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the
month and year passing to the field the value which was defined in the calendar.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
SPECIAL CONDITIONS Special conditions available to Date fields allows the end user select common
time periods to search.
Note: Use the function Turn On/Off to add or remove a condition.
All period - Search entire period.

Today - Search today.
Yesterday - Search yesterday.
Last 7 days - Search last 7 days. Ex: ((21/12/2007 27/12/2007).
Last week (Sun-Sat) - Search last week. (Sun-Saturday).
Last week business days (Mon-Fri) - Search last week business days (Mon-Fri).
This month - Search from beginning current month until current day.
Last month - Search last month.
Note: Special condition filter form interface .
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Time
Search Label - Sets the field label in the application.

Use same Label used on the Grid - Use the field label s configured in the grid .
Maximum Size - Maximum field size.
VALUES FORMAT
Image2: Interface of Filter Configuration.
Attributes:

Internal Format - Allow to select the storage mode of the field in the database.
Display Format - Allow to show beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Display Calendar - Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
Filter Label - Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as
nm_date_hour, the agreement is more clearly if the same is simplified to Date. That is because the label is a
Use Grid Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this
case the option filter label can't be used.
Width - Allows to determine the field width.

SQL Type
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Internal Format - Format that will be recorded in the database.
Use ComboBox - Use a combox to select the field info.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Select
Allows to use in the form field an object type select (combobox).
General Settings
Attributes:

nm_date_hour, the agreement is more clearly if it's simplified in the same way to the Date. That is because
the label is a field nickname in the application layer.
Use same Label used on the Grid - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is
configured in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used.
Maximum Size - Maximum field size .
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a a list of values display on forms fields. Note on the screen below the State field, before
and after enabling the edition lookup to display a select object containing a custom list of KEYS / VALUES. These
lists of KEYS / VALUES can be defined in two ways: based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from
custom arrays (lookup manual).
Lookup method
There are two options available: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which
is based on a custom entered list of values.
Image1: Lookup method selection.
Edition Lookup - Automatic

Populates the select object dynamically, based on a SQL statement, note the SQL statement on the picture
bellow, it is required to retrieve a key (insert / update) and a value to display on the object field on the SQL
command.
Image1: Automatic lookup settings.
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application, The developer
shall use the pattern: "SELECT key_field , display_field FROM table ", retrieving always two fields.
NOTE: The key_field will be stored on the current field when updating / inserting a row.
It is possible to use complexes SQL commands using many tables , views on it.
Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, only applicable when using the
multiple values option, the default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ).
Height - Select object rows quantity.
Multiples Values - By selection yes, it is possible to select many items on the fields list. the list of values will
be saved on the table's field as a string containing the text: KEY1;KEY2;KEY3 using an specified delimiter
like ; or - defined in Delimiter
Single value Multiple Values
Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. this option works combined with Title and Title
internal value.
Title - The object title or its default option displayed as the first line.
Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is selected.
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnChange event occurs on the
select field, it is frequently used to re-load other lists which uses this field as parameter.
Display original and lookup value- Displays the key field and the lookup field retrieved by the SQL
statement.
lookup value original & lookup values
Separated by- Character used to separate KEY and LOOKUP values displayed on the list of values. Only
applicable when using the option Display original and lookup value.
Use specific connection- Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project.
Create Link - Allows to create a link to a list update form. In the picture bellow, the select object is
automatically reloaded after the popup form update.
Use specific connection - Allows to run the SQL statement in other connection available on current project.
Checkbox Use the drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.
Edition Lookup - ManuaL

Enables a select object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow.
Image1: Manual edition lookup.
Attributes:
Lookup type- Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position)
and Multiple values (binary).
Single Value
Creates a simple select object, allows only one item selection.
Image2: Single value lookup settings.
Label- Text displayed value.

Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field.
Default - Selected value by default.
Height- The quantity of rows displayed in this select object.
Multiple values (delimiter)

Saves a single string on the table's field based on a list of values displayed. For example the
selection: Sports, Movies and Traveling is saved on the table's field as a string like S;M;T.
Note the default delimiter ( ; ) semicolon.
)
Image3: Multiple values lookup (delimiter

Delimiter - The character used to separated the items on generated string, only
applicable when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ).
Height - Object number of lines.

Saves on a string type field a list of values, for example it is possible to save answers to the
topics: Gender , Civil Status and Hobby in only one table field. See in the table bellow the
positions used by each answers on the saved string.

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2
Example: By selecting on the generated form: Male, Married and Books, the table's value
saved a string is MMBO
Image4: Multiple Values lookup settings (position).

Negative - Value saved on the string when no value is selected.
Start- Saved string initial position. (The string position counting start with 1)
Size- Bytes quantity into the saved string.
Height- Object number of lines.
Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a table field
See the examples bellow. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer
number generated automatically.
Implicit Item Description

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
The selection is converted into a integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before
saving.
Example 1: By selecting Sports and Movies on the list of values, the saved value on table
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 2 (Movies) = 3
Example 2: By selecting Sports, Traveling and Books on the list of values, the saved value
on table field is 13.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
1(Sports) + 4 (Traveling) + 8 (Books) = 13
Image5: Multiple Values settings(Binary)
Label - Item displayed text .

Insert Button - Inserts the item into the list of values

Update Button - Update all the item properties.
Remove Button - Removes the item from the list.
Clear Button - Clear the item edit form.
Save Button - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the
Load lookup definitions field.
Load lookup definitions - Allows to use a saved list of values or a ScriptCase default list.
Use Title - Allows to display a title line on the select object. This option works combined with Title and Title
internal value.
statement.
Checkbox using drop down - Display the field Select as a drop down list of checkboxes.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Double Select
Component that displays two lists of values. In the first list are the values available for selection and the second
are the values actually selected.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allows multiple selection through two
selection windows and a navigator betwen them (<< < > >>).
Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the search.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Allows to use the field title which is configured in the grid.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup enables a list of values display on forms fields.
Figure1: Edition lookup Interface
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the select object on the form application. The developer
It is possible to use complex SQL commands using many tables , views on it.
Height - Select object rows quantity
Delimiter - The character used to separate the items on generated string, the default delimiter is semicolon (
; ).
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload upon selected field update.
Display original and lookup value - Displays the field value and the lookup return value.
Lookup Value Original Value and lookup
Separated by - Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when
using the option Display original and lookup value.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Checkbox
Allows you to use an object of type checkbox in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Checkbox is an object which allows the selction of one or more information through a marking
object.
Search Label - Allows to define the field title in the search.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Edition lookup is a way to display checkbox list of values on forms fields. See the image below.
It is possible to populate the checkboxes objects based on a database table (Automatic lookup ) or from custom
arrays (Manual lookup)
Lookup Methods
There are available two options: Automatic, based in a SQL statement to feed the list of values or Manual which

Populates the checkbox object dynamically, based on a SQL statement. Note the SQL statement on the picture
below, it is required to retrieve a key ( insert / update) and a value to display on the object as fields on the SQL
command.

Attributes:
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, The developer
Columns - checkbox number of columns.
; ).
NOTE: The automatic lookup option requires the form field to be string type because multiple selection saves a single string on database table field like AK;ID>;UT
when using the semicolon delimiter.
Reload form when value has changed - Forces a form reload when the OnClick event occurs on the
checkbox field, it is frequently used to re-load another lists of values which requires this field as parameter.
Option check all - Display an object to check all items and another to uncheck all items.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup.Otherwise,
the field original value and the value retrieved by lookup are displayed separated by the character defined in
Separated by.
Separated by - Define the characters used to separate the field original value and the lookup return value.
Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes.
Choose connection - Run the select statement in a different connection available in the project.
Edition Lookup - Manual

Allows the developer to manually crete a list of values saved in the application when there is no table available
with the information needed. See picture below.
Image1: Edition Lookup Manual Interface.
Attributes :
Lookup type - Selects the lookup type: Single Value , Multiple Values (delimiter), Multiple Values (position)
Single Value
Selects only on value on the list.
Image2: Edition lookup - Single Value settings.
Label - Text displayed value in the checkbox object..

Value - When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field. For
example when Ipho Coffee is selected the value saved is 43.
Columns - Checkbox columns quantity.
Multiple values (Delimiter)

Image3: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (delimiter) settings.
Label- Text displayed value in the checkbox object.

Delimiter- The character used to separated the items on generated string, only applicable
when using the multiple values option.The default delimiter is semicolon ( ; ).

Saves multiple values on a single string. Using the Multiple Values (Position) mode is
required to enter the label, start position in the saved string and size in bytes each item. For
example, to save Gender (1byte), Civil Status(1byte) and Hobby (2bytes) in a single use
the table bellow (with the positions used by each item).

Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2
Image4: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (position) settings

Value- When an insert / update happens this value is saved on the table's field at the
specified position.

Allows to save a multiple selection as an integer value on a field.
See the examples below. On this lookup field interface the Value to each item is a integer
AttributedValueLookup
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
The selection is converted into an integer which is the sum of the items implicit values before
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
1 (Sports) + 4 (Books) + 8 ( Traveling) = 13
Image5: Edition lookup - Multiple Values (binary) settings

Insert - Insert Label and Value in the values list.

Clear - Clear the item edit form.
Save - Saves the current list of values for re-usable purpose, the saved lists are displayed on the Load
lookup definitions field.
Display original and lookup value - Select No, to display only the value retrieved by the lookup. Otherwise,
Separated by.
Use this option when Display original and lookup value = Yes
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Radio
Allows you to use an object of type radio in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection of just an information of all that are shown by it.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Display a radio object list to use in the form (see manual lookup and automatic lookup ) .
Lookup Method
Image1: Lookup type selection

Lookup used to display values in a Radio field. The values are retrieved with a Select Statement from a database
table.
Image2: Automatic Edition lookup Interface
Attributes :
SQL Select Statement - The query used to feed the checkbox object on the form application, the developer
Columns - radio number of columns.

Single column Radio double columns Radio
Use Title - Display a different radio option in the field (See None on the image bellow ) referring to a value
filled manually (Title Internal value ).
Title internal value - The key used on insert or update events when the select object title is
selected.
Enables a radio object based on a list of values filled manually as an array. See picture bellow. Use Manual
lookup when the database does not have a table with required information.
Image1: Manual Edition lookup Interface.
Attributes :
Label - Text displayed in the radio object.

Value - Value store in the table. For example, the value M is added upon selecting Male.
Default - Define a selection default value.
Columns - Define number of columns used to display the radio items.
Insert - Add to the value list the values entered in Label and Value.
Save - Saves the list values entered (for reuse with Load lookup definitions ).
Display original and lookup value- Displays the field value and the lookup return value.

Separated by- Character used to separate the field value and the lookup return value. Only applicable when
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Grid Fields
Image1: Field General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - It defines the field data type on the search.

Search Label - The field label used on the search.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Allows to use the same field label used on the grid.
Height - Defines the field height
SQL Type - SQL Field Type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Sorting
Attributes:
Data Type - "Sorting Fields" is a new feature that enables to be selected the order fields (ORDER BY
clause) that are part of the body of the Grid.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
This data type is one of the great news of ScriptCase V5, using the technology Ajax, it provides the fulfillment of a
field with more agility.
Attributes:
Data Type - This type when selected, allow to fill a field with more agility.
Search Label- Allows to define the field title in the search.

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Figure3: Edition Lookup Interface.
Attributes:
SQL Select Statement - Enter a select comand use to capture the text.
Rows - Defines the number of records displayed on each search.
Width - Defines the capture box width (Capture Text).
Search options - Defines the texts earch mode (Begin equals, Any part, End equals). It allows determinate
the mode of the research of the text (initial equal, any part or final equal).
Capture Text - When this option is not selected, there is only one field for data entry displayed in the
application. See an example in the link below.
Display original and lookup value - When this option is disabled (=No), it shows foe example only the
name of the State in the Capture.
Display label with the description - Allows you to display the label with the description.
Choose connection - Select a different connection.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Number Auto-complete
This data type is one of the great news of ScriptCase V5, using the technology Ajax, it provides the fulfillment of a
field with more agility.
Attributes:
Data Type - This type when selected, allows to fill a field with more agility.
Search Label - Defines the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database
as nm_number, the agreement is more clearly if the same is simplified to Number. That is because the label
is a field nickname in the application layer.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Save Criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles, it creates the option Save Criteria in the Search application, so it
is possible to save a search form with criteria to be used afterwards. Rules can be added and with this feature it is
possible to save search forms criteria by user login.
Image1: Save Criteria Interface
Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface

Application
Settings
In this configuration we can change the common attributes of the created applications through ScriptCase, in the
following we will describe these attributes.
Image1: Interface of Application Configuration.
Attributes:
Application code - Application code determined in the moment of the application creation, this code can be
renamed through the main menu.
Description - This field can be used to describe the application objectives.
Documents Path - The absolute path where the application documents are stored.
Image Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored.
Application Images - To use in business rules implemention, without using macro sc_image.
Language - Language of the generated application, all the hints and messages will be put inside the chosen
language.
Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values.
Use old PDF exporter - Option to use the old pdf exporter (in java) or the new exporter(webkit).
Charset - Defines a specific charset used in the application.
Share theme variable - Shares theme with other applications based on the session values.
Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workspace.
Edit Project - Allows that other users of the group can edit the application.
Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP.
HelpCase Link - Associate this application to a page of project documentation.
Image 2: Interface of Error Settings.
Attributes:
Script Error - Allows to show the information of the script and the line where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Allows to show the SQL command which originated the error.
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Command in the moment of its using.
Ajax Error Output - It opens a window with the ajax output.
Navigation
Define the navigation attributes of an application.
Figure 1: Navigation interface.
Attributes:
Exit URL - Specify the URL to which the user will be redirected upon exiting the aplication.
Close Window - When exiting the application, close the browser window.
Redirecting URL - URL to which the user will be redirected in case a global variable is not available inside
the application. For any reason it is not avaliable, this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the
SQL menu.
Redirecting Variable - Variable name, which is used to store the URL of the current application.
Return After Inserting - Dont open a new blank record after an insert, instead go to edit mode.
Exit Application - Exit the application after processing the form.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
This menu shows the global variables being used within the application, the global variable is an external
parameter required to application execution. The application can include global variables in the WHERE clause,
in the definitions and field names, programming events, etc.
Global variables are defined in square brackets ([variable]). These variables should be passed to the application
that is being implemented through one of the methods (Session, Post, Get).
Image 1: Global Variables Interface.
Example:
Select customerid, customername from customers

where customerid ='[ID]'
In this case, the variable "ID" will be displayed in the "Variables Settings".
Image 2: Variables Settings Interface.
Show all global variables used in the application.
Attribute - Variable name in the application.

Value - Defines variables behavior, this content is subdivided in three blocks, they are:
Scope - Defines how the variable is received by the application. If it has been defined to use the Post
method and it pass by using the Get method so the content won't be accepted. Ways to pass values of
variables :
Session - In this option the variable must be created as a session variable in the PHP by other
application.
Get - Defines that the variable must be passed by the URL, that means, being visible to the
browser.
Post - Defines that the variable must be passed through the Post method of an HTML form.
Settings - Do not validate (checking) the variable at execution time.

Type (Input/Output) - Defines if the variable is an input or an output.
Description - Indicates where the variable is being used.
Links
Grid Links
Links are used to navigate between project applications. From a grid it is possible to create links with other grids,
control applications, menus and forms. Using a link between a grid and a form update the grid record. It is also
possible to create links to import data from other applications in search forms.
See more:
How to link a grid with another.

How to edit grid records linked with form.
Application Link
Field Link
Capture Link
New Link
The image below is displayed by selecting the New Link option from ScriptCase´s application menu.
Application - Used to edit the grid records through a form. In the generated grid a link to edit the record is
displayed on each line .
Field - Used to link it to any other type of application. In this link type a field is used as a link between the grid
and other applications.
Capture - Used to import data from other grid to a search field. In the search is displayed an icon next to
the field.
Application
Image1: Selecting link type.
Used to edit the grid records through a form. In the generated grid a link will appear on each line to edit the
record. Clicking in the link, the selected form is displayed according to selected format (in an iframe, in the same
window or in a new window).
Applications List
Image2: List of Applications.
Application: Select the form application called by the grid.

Parameters definition
Image3: Parameters Definition Interface.
On the image above is displayed, in the left side, the application form parameters (primary key, global variables).
Select on the right side, the value to pass to the parameter. The options are:
Field - Used to pass a grid field value as parameter.

Variable - Used to pass a global variable value, used by the grid as parameter.
Value - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter.
Empty - No value is passed as a parameter.
Link Properties
The image below displays the attributes that define the link behavior. Enter the selected option to customize the
link properties.
Link Properties
Image4: Link Properties Interface.
Link Operation Mode - The options are:
Mode Description
Open in the same Display the form in the same browser window, (in
window another page, the form display substitute the grid).
Open in another Another window opens to display the form .
window
Open in Iframe The form is displayed in an frame, in the same page,
below, above, right or left to the grid.
Display the New button on the grid - The button New is displayed on the grid´s toolbar to add new
records.
Shortcut Key to the New button - Define the shortcut key to the add New button.
Called application exit URL - Called form exit URL. Default address (back button) is the calling grid.
Form Properties
Select the buttons to be displayed in form.
Enable Insert button - Enables the buttons New and Insert in form.
Enable Update button - Enables the Update button in form.
Enable Delete button - Enables the delete button in form.
Enable Navigation buttons - Enables the navigation buttons (First , Previous, Next, Last) in form.
Enable button to edit a grid record - Enables a button to edit a grid record in form.
Iframeproperties - Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe.
Display the called application header - Display form header.

Iframe position relative to the main application - The form is displayed together with the grid application
according to selected position. Options are: Below, Above, Right and Left.
Action after insert - See table below:
Attribute Action
Reload the grid Refresh current page
Move to the grid end Navigate the grid to the last page
IframeHeight - Iframe Height in pixels

IframeWidth - Iframe Width in pixels.
Save Button - End the link wizard.
Field Link
Links - Field
Image1: Selecting link type.
Used to create a link from grid field to any existing project application. When you select link type field, a drop
down list is displayed with all fields available (displayed) in the grid for selection. (See Select Fields).
Applications List
Image2: Link between application Interface.
The image below displays all the project applications (menus, search, reports pdf, forms, grid, tabs and control
forms). Select the form application called by the grid.
On the image above is displayed,in the left side, the application form parameters (primary key, global variables).
Select on the right side, the value to pass to the parameter. The options are:
Field - Used to pass a grid field value as parameter.

Value - Used to pass a fixed value as parameter.
Link Properties
The image below displays the attributes that define the link behavior. Enter the selected option to customize the
link properties.
Link Properties
Link Operation Mode - The options are:
Mode Description
Open in same window Display the form in the same browser window, (in
another page, the form display substitute the grid).
Open in another Another window is open to display the form .
window
Open in Iframe The form is displayed in an frame, in the same page,
below, above, right or left to the grid.
Called application exit URL: Called form exit URL. Default address (back button) is the calling grid.
Link hint - Message displayed when mouse is dragged over the linking field.
Label - Sets the link title in the application. Used when there is more than one link in the same field.
Form Property
These options are displayed only when the called application is a form. Allows to select the buttons
displayed in the form.
Enable Insert button- Enables the buttons New and Insert in form.
Enable Update button - Enables the Update button in form .
Enable Delete button- Enables the delete button in form.
Enable Navigation buttons - Enables the navigation buttons (First , Previous, Next, Last) in form.
Iframeproperties - Displayed only when Link Operation Mode is Open in Iframe
Iframe position relative to the main application - The form is displayed together with the grid application
according to selected position. Options are: Below, Above, Right and Left.
IframeHeight - Iframe Height in pixels
IframeWidth - Iframe Width in pixels.

Capture Link
Links - Capture
Image1: Capture Link
The capture link is used specifically in the grid search form. This type of link imports data from another grid to the
field search form. When capture link type is selected, a list with the fields search form is displayed. Choose a field
to receive data through the link.
Applications List
Image3:Applications List Interface
In the image above a list with project available grid applications is displayed. Select a grid application according to
the search form field that receives the data.
Fetch field value: - Select a called grid field. This field have the value received by the search form.
Enter the values to pass to the parameters - This options is displayed when the called grid have a parameter
to pass (for example Where clause with a global variable). The options are:


Editing Links
Links - Editing
Image1: Links Menu
In the Connections folder in the application menu (Image1) are displayed the links existent in the application and
the item New Connection. When an existent link name is selected the image below is displayed allowing it to be
edited.
Actions
Properties Editing the link properties.

Link Edit a Link
Delete Delete a link
Programming
Overview Programming
Overview
ScriptCase has incorporated the concept of Object Oriented programming, using attributes, resources, methods
and libraries. It is possible to create your own business rules in applications, and by using these concepts you can
reap huge rewards in terms of better organization and improved development.
Attributes
Attributes are variables containing a global variable passed from one application to another. An attribute can be
referenced in all of the methods and events of an application.
Image 1: Attribute Settings interface.
Attributes:
Attributes - Enter the attribute's name and click on the include button to add it. To modify it click on the
attribute's name (located to the left of the buttons) and click the Update button to save your changes. To
remove an attribute, click on the delete button after selecting the atribute. Click the clean button to clean the
attributes list.
Libraries
To use a library you need to select the corresponding library type (e.g. Public Libraries, Project Libraries or User
Libraries) and enable the applicable php library file(s). All methods in the library are visible in all application
events and methods. To manage libraries, access them via the main menu: Configuration ==> Libraries.
Methods
Methods are functions or procedures declared by the developer, to support the implementation of business rules
for an application. Using methods in applications it is possible to reuse code and thus improve development
productivity. It is possible to create PHP and JAVASCRIPT methods.
Figure 1: Method menu interface.
Creating a new method
Figure 2: Create a new Method.
1. Define the name for the new method then click the Create button. See the Figure below.
Figure 3: Adding a Method.
2 Methods may involve parameters being passed.

Add the number of variables:
Figure 5: Define Parameters interface
Defining a variable:
Figure 6: Add Parameters interface.
Name: Input a variable name.
Type: Select the variable type as: For value or For reference. * 10270
Value Default: The default value used to initialize the parameter variable when called.
* References allow you to create a second name for a variable so you can use it to read or modify the original
data stored in that variable.
Figure 7: Define Method Parameters interface.
Select all parameter variables in the Parameters field.
Unmark all parameter variables selected in the Parameters field.
Edit the variable selected in the Parameters field.
Delete the variable selected in the Parameters field.
3 In order to run a method, it needs to be called within an event. See the example below:
Figure 8: Events.
In this example we are using the onLoad event to call our method when the record is loaded. See how simple it is
to call the method in the example below:
Using a method :
Figure 9: Event method interface
Thus we get the following result when running the application.

Chart Applications
Overview
Chart applications
Chart applications are powerful information analysis resource to display the database information in a graphical
way.
Chart applications display data retrieved from a database using a SELECT statement.
The Chart applications generated the following functionality:
Feature Description
Search Search form associated to the grid. Use the search page to
filter the displayed data
Groups In one click it's possible to create break down lines and group
data by N levels or fields.
Totals Summarize columns using different functions such as: SUM ,
AVG , MAX , MIN.
Charts Charts based on grid´s data can be displayed in different
styles like: Bars, Columns, Pie, Dots and more
Fields The end user can select at runtime which columns to display
selection in the grid.
Links creation Create links to other applications.
Events Customize grid event´s PHP code, used to create calculated
programming fields , business rules, etc.
Data formatting Format the grid data, field types such as: date, currency,
decimal values, integer values, images and text. Automatic
data formatting can also be integrated to the regional
settings.
Inside the generated application it is possible to choose the chart type dynamically. The available types are:
Figure 1: Combination Chart.
Figure 2: Stacked Chart - Area

Figure 3: Stacked Chart - Bar
Figure 4: Stacked Chart - Columns
Figure 5: Bar Chart.

Figure 6: Columns Chart.
Figure 7: Line Chart.

Figure 8: Spline Chart.
Figure 9: Line Step Chart.
Figure 8: Pie Chart.

Figure 9: Doughnut Chart.
Figure 10: Pyramide Chart.
Figure 11: Funnel Chart.

Figure 12: Radar Chart.
Figure 13: Gauge Chart.

Chart
Chart Overview
This application is designed for creating dynamic charts based on SQL or Procedures.
Inside Scriptcase Charts can be created also within the Grid application, however the Chart application has more
settings options available to the end user within the generated application. The idea is to apply the concept of
Business Intelligence to Scriptcase users to generate charts and set their own data display .
The configuration settings uses the Drag'n Drop to build dynamic Charts.
Dimensions:
The dimensions options is used to set the fields that make up the size of the graph (axis X), used to group the
data into categories.
The developer can choose more than one field as a dimension, each new field as a subcategory of the previous
field.
To select one field, click its name in the available fields in the left column and drag it to the selected fields in the
right column.
Figure 1: Charts Configuration Interface.
Metrics:
The metrics are used to display quantitatively the data grouped by dimensions, starting from version 8.1 of
Scriptcase, you can choose more than one metric to create the charts and have a dynamic values display within
the application generated. To select one field, click its name in the available fields from the left column and drag it
to the selected fields from the right column. In addition to selecting the fields that will be used as a metric.
When records count is the metric selected, the function from "Sum" is disregarded. If you want to group all the
values in one, check the "Grand Total". This option is typically used for charts of type "Gauge".
Initial Value checkbox is used to define the default field, when not using the combination or stacked chart types.
If you check more then one field Scriptcase will automatically set a multiple value chart type. For single value
charts display (Bar, Line, Spline, Line Step, Area, Pie, Pyramid, Funnel, Radar and Gauge) you have to check
only one field to appear as initial value during the first generation.
Search
In the Search tab, the developer can choose the fields that will be used as filter parameter. The filtered values for
each selected field must be chosen during the development within this interface.
To create dynamic search used at runtime by the end user within the application, we recommend setting through
the Search menu interface located in the menu "Search".
Chart
In the Chart tab the developer can set the default options for the first Chart that will be generated: chart type,
color, theme, and others. Below you can find the description for each one of these options.
Attributes:
Chart's theme - Sets the theme for the chart's color palettes. These themes can be customized within the
Menu > Layouts > Chart themes.
Chart's type - Allows you to define the type of chart that appears as default when the application is
generated by the first time.
Font size - Font size for the displayed values, if you do not fill this field up, the size will be 12.
Abbreviated value - When you need the displayed value to be abbreviated.
Display Values - Starts the Chart already displaying all the values, no matter what the user will chose inside
the Chart dynamic settings.
Exception for display - Charts that will not display the Chart values, even when set for display in the option
"Display Values". For these types we do not recommend the values display issues for aesthetic matters,
however it will be the developers decision.
Chart Width - Default width in pixels of the generated Charts.
Chart Height - Default height in pixels of the generated Charts.
Values sorting - Sorts the chart's values. This sorting option is also available inside the generated chart for
dynamic configuration
Chart Settings
In the Chart setup screen the developer can change some viewing options of the application, chart types display
option, labels, margins and alignments. Below you will find more details for each of the available attributes
Figure 1: Chart Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Use new Chart - Use the new chart means to use the configuration options for the Chart application
released in version 8.1 or keep the previous options available before upgrading from version 8.1
Chart title - This option allows to define an exhibition title to the chart.
Available chart types - List of charts types available for user's choice within the application generated via
the button "Charts Types". The checked charts types will be available for dynamic selection within the final
application interface.
Label for quantity - Generic label from y-axis for record count values.
Label for the summarization - Y-axis generic label for summary functions values (sum, average, weighted
mean, maximum and minimum)
Friendly URL - This option allows you to adapt the name of the URL that will be called by the application, the
characters allowed are the same available in URLs: a-z, A-Z, 0-9. This option can also be changed on the
home screen, about the "friendly URL" column in the list of applications.
Horizontal Alignment - Defines the horizontal alignment of the application page (center, left or right).
Margins - Sets the application margins according to the values (in pixels) filled inside the option (right, left,
top and down).
Refresh Interval - Page refresh interval (in seconds). If you fill with zero there will be no refreshing.
Toolbar
The toolbar is divided into two parts: Top Toolbar and Bottom Toolbar, so that it is possible to define which
buttons will be displayed in both places. The selection of the buttons of the top and bottom toolbars are
independent enabling, for example, a button is in the two bars at the same time. To choose the active buttons,
simply move inside the checkbox the settings on the left side to the right side.
Below you can find the toolbar options description:
Figure 1: toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Navigation - Displays the checkbox on the navigation buttons that can be displayed in the query.
Exit Terminates the application.
Exportation - Sets the format available for screen printing.
PDF Provides the chart in PDF format.

Print Creates the chart view in html format for printing.
Chart
Resume Allows you to display one page of records from the

registry number typed.
Sorting Button to display or not the sorting options of values
Charts Buttons to define the charts' types that will be
type displayed within the
applicationsgenerated.
Group of Buttons
Export Define a button that allows to open a float menu with

a group of buttons.
Separator
Add:

Hint \ Title: Value that will be showed when the cursor is over the button.
Button Type: Type of button to be displayed (Button, Image or Link).
Display: Mode how the button should appear, may assume three formats: Only Text, Only Image or Text and
Image.
Display Position: Option to choose the position of text and image, case the option "Display" is like "Text and
Image".
After group creation, so that the buttons does part of it, it is necessary to position it below and more to the right of
the buttons group name, like you can see in the image below:
Buttons Settings
OPTIONS
Image6: Grid Toolbar Options.
Attributes:
Display summary - Display summary at the bottom of each page.

Format rows counter - Display format of the rows counter (eg.: [1 to 10 of 200])
The amount of links displayed - The amount of page links to display if the option navigation by page is
enabled.
Lines per page - Amount of record lines per page.
Jump to - Jump to page, or record.
Rows to choose - Show which options will be displayed for amount of rows in the combobox (eg. 10,20,30).
Export Settings
Exportation options enables the developer to configure the files generated by the chart application.
Figure 1: Export Settings Interface.
PDF Settings
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Page orientation of the PDF reports (portrait or landscape).

PDF Format - Page format of the PDF reports (letter, A0, A1, A2, A3... and others).
Print Type - PDF Print mode: color, economic (black and white) or both.
Open PDF Directly- Open the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediate page with a link to the
file.
Configurable PDF - Allows the user to configure PDF creation parameters during the execution of the
application.
Generate Bookmarks - Generate bookmarks automatically, the bookmarks are generated for the group.
Page Numbers Format - If page numbering format will be simple (1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ...), full (1n, 2n, 3n, ...) or not
use numbering.
Page numbering height - Aligns vertically the numbers at the top or at the bottom of the page.
Horizontal position of the page numbering - Aligns horizontally the page numbering.
Upper Margin - PDF Upper margin in millimeters.
Bottom Margin - PDF bottom margin in millimeters.
Right Margin - PDF right margin in millimeters.
Left Margin - PDF left margin in millimeters.
Print Background - Option for printing the background in the PDF file (yes or no).
JS execution time - Maximum waiting time for the server to execute the JS.
Timeout for chart's image creation - Individual timeout for each chart image creation on the PDF.
Print settings
Attributes:
Print Type - Allows you to select the print mode in relation to color. Types are: black and white, color or both.
Print Background - Display Background in HTML printing.
Sql
SQLSelect Statement - Display the SQL select command. Edit the statement to add or delete fields,
functions, etc. Tip: Use the SQL Builder for statement fast assembly.
SQL Preparation - Enter SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the main select.
Connection - Display the (database) connection name used. This connection can be changed for another
that has the same tables (SQL).
Use Customized Message - Define a customized error message to be displayed when the application has
no records (EOF).
No Records Message - Message displayed when the application has no records. Field associated to “ Use
Personalized Message”.
Font Face - Error Message font face. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.
Font Size - Error Message font size. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.
Font Color - Error Message font color. Field associated to “ Use Personalized Message”.
Note: Fill the first box with the variable name. The second box must be filled with a part of the table name to be substituted.
Fields Variables - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each dynamically
Note: Fill the first box with variable name, in the second select the name of the field to be substituted.
Case Sensitive - Apply case sensitive.

Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Log
Options:

Fields
Overview
In this session just the fields that are part of the grid are displayed, these are the fields that were selected in the
menu â??GRID - SELECT FIELDSâ??.
A series of attributes are defined to each field. The user can set the attributes specific to a field data type using
the update attribute settings page that reloads according to the selected type.
Text
Image1: Field General Settings.
Attributes:
displayed
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Multiple Lines Text
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Multiple line text fields display line breaks (like HTML tag
<BR>).
displayed
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Integer
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Integer fields are formatted according to integer formatting rules.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678


Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.
value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Decimal
Figure1: General SettingsInterface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Decimal fields are formatted according to real numbers
formatting rules.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Attributes:
regional settings).
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.
value is negative.
Column Chart

Attributes:
captions.
Percent
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Percent fields are like a number field, but displaying the
percentage symbol after it.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
Decimal Format
Attributes:
regional settings).
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.
value is negative.
Column Chart

Attributes:
captions.
Currency
Figure 1: Interface General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the type of field application. Currency fields are formatted according to currency formatting
rules.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Attributes:
Regional Settings - Apply regional settings formatting rules to the field. If selecting No the attributes Digit
Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign, Currency positive format and Currency negative
format are displayed.(See regional settings).
Monetary Format - Define if the field is displayed in monetary format.
Monetary Symbol - Define the character used as the monetary symbol.
Negative Sign - Define the character used to display negative values.
Currency positive format - Define the negative sign display position (relative to the field).
Currency negative format - Define the character used to display negative values.
Complete with Zeros -Define the decimal precision is to be completed with zeros to the right. Example: The
value is $125.50 with decimal precision 3. Using Complete with zeros the field is displayed $125.500.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.

value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Html Image
Figure1: Field General Settings.
Attributes:
Data type – Define the application field type. Html image fields are used to display images.
Image - Define the image to display.
The icon "Choose image" displays Scriptcase standard images. Alternatively click in "Upload image" to send
an image from a different location to the server (images need to be in the same server to be displayed).
Border - Image border width in pixels.
Width - Define image width in Pixels.
Height - Define image height in Pixels.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:
Calculated Percent
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Calculated Percent fields are calculated based on the total value
of a related number field.
Related Field - Related number field to calculate the total value.
Examples:

(xx) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(xx) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 (00) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 1234567890 (12) 3456 - 7890
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 12345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678
(zz) xxxx - xxxx 0012345678 ( ) 1234 - 5678

Decimal Format
Attributes:
regional settings).
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Line Chart
Image: Line Chart.
Attributes:
displayed.

value is negative.
Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Date
Image1:General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option
attributes accordingly note the definitions below (See Regional settings).

Examples:
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table

at left
n month "1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
complete)
with zero at left
with zero at left
left
\ escape
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Time
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type.Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes) the option
attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).

Examples:
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table

at left
n month "1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
complete)
with zero at left
with zero at left
left
\ escape
Internal Format - Define the field formatting when SQL type is different from Date. Use the characters Y, M
and D for Year, Month and Day to enter the format.
Example1: For a date stored as char(8) SQL where the positions 1 to 4 represent the year, the position 5
and 6 the month and the positions 7 and 8 the day, define the internal format as: YYYYMMDD
Example2: For a date stored as char(6) SQL where the positions 1 to2 represent the month and the
positions 3 and 6 the year , define the internal format as: MMYYYY
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Date And Time
Attributes:
and time rules.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings date and time formatting rules to the field. When selected (Yes)
the option Detail Mask is displayed. Otherwise the developer can select the attribute Display. To set one of
the attributes accordingly note the definitions below. (See Regional settings).

Decimal of seconds - Number os decimals for seconds.
Examples:
d-m-Y 25-09-2009
F/Y September/2009
j/n/Y \a\s g:i:s A 25/9/2001 14:30:11
PM
2009
h:i:s 11:33:20
#h:i:s 123:43:27 (in hours)
Formatting Table

at left
n month "1" a"12"
with 3 char)
complete)
complete)
with zero at left
with zero at left
left
\ escape
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Image(database)
Image (database)
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the images are retrieved from the database in
binary.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Image (file Name)
Attributes:
Data type – Define the application field type. The images are saved in a sever directory and the file name in
a table field in the database.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files (it is added under the directory defined in Images
Directory. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local variables, in the subdirectory name.
Image Cache - Time in minutes to keep the image in cache memory.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Attributes:

Document (database)
General Settings Interface

Image1:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Using this field the files are retrieved from the database in
binary.
File name - Define the field to store the document file name (it is database field).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. The file is saved in a server directory and the file name in a
table text field.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Credit Card Number
Attributes:
Data type - Credit Card Number fields are formatted according to specific rules.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
E-mail
Image1:
Attributes:
Data type â?? Define the application field type.

Email fields are formatted according to specific email rules.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Url
Image1: General SettingsInterface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type.URL fields are formatted according to specific URL rules.
Other Page - Open the link in another page.

Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Attributes:

Column Chart
Attributes:
captions.
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:

Barcode
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Youtube
General settings
Attributes

Width - Video width in pixels.
Height - Video height in pixels.
Link Type - Type of the link: button or text.
Link Text - Text of the link.
update mode".
SQL Type - Database field type.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Google Maps

window.

update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Qr Code
General Settings
Atributtes:

Values Format
Atributtes:
Level of error correction - Codewords are 8 bits long and use the Reed–Solomon error correction algorithm
with four error correction levels. The higher the error correction level, the less storage capacity.
Image Size - Size of the QR code.
Margin - Margin of the QR code image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Layout
Layout
Blocks
Settings
Header & Footer
Blocks

Attributes:

Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Settings
Attributes:

Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Events
Events
OnInit - This event is executed just one time, before the main select of the application execution. In this scope,
normally, are executed the macros that update the select, as these: sc_select_field, sc_select_order,sc_select_
where(add) and etc.
onRecord - This event is executed before displaying each grid record.
onHeader - This event is executed immediately before displaying the grid header. Use this event to print some
calculated value in the header for example.
onFooter - Used to display some calculated value. Write in this event the necessary calculation to display the
result in the footer.

Application
Settings
In this configuration there are common attributes to the created applications through ScriptCase, in the following
we will describe these attributes.
Image1: Interface of Application Configuration.
Attributes:
Application Images - To use in business rules implemention, without using macro sc_image.
Language - Language of the generated application, all the hints and messages will be put inside the chosen
language.
Use old PDF exporter - Option to use the old pdf exporter (in java) or the new exporter (webkit).
Charset - Defines a specific charset used in the application.
Share theme variable - Shares theme with other applications based on the session values.
Edit Project - Allows that other users of the group edit the application.
Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP.
HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.
Image 2: Interface of Error Settings.
Attributes:
Script Error - Allow to show the information of the script and the line where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Allow to show the SQL command which originated the error.
Ajax Error Output - It opens a window with the ajax output.
Navigation
Attributes:
SQL menu.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.

Programming
Overview Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Libraries
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Form Applications
Overview
Forms Application
This application type updates information in the database using web forms. The update may be direct (INSERT,
UPDATE and DELETE) or using stored procedures.
A form can be displayed in several formats. It can edit a single record or multiple records in a single page, also it
is reworked to display when accessed by a mobile device.
With this, the form created on Scriptcase, recognizes the device that is accessing it (Tablet, Smartphone or
Desktop...) and adapts to the layout that best suits the resolution required, applying so the Responsive concept.
See the different formats in the image below.
Single Record
Editable Grid
Form displayed on a smartphone
The created form applications have many build-in features the table below list some examples according to the
features:
Feature Description
Hidden Fields Hide fields in forms display while update field.
Read-Only Fields are displayed but update are not allowed.
Fields
Required Fields Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be
entered. primary keys are automatically defined
as required Fields.
Unique Key Define unique keys with update validation.
Procedures Use stored procedures for data manipulation.
Master / Detail Update various related tables in a single page.
Update link Handles N:N relations in a single form.
table
Dependencies Define form table dependencies. Criticisms are
automatically generated according to the
definition.
Fields Format According to the field type required validation
are generated as well as different formats area
available.
Events Allow the developer to add business rules in
Programming PHP code. The form events are triggered during
the processing in the server or by the browser
(AJAX).
Links creation Link a form with other applications.
Form applications examples:

Form
Settings
In this module are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format of the form application.
Image1: Interface Configuration.
Image2: Interface Configuration.
Attributes:
Orientation - Orientation of the registers in the form, can be: unique register and multiple registers.
Single Record: Edit/Add a register per time.
Multiple Records: Multiple records can be edited at a time. See the image below each row represents a
record in the table.
Editable Grid: Some registers can be edited per time. See in the image below that each line represents
a register in the table.
Editable Grid View: A record can be edited only if open the edit box of a record. See the image below
each row represents a record in the table.
Friendly URL - This field allow you to change the URL that will be called by the application, allowed
screen, on the “Friendly URL” column at the applications list.
Line Breaks in Title - It allows to break the line of the Titles
Display Line Number (Editable Grid and Editable Grid View) - It allows to display the line number
Pagination (not available to Single Record) - Define how to display the records in the screen. All records
in the screen or using pagination.
Lines per page (not available to Single Record) - Amount of lines of registers per page.
Lines for inclusion (Multiple Records)- Amount of registers shown for inclusion.
Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the alignment of the application in the page.
Margins - Define the magins of the form(right, left, top, bottom) in pixels.
Table Width - This parameter define the table width of the application.
Table Width Unit - Measurement unit used to the table width defined in the previous item. Percentage, pixel
or automatic.
Table Columns - This parameter define the table columns width.
Use Modal (Editable Grid View) - Define if the update mode of the Editable Grid (view) will open in a modal
window.
Modal Width (Editable Grid View) - Define the modal window width, if the "use modal" option is enabled.
Modal Height (Editable Grid View) - Define the modal window height, if the "use modal" option is enabled.
Layout and Behavior
Automatic tab - Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of characters
allowed in the field.
Highlight Text upon focus - Highlight field contents when the field receives focus.
Use Enter to tab - Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field.
Field with initial focus - Field that receives focus when the application is loaded. Initial focus doesn't work
with fields containing watermark
Focus on field with error - Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form. If any validation
errors occur, the focus will advance to the first field with an error.
Edit Fields
The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six, this new menu option groups the most
commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.
Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the field's name.

2 - Label - Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application.
3 - Data type - This allows the change of the field's type. Select the desired data type from the dropdown
box.
4 - Form option. Not available for Grid Applications
4.1 - New - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new record
(Addition mode).
4.2 - Update - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a record
(Edition mode).
4.3 - Read-Only - Defines if the field will become a read-only field, this way it cannot be edited.
4.4 - Required - Defines if the field will become a required field.
4.5 - PK - Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. If only one field is selected it will
work as a regular primary key, if two or more fields were selected it will work as a composite key.
4.6 - DB Value (Insert) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field
when inserting a new record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. This option allows you to set
a default value to the field.
4.7 - DB Value (Update) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected
field when updating a record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP.
5 - Page - Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages, which
are arranged as high-level tabs. Each page can contain one or more blocks.
6 - Block - Indicates that there is a Block in the application.
7 - Page: Fields not shown - This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated application.
Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields, blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block or page.
Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Available just to Forms and Control applications. It is not available for Grid Applications.
Figure 2: Display Interface.
Options:
Markers Positioning - Indicates where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.
Display message - Determine whether or not to display a message upon validation.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Unique Key
Its provide validation of unique key at web server side.

Toolbar
Also is possible, separate which buttons will be displayed when the application is accessed on a Mobile Device.
Desktop: Local where configures the toolbar for exibition type "Classic Web Version", i.e, these
configurations will used when it is accessed by a Desktop.
Mobile: Local where configures the toolbar for exibition type "Mobile Version", i.e, these settings will used
when it is accessed by a Mobile Device.
Image1: Interface of toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Display the buttons that can be shown in the form anad used for navigation. The selection of
these buttons vary according to the form application.
Update - Display the buttons that can be shown in the form and used for data update. The selection of these
buttons vary according to the form application.

Add:

Hint Title: Value that will be showed when the cursor is over the button.
Button Type: Type of button to be displayed. (Button, Image or Link)
Display: Mode how the button should appear, may assume three formats: Only Text, Only Image or Text and
Image.
Display Position: Option to choose the position of text and image, case the option "Display" is like "Text and
Image".
After group creation, so that the buttons does part of it, is necessary position it below and more to right of the
buttons group name, like the image below:
Button Settings
Image5: Button Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Hint - Define a hint for the button.
Access Key - Allows to define fast acess keys using the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Image6: Interface of Tool Options.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Use automatic filed format .

Help by Block - Group help by block. Is possible to define a help text to each field and a icon is displayed in
the block title bar linked to the help page.
General Help - "Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linked to the help page.
Export
This screen allows to configure the PDF file generated by the form.
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Define the printing orientation: Picture or Landscape.

PDF Format - Define the PDF form type (letter, A4, etc.).
Print type - Defining the printing mode: colorful or economic.
Open PDF directly - Opens the generated PDF file without displaying an intermediated link page.
Configurable PDF - Allows the user to configure the PDF parameters during the application.
Print Background - Allow the user to print the PDF with the background or not.
JS Execution Time - The max execution time to wait the JS proccess.
HTML Print
Configure the HTML format of the grid.
Image3: HTML Print Interface.
Attributes:
Print Type - Selecting the print mode (color): Both, Black and White and Colorful.
Print Background - Show Background printing HTML.
Sql
In this module are defined the attributes relative to the connection with the table in that the form was created. We
can define the primary key, filters, ordinances for the create form.
Choosing the fields that are primary key - In this function it is shown an combobox object with an asterisk
beside, that indicates what are the fields that compose the primary key of the SQL table. In the majority
cases, the Scriptcase identifies it, for the cases that this don't happen, the user will must do this identification,
using the buttons beside to do the choose of the key. See how the buttons act:
On/Off Button - Give or remove the attribute from the primary key of the field. The defined field as
primary key presents an asterisk at the left side of its name.
All Button - Define all fields as primary key. These fields become to present an asterisk at the left side
of its name.
None - Remove all fields. Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the On/Off and restart the
process.
Ordinance Buttons - They are the arrows that stay at the right side of the combobox. Allow to order the
fields of the primary key, putting it in the desired ordinance. To order click on the field and use the
arrows to do the movement
Where Condition - Option to the user enter the WHERE clause to filter sql records.
Order By - Allows the user write an ORDER BY clause that will determine the order of the records. By
default the records are ordered by primary key.
Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this
connection can be traded for another that have the same tables (SQL).
Table Name - Table name that the form application is using.
Variable for Table - These filled fields allows that part of the table name defined in the select to be traded
before the execution of the command by a content of a variable.
Note: In the first field you must fill it with the variable name. The second field must be filled with the part of the table name to be traded.
Case Sensitive - Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired that the
filter does not respect this setting.
Sorting
Figure 1: Sorting initial setting for each application field.
Configuration for fields that allow ordering setting
This property is useful to define the fields that will allow sorting options. The field sorting is already applied inside
the generated application, just by clicking on the name of the column (field) that the user wants to sort. By default
the Group By settings will be considered for the fields sorting.
Also by default, the first six fields are already checked (showing a star on the field left side), they can be sorted so
that the user does not have to worry about that detail.
Figure 2: sorting Fields Configuration
Note: Use the on/off function to include or remove a field.
Sort Fields
Sets the initial sorting for each application field, it can be "ascending" or "descending" sort..
Defines the fields that are available by clicking in the "Sorting" button inside the Grid.
Figure 3: Advanced Sorting
Use displayed fields - Sets all the fields that are displayed in the Grid and that are available by clicking the
Ordering button.
Use columns - Sets all fields configured in the columns option as available by clicking in the Grid sorting
button.
Define Columns - Allows that the fields are chosen freely, according to the available fields:
Procedures
In this module we can configure a form application so that it use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) in
the operations of insertion, update, and exclusion. It isn't necessary to use the three options at the same time,
being thus the options that are not configured to use procedures will continue with the Scriptcase standard that
are the commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below pass-by-pass the implementation if a Stored Procedure for Insertion in the Database.
Image1: Interface of Stored Procedures for Form.
1- Let's mark the first option: “I want to use Procedure to do INSERT”. Afterwards, inform the procedure name
and the amount of parameters.
Image2: Defining procedure parameters.
2- Now we define the fields that will be reference to the parameters of the Stored Procedure, as like the type of
each parameter (input or output). Afterwards, we click on the button save to finalize this process.
Image3: Passing of values to the Stored Procedure.

Group Label
With this option, you can enter one or more titles to your columns in your applications and can change its size, its
color, font and position them as desired.
Image1: Edit Cell Properties
Attributes:
Title - Choose the title that will appear on your Group Label.
Source Text - Choose the font that the title appears.
Font size - Set the font size of your title.
Horizontal alignment - Set the alignment of the title horizontally. It can be in either left or center or in the
middle.
Vertical alignment - Setting the alignment of the title vertically. It can be below, within or on top.
Text Color - Choose the color of the title text that appears when the application runs.
Background Color - Set the background color of the space where the title appears.
Image2: Form with Group Label.
Javascript
The concept of Edit Javascript is to associate to the form fields events in Javascript, that means, for each field
you can edit actions associated to its events.
Image1: Edit Javascript Interface
Attributes:
Choose the object - In this combobox are shown all fields that are part of the form application, as the object
form “form”.
Choose event- In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we will write
the Javascript code. See the available events:
onclick - Occurs on the mouse click over the field See Example
onblur - Occurs when the objects lose focus. See example

onChange - Occurs always that the object lose focus and the value is modified. See example
onFocus - Occurs always that the object gains focus. See example
onMouseOver - Occurs always that the mouse pointer is over the field. See example
onMouseOut - Always that the mouse pointer goes out of the field. See example
Events linked to the form - The events below are directly linked to the form.
OnLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, that means, when you navigate from a register to
other. When click on the buttons (new, insert, previous, etc).
OnSubmit - This event occurs when click on the buttons “insert”, “update” and “remove”
Edit Javascript
Selecting the object and its event, then click on the button "Edit" opening a window to edit the javascript
action that will be executed when the selected event is actioned. In this screen we can type customized
javascript actions or we can use default Scriptcase events, for example: nm_reload_form(); that do a
reload on the form.
Image2: Interface of Javascript Edition.
Save the javascript command clicking on the button "update".
Note: Javascript language doesn't have the same behavior to each browser available in the market. If it's
necessary to type a complex rotine using Javascript, we recommend to make tests in different browsers.
OnClick Example: When click on a field of the radio type can be turned on/off a series of form fields according to
the selected value.
if(document.F1.sex[0].checked){
document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = false;
document.F1.aux_maternity .style.background='FFFFFF'
}
document.F1.aux_maternity.disabled = true;
document.F1.aux_maternity.style.background='FCEEBC'
}
Note: To access a field of the radio time it is necessary to use an index.
OnBlur Example:
We can define a criteria around the field “weekly_hour_job” when it loose focus.
if (document.F1.tp_folha[0].checked && document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value > '20')

{
alert("job hour above the allowed.");
document.F1.weekly_hour_job.value = "";
document.F1.weekly_hour_job.focus();
}
onChange examples:
When modify the “Salary” of an employee and go out of the field, will occur an “onChange”, in this moment we
use advantage to check if the “position” is “gardener”.
if (document.F1.salary.value > 5000.00 && document.F1.position.value == 'gardener'){

alert('when you grow i want to be a gardener');
}
OnFocus Example:
After informing the value of the purchase and select the modality of the payment in an object of the “Select: type
payment_way”, the javascript code below calculates the value of the parcel.
if(document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == 'avista')
{
document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value;
}
if (document.F1.payway[document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60')
{
document.F1.parcelvalue.value = document.F1.purchasevalue.value / 2;
}
if (document.F1.payway [document.F1.payment_way.selectedIndex].text == '30/60/90')
{
}
onMouseOver Example:
We can trade the stile (background color, font color, etc.) when the mouse is over the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "0FFCCA"
onMouseOut example:
Set a background color when the mouse loose focus of the field.
document.F1.field_name.style.bgColor = "FFFFFF"
Dependencies
This resource allows to associate tables, it means tables that exist dependences, such as the tables: orders and
items. It is possible to remove a register from the Orders table and all its items. Lets see how to do it.
1 - First we must define a new dependence. In this example we will create a dependency between Orders
(Dependent table) and the table Customer (Current application). Click on the button new dependency.
2º - We must select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related between the father and child
table. In this example only one field will be related that it is the customer id.
3º - Then we must select the key fields: customers -> CustomerID - orders ->CustomerID.
4º - Now we just need to define if it will just show an error message or it will make a cascade delete.
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
CAPTCHA
This is a feature used to increase the level of security in the form. It requires direct user interaction, through the
entry of a random sequence of characters, displayed on a dynamically generated image. CAPTCHA means "C
ompletely Automated Public Turing test to tell Computers and Humans Apart".
Read more:
Using CAPTCHA on a login form

Use CAPTCHA - Enable CAPTCHA in the application.
Quantity - Number of characters displayed in the automatically generated image.
List - Characters to be used in the generated image.
Label - Message containing instructions on how to use the CAPTCHA feature.
Error message - Error message displayed when the user input does not match the generated image.
Height - Height of the generated image in pixels.
Width - Width of the generated image in pixels.
Font Size - Captcha font size
Reload - Option for the user to request a new code.
Select one layout - This option allows the developer to set how the CAPTCHA should be displayed in the
application.
Log
Options:

Fields
Overview
This interface allow to inform the validation rules abd formatting of the content of each form field . The
configuration of the form fields is done clicking on the field to be formated, in the existing list, in the left side of the
“Form” folder.
Image1: List of fields.
Done this, the system opens a screen at the right side of this list, where must verify if in the field Data type the
value attributed by ScriptCase through the SQL table analysis is according to the existing content. In case that it
isn't, the user will must select in the list (combobox) an adjusted type to the content of its field. For each Data type
selected will be formated a window with diferent characteristics. Example: A field of type Text have diferent
characteristics of a field of date type. Being thus, the formatting of the screen will be according to the chosen
type.
Afterwards, after the choose of the data type, just complete the others fields of this window and click on the button
Save, Compile or Run.
Text
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it accept letters, numbers,
characters.
Label - Field title in application. For example: a field is defined as client_name_fld in the table is displayed
as Client Name.
Watermark - Creates a watermark in the input object.
Initial Value (Type)- Fills the field with a pre defined value when the final user clicks in the "new" button.
Defined Value - Uses the value entered on the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to recive parameters
by using this funtionality. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable
created on a login screen.
System Date - Uses the server date.
Note: Using System Date option it is not required to enter a Initial value.
Initial Value - The value displayed on field when using Defined Value option.
Width - Width or chars quantity displayed on input object.

Validation Image - Allows to show an image when validating a field.
Password field - Transforms the input type field to password.
Text field Password field

Save Variable - Saves a session variable with a field value (to use in other applications). For example, in the
login form the username is saved as a session variable and displayed in all the applications.
Variable Name - Session variable name in which to save the field value (as defined above).
Field Mask - Defines the field display mask. There are three masks types available and they can be merged:
9 Replaced by any numeric character entered by the user. (0-9)
A Replaced by any alpha charactere entered by the user. (A-Z,a-z)
* Replaced by any alphanumeric character (A-Z,a-z,0-9) entered by the user.

Note: It is possible to combine two or more masks simultaneously, separated by semicolon with the larger mask starting it. The replacement occurs during data entry
when amout of characters exceeds the smaller masks size.
Examples:
Field Mask Value entered Value formatted

Telephone number +99 99 9999 - 9999 123456789012 +12 34 5678 - 9012
Software Key (Only AAAA-AAAA-AAAA- QWERTYUIASDFGHJKQWER-TYUI-ASDF-
letters) AAAA GHJK
Software Key (Letters ****-****-****-**** Q1W2E3R4T5Y6U7I8 Q1W2-E3R4-T5Y6-
and Numbers) U7I8
Car Plate AAA - 9999 QWE1234 QWE - 1234
Scriptcase's serial A999A999A999-**** D111H111G111DG2P D111H111G111-
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
Validate with Mask - Shows an error if the end-user don't enter a complete mask.
Complete to the Left - Defines the character used to complete the field selected. Field is filed from left to
complete the size defined on Field Size in Database.
Field size in database - Max length used when updating the table field.This value is automatically read from
your DB Schema information.
Hidden Field - Field is available for processing (Javascript or PHP) but it is not displayed.
Label Field - Only displays the field value. Does not allow updates.
Without field label attribute Using field label attribute
Save HTML tags - This option allows the data to be saved in the database with HTML Tags written in the
field.
Text input in Javascript - This option allows the data to be saved in the database with Javascript code that
was written in the field.
update mode".
HTML Type - HTML object used to display the field on generated form.
Values Format
Image1: Values Format Interface.
Attributes:
Uppercase Converts all text to capital letters.

Lowercase Converts all text to lower case.
Uppercase first Capitalizes only first word (converts only the
word first letter of the first word to capital letter).
Uppercase all Capitalizes each word (converts the first
words letter of every to capital letter).
Minimum Size - Defined the minimum size accepted.

Max length- Defined the maximum size accepted.
Allowed Characters - Select and define the character set accepted:
All - Accepts all characters.
Selected - Define the character set accepted. Using the settings below the field accepts letter,
numbers and " / " (defined in the More attribute). The letters a b c (defined in the Less attribute) are
not accepted.
DATABASE VALUE
It is possible to define a value saved for each table's field. It is frequentlly used when not displaying the field to the
final user.
Image1: Database value interface.
Defined value - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing
parameters.
Auto increment (automatic) - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your
SGDB uses sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed
Auto increment (manual) - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the
field's value automatically before inserting a record.
Insert Date - When upgrading the field will be filled with data from the server.
User IP - The field will get the IP of the machine that is accessing the application.
Database Defined - The field value is assigned by the database . The field is not used in the process of
updating. For example: will be updated through a trigger.
Null - The field in SQL table is filled with (null).
GRID LOOKUP
A resource to display a field description retrieved by SQL instruction. This resource uses AJAX technology (when
exchanging information between server and browser).
See an example in the image below.
Image1: Grid Lookup.

Image2: Grid Lookup Interface.
Attributes:
Use lookup to display field description - When selected enable the Grid lookup.
SQL Statement - SQL statement to retrieve the data in the database. To build the statement it is possible to
use the select wizard . For example, to display the customer name by the customer Id code use the
following SQL statement :
SELECT CompanyName FROM customers WHERE CustomerID = '{CustomerID}'
Font - Font type used to display the lookup.

Font Color - Font Color (in HTML format) used to display the lookup.
Font Size - Font size used to display the lookup.
EOFMessage - Message displayed when no info is retrieved.
To use in Validation - Field automatic validation based in the lookup.
Choose connection - Run SQL statement in different connection.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Image1: General SettingsInterface.
Attributes:
characters.
as Client Name.

Lines - Allows to configure the field height defining the lines quantity.
field.
update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:


not accepted.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Integer
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accept only integer
numbers.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
Values Format
Figure2: Values Format Interface
Digit Grouping Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed. (See regional settings).
Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.
Maximum Size - Define the maximum size of the field.
Minimum Value - Define the field minimum value.
Maximum Value - Define the field maximum value.
Decimal Precision - Define the field decimal precision.
Decimal Separator - Define the character used as the decimal separator.
Negative Sign - Define the character used as negative sign.
Negative number format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value).
Accept - The field can accepts only positive values, only negative values or positive and negative values.
Show a calculator- Displays a calculator.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as decimal, it accepts real numbers.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Digit Grouping Separator, Decimal Separator, Negative Sign and Negative number format are displayed.
(See regional settings).
Digit Grouping - Define if the field will show the grouping separator.*
Number negative format - Define the negative sign position (related to the value).
Accept Negative - The field accepts negative value.
Show a calculator - Displays a calculator.
Complete with zeros - If enabled, it fills decimal digits automatically, otherwise the end-user should always
enter the decimals digits.*
* "Format as you type" must be enabled in "Form>>Settings" menu to use this option.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Currency
General Settings
Image1:General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as value, it accept letters, numbers,
characters.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Currency Symbol Usage - Define if the field will show the currency symbol.*
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Image1:Interface of Values Format.
Attributes:
Regional Settings - Allows you to apply regional settings date format to the field. (See regional settings).
Display - Allows you to select the display format of the field.
Use ComboBox - Allows you to select the date and month by combobox.
Year as Combo - Allows you to select the year by combobox.
"Initial Year" - Define the minimum year selectable.
"Actual Year +" - Define the maximum year selectable.
Minimum date:
Fixed Date - Insert a minimum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the
format as it is presented.
Actual Date - When click on the icon beside of the box, the scriptcase have the following options:
Simple Actual Date - Will define the actual date as the maximum date, that means, it won't accept
anyone in the form who was born after the corrent date.
Actual Date with increment - The minimum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or
years that you increment.
Actual Date with decrement - The minimum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or
years that you decrement.
Maximum Date:
Fixed Date - Insert a maximum date that the scriptcase will criticize in the field of the date type in the
Actual Date with increment - The maximum date will be the actual date (+) the days or month or
Actual Date with decrement - The maximum date will be the actual date (-) the days or month or
Display Format - Allows you to display next to the field how to complete the date field.
Display Calendar -Allow to show beside the field a calendar icon, this allow the selection of the month and
year passing to the field the value that was defined in the calendar.
Years Limit -Defines a limit of years used in the calendar.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Time
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Figure2:Values Format Interface
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. (See Regional settings).
Time Separator - Define the time separator used in the field.

Display - Determine the field display format from a list of predefined formats.
Display Format - Displays the field format beside the field hour.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes:
rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Image1:Values Format Interface.
Attributes:
Regional settings - Apply regional settings time formatting rules to the field. When not selected (NO) the
options Date separator and Time separator are displayed. (See Regional settings).
Date separator - Date separator symbol used.
Time separator - Time separator symbol used.
Display - Select the field format from a list of predefined date/time display formats.
Display Format - Display field the format at the field´s side.
Group Date and Time - Display the Date and Time in the same input field.
Display calendar - Display a calendar a calendar to select the date.
Decimal of Seconds -Defines how many decimal of seconds the field will use.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.

parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Image (database)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in the. Note
that the images are stored in the database as text.
as Client Name.
Image Height - Defines the image display height in pixels.
Progress bar - Display or not a progress bar when uploading files.
Upload Area - Define if a drag'n drop area is used to upload files.
Image Width - Defines the Image display width in pixels.
Maintain Aspect - Maintains the image aspect ratio when resizing it. It´s used in conjunction with Image
Height and Image Width.
Open in Another Window - Displays the original image in another browser window.
Display link only - Displays only a link in the field with the image name. The link will open in a (pop-up)
window with the image in its original size (without redirection).
Extensions to allow - Define which extensions are allowed to upload. Separate several extensions using
semicolon.
update mode".
Multi-Upload
It allows to upload multiple files and store the information in a relative database table.
Multi Upload Settings
Attributes:
Amount of columns - Amount of columns to display in Multiupload.

Position of the delete - Position of the checkbox to delete.
Position on the upload - Positioning of the records upon upload.
Show status - Show the upload status.
Table - Choose the database table to store the files.
After choose the table, it will display all fields from that table and we should associate parameters to fill the fields
upon inserting or updating.
Multi Upload Fields Settings
The options are:

File name - Gets the file name that is being uploaded.
Upload - Gets the bynary of the file.
Auto increment - Used just when the database field is AUTO INCREMENT or similar, if your DBMS uses
sequences to implement auto increment a field to enter the sequence name is displayed .
Manual increment - The generated form will handle the auto-increment feature by calculating the field's
value automatically before inserting a record.
Foreign Key - Allows to associate a field value from the current form.
Defined - You can specify a constant value or use global variables [global_var]. Very useful to passing
parameters..
Date of inclusion - Get the data from the server upon inserting.
Datetime of inclusion - Get the data and time from the server upon inserting.
User IP - The field will be filled with the IP of the computer that is accessing the application.
Calculated by the database - The field value is assigned by the database.
Calculated by the database if empty - The field value is assigned by the database if no value is passed to
it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Image(file Name)
IMAGE (FILE NAME)

Allows the developer to use fields in the forms to upload images. The images are save in the server in a directory
defined using the Application Settings menu in the attribute Image Directory (see Settings).
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image(file name) type, it stores a file
name that is available to the application to process as such. The images are stored separately in the server
and automatically displayed when the file name is referenced.
as Client Name.
Increment File - Increment the file name if it already exist in the folder of uploads.
SubFolder - Defines a sub folder to organize the files stored.
Create Subfolder - Creates the subfolder if it does not exist.
Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept for on the server before being deleted.
Resize function generates temporary image copies that are kept in the cache.
Hide image name - Hides the image name during the upload.
Files Deletion - Allows to delete the file in the directory, relating to the deleted record.
semicolon.
update mode".
Example of field of the image type in a cadastre of products.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:

The options are:

parameters..
it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Document (database)
DOCUMENT(Database)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document, it accept the opening of
the file directly, creating a link for each existent document in the database.
as Client Name.
Icon - Display an icon by the field side identifying the file type.
File Name - Field that contains the document file name.
File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size.
semicolon.
update mode".
Multi-Upload
Attributes:

The options are:

parameters..
it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Document (file name ) type, it stores
a file name that is available to the application to process as such. The documents are stored separately in
the server.
as Client Name.
Subfolder - Enter a subdirectory name to save the files in (it is added under the directory defined in the
Documents Path attribute in the Application Settings menu. See Settings). It is possible to use global or local
variables in the subdirectory name.
semicolon.
update mode".
Files Deletion - Allows to delete the file in the directory, relating to the deleted record.
Multi-Upload
Attributes:

The options are:

parameters..
it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Credit Card Number
The ScriptCase provides credit card numbers validation routines in its applications. Currently ScriptCase
applications supports validation routines to handle AMERICAN EXPRESS, VISA, MASTERCARD and DINER
cards.
General Settings
Figure1: General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is formatted
upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.

parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation routines to
validate according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Attributes:

as Client Name.
update mode".
Values Formats
The picture below show how to related the Credit Card Number field with the Credit Card field.
Attributes:
Card Type - Display a selection box with available card companies (flag).
Use Title/Deny - Allows the user to enter an different option from the options available in the ScriptCase
(American Express, Diners, Master Card and Visa). The label and value for these options are defined in
Negative Value and Title.
Negative value - New option value.
Title - New option label.
Related Field - Define the field that contains the values to validate.
Reload Form - Reload the form After after field value update.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

E-mail
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its
side, clicking on the icon opens the e-mail reader. It validates the field value according to standard e-mail
formats.
as Client Name.

Display Icon - Display an email icon by the field side

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Url
General Settings
Image1: General Settings Interface .
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it is shown a link of access.
as Client Name.

Display Icon - Display an icon by the field side

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Html Color
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown beside of the
field an icon with a pallet of colors.
as Client Name.

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Select
Use select object (combobox) in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information through a
sliding window.
as Client Name.
update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Lookup method

command.
Attributes :
internal value.
statement.
Attributes:
Single Value


)



Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music



internal value.
statement.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Double Select
Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values.
General Configuration
Image1: Interface of General Configuration.
Attributes:
Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection through two
window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ).
as Client Name.
update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Attributes :
; ).
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Checkbox
Use checkbox object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more information through a
box of marking objects.
as Client Name.

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Lookup Methods

command.
Attributes:
; ).
Separated by.
Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

specified position.

Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Separated by.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Radio
Use radio object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information of all shown by it.
as Client Name.

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Lookup Method

table.
Attributes :

selected.
Attributes :

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of items
that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has a
value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must be alpha-numeric. This list is
dynamically loaded with Ajax technology.
Figure1:General SettingsInterface
Data Type - Defines the data type as text auto-complete.

as Client Name.

Validate on submit - Validate fields only when submit.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:


not accepted.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of
items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has
a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value of must be numeric. This list is
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Number Auto-Complete
as Client Name.


update mode".
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Maximum Size - Allow to determine the maximum size of the field.

Minimum Value - Allow to determine the minimum value of the field
Maximum Value - Allow to determine the maximum value of the field
Grouping - Allow to define the decimal separator.
Accepts Negative - Allow the field to accept negative value.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Html Image
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the fields is of the type html image, it allows to insert in
the field an image.
as Client Name.
Imagem - Sets the image to be displayed. The icon "Choose image"; list ScriptCase standard images for
selection. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image located on another
machine.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Label
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is of the type label, it is shown as just an output.
as Client Name.
Text - Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side.
Reload - Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text attribute.
Position - Position the field on the selected block, when reloading the form.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Html Editor
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the field data type. HTML editor type fields accept letters, numbers and special
characters.
as Client Name.
Height - Define the editor box height in pixels.
update mode".
Toolbar
Attributes:
Properties :
Position - Toolbar position in the HTML Editor.
Alignment - Button alignment in the toolbar.
Status - Hides or displays the status bar. Choose the position in which to display the toolbar: Top or
Bottom.
Amount (Toolbar lines) - Number of Toolbar lines in the HTML Editor.
Button layout - Define the toolbar display settings.

Preview - Preview the toolbar display settings defined.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Theme
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Application field type

Reload - Reloads form after updates.
Localization
General Settings
Attributes:

Youtube
General settings
Attributes

Width - Video´s width in pixels.
Height - Video´s height in pixels.
update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Google Maps

window.

update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:

as Client Name.
update mode".
Barcode
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Layout
Overview
In this module we can see how to customize layout of applications and its settings. Allowing us to add
Themes(colors) to the application, organize the application fields in different blocks and pages or define heading
and footer values.
Pages
Blocks
Colors Schema
Header & Footer
Pages
Using the definition of blocks, a page is a container of blocks. Where in each application it is created a page
which has default name “ pag1” . In applications of form, control and filter it is possible to create more pages to
an application. The pages are show in the application in tabs mode, where each tab has the blocks defined in
Organization of Blocks.
Image1: Interface of Configuration of the pages (available only to applications of form, control an filter).
See below an example of a form application using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2).
Image2: Form application using resources of pages.
The form application already bring a standard page, identified by pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of
new pages. The use of pages is very indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of fields of a table
(more than 20 for example). A form with more than 20 fields in the vertical would be difficult to use.
An application can have a lot of pages, and in each of them, you can include a lot of blocks.
Image3: Interface of Configuration of the Pages.
To include a new page, just fill the two text above of the buttons Insert, in the first field fill the page name
and in the second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon, and afterwards click on the
button INSERT.
To delete a page, just click on the delete button presented on the line of the correspondent page.
NOTE: The definition of the pages is only considered by the form in the orientation Unique Register
Configurations relative to the folder tab.
Attributes:
Font Name - Allow to define what font and characters are going to be shown in the field. Click on the
icon that is at the right side of the field it is opened a window to font selection. Just select the font in the
existing list, that it is transferred to the field below of the list and click on the button Confirm. The window
is closed and the option is transferred to the field in the main window.
Font Size - Inform the font size desired.
Color of the selected font - Field to the color definition to the text that will have the selected tab.
Clicking on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette.
Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected
code will be automatically transferred to the field.
Color of the selected background - Allow to define the background color that will have the selected
tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette.
Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected
color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Color of the non selected font - Allow to define the font color that will have the non selected tab. Click
on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color palette. Selecting
the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the selected color will be
automatically transferred to the field.
Color of the non selected background - Allow to define the background color that will have the non
selected tab. Click on the existing icon at the right side of the field, it is opened a window having a color
palette. Selecting the desired color, just click on the update button and the correspondent code to the
selected color will be automatically transferred to the field.
Blocks

Attributes:

Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Layout Settings
Attributes:

Header & Footer
HEADER AND FOOTER

HEADER
alongside it.
FOOTER
Template".
alongside it.
Events
Events
onApplicationInit - This event runs when the application is loading just for the first time.
onNavigate - This event runs when navigating from one record to another one.
onScriptInit - This event runs when the application is loading.
onRefresh - This event runs to reload the page of the application.
onLoadRecord - This event occurs when the page is loaded before printing each record.
onValidate - This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK, Update, Insert, Delete, Filter) depending on
application.
onValidateFailure - This event runs if the validation is failured. With errors.
onValidateSuccess - This event runs if the validation is successfully. Without errors.
onBeforeInsert - This event runs before insert a record.
onAfterInsert - This event runs after insert a record.
onBeforeUpdate - This event runs before updating a record.
onAfterUpdate - This event runs after updating a record.
onBeforeInsertAll - This event runs before inserting any record.
onAfterInsertAll - This event runs after inserting all records.
onBeforeDelete - This event is executed before the deletion.
onAfterDelete - This event runs after the deletion.
onBeforeUpdateAll - This event runs before updating all records.
onAterUpdateAll - This event runs after updating all records.
onBeforeDeleteAll - This event is executed before the removal of all records.
onAfterDeleteAll - This event runs after the elimination of all records.
onLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, ie when navigating from one record to another one,
clicking on the buttons (new, insert, etc. earlier.).

Ajax Events
page.
to another object.
Example:
to the browser.

Buttons
Buttons
New Button
Button types: Javascript, PHP, Link, Ajax.
Image2: New button function.
Deleting a button
option.
Javascript Button
Creating a Javascript Type Button

There are three types of display buttons: Button, Image and Link.
Button Display Mode
Figure 1: Button Settings Interface.
Display mode - Defines the button will be displayed. You can set it as a Link, Button or Image.
Label - Defines the button title displayed in the application.
Hint - Defines a hint message.
Confirmation Message - Any text in this field is presented to the user as a confirmation dialog box. To not
display a message, leave this field blank.
CSS Style - CSS style class name, created in the buttons schema editor.
Target - Destination window where the code will be executed (in the Same Window / in some Other
Window).
Show in Edition (Update) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Edition (update) mode.
Show in Addition (Insert) mode - Determines if the button will be shown in Addition (Insert) mode.
Image Button Display Mode
Window).
Link Button Display Mode
Target - Destination window where the code will be executed. (Same Window / Other Window).

Code
Image2: JavaScript Interface.
Deleting a button
option.
Php Button
Creating a Php Type Button

Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).

Code
Image2: Php Interface.
Deleting a button
option.
Link Button
Creating a Link type button

Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).

option to create new links. Configure the new Link button , and follow the steps below to create the link required
to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link
Image2:Create new Linking.
4 - Define the parameters passed. It can be of three types: Field, Value or Empty.

Empty - No value will be passed.
Link Operation Mode - How the link will be presented.
Open in the same window - Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search and going
to the form.
Open in other window - Open another window to show the form.
Open in a Iframe - Show the form in the same window that below of search an Iframe is created to
display the form.
Output URL of the called application - Web address accessed when the user exits the grid.
Hint of the Link - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Form Properties - Select the buttons that will be shown.
Deleting a button
option.
Ajax Button
To create a new button, click "New button", enter the name and select the button type.
Image1: New functionality of the button
Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).

Code
. Image2: PHP Interface.
Deleting a button
option.
Master/detail Form
Form Detail
MASTER/DETAIL FORM
Allow to create update forms to update tables 1:N in a single window.
Image1:Master / Details orders and orders Items Form.
Veja mais:
How to create a Master Detail

New Detail
In the application menu , clicking in the item New Detail from the folder Master/Detail Form create a new detail
link.
Image1: Creating a new Master/Detail.
Defining name and label

Enter detail link name and label.
Application List
The Wizard lists the project applications available to link. Select the called application from the list by checking
the box.
Note: The detail form required type is Grid, Editable grid or Editable grid view. Only these types are listed by the Wizard.
Parameters settings
In the column Field (image left side) all master form fields are displayed. In the column Key (image right side) is
displayed the detail form fields. Usually the detail form foreign key are associated to the primary key to the master
form.
Overview Form Detail
Link Property
It´s possible to change the Link properties by clicking in the created link.
Attributes:
Form properties - Select the buttons displayed (operations performed) in the detail form.
Iframe properties - Configurein pixels the iframe height and width where to display the detail form.
Other Properties:
Editable Grid - Select if the detail form is editable.
Paging - Select paging mode:
PartialPaging according to number of

records configured.
Total Display all records.
Lines per page - configure the lines number (records displayed) for Partial paging.
When deleting - Choose dependency treatment mode:
Criticize if child Display error message for form

row exists dependencies with the detail record.
Also delete child Exclude all dependent records in detail
row form.
Edit Link - This button update the detail application link.
Many-to-many Relationships
Configure N:N relationship tables.
See more :
Update related table
Updating Many-to-Many Relationship via CheckBox List
Image1: Generated application with associated tables
Identification
This link is treated as a field in the Form application. Define Field name, Data type, Label and specific
Connection for this link. For specific connection is displayed a select with the project available connections.
Image2: Create a relationship field
Grid Information
Define the select (lookup) data source. Enter a select command or base it on a table.
Image3: Enter a select command.
For the option Choose Table 3 objects select are displayed allowing to choose the table and the fields Key and
Description.
Image4: Select command base on a table.
Key - Value stored in the relationship table.

Description - Value displayed in the update field.
SQL Select Statement

Select Command to display the update field values available.
Image5: Select Command.
Lookup Display
Define the update display format.
Image7: Field object type.

Display key and description - Display the key and the description entered in the select command.
Display Title - Display the relationship attribute title. (see relationship attribute).
Separator - Define a delimiter between key and description when the option selected is Display key and
description.
Object - Lookup object type to display in the form. Available types: Select, Double Select, Checkbox and
Radio.
Check and Uncheck all - Enable an option to check or uncheck all values( available only to Checkbox).
Columns - Define number of columns displayed (available only to objects Checkbox and Radio).
Relationship Table
Image8: Relationship table.
Define the relationship table updated.
Image9: Select table.
Relationship Keys
Image10: Link key.
Define the application fields related to the relationship table fields.

Image11: Defining update table field values.
Lookup Field
Image12: Lookup field.
Define the lookup table field related to the relationship table.
Image13: Defining table foreign key.
Link Attributes
Image14: Application view generate with the relationship attribute type Access Type.
Define the values stored in the relationship table fields that are not foreign keys.
Image15: Defining field attribute.
Dados Entry - Store a value entered by the user. Create a field and relate it via the select.
Attribute - Store an application field value.
Search (only for Double Select)
Image16: Double Select Filter.
Define a search to the relationship table.
Image17: Search field settings.
Limit of Records - Maxim quantity of records return by the search.

Initial State - Define the object load state.
Search fields - Define search fields (Key and/or Description) to display.
Display Settings (optional) Define relationship field display settings such as CSS field attributes, title
and object..
Image18: Display Settings.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Search
Settings
Through the chart below we can define all the options that will be part of the Form application Filter.
Image1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes
EmptySearch - Display all records (for empty fields).

Search Criteria - Select the SQL "AND" or"OR" commands to define the search criteria.
Display Condition - Display search condition to user selection.
Using Auto-complete in the Fields -Field turns autocomplete automatically according to the existing values
â€‹â€‹in the database, if the user chooses " Yes", the autocomplete will be enabled automatically for all
fields that possess database relationship. If the option is set as "No" no autocomplete will displayed. If the
selected option is "Defined in the field"t will be respecting the individual configuration of each field.
Dynamic Search
New feature that allows the end user to perform searches in the form application without navigating to another
application, the developer will need to set which fields are available in the search feature.
Image1: Search configuration

interface.
Image2: Field
selection interface.
Quick Search
toolbar.

Search Criteria
button.
Buttons:

Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows do not
Fields
Overview
This session displays to edit just the fields that are in the search. (Fields selected in “GRID->SEARCH-
>FIELDS”.

New Field
1º- When click on a new button it is shown the image below, where we determine the amount of fields that will be
added.
Text
Attributes:
and characters.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Integer
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Currency
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal

Width - Allow to determine the field width.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
Use same Label used on the Grid -This option when enabled, allows you to use the title of the field that is
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Use Combobox - Allow to select the data and the month through the combobox.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Time
Search Label - Sets the field label in the application.

Use same Label used on the Grid - Use the field label s configured in the grid .
Maximum Size - Maximum field size
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
nm_date_hour, if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field
Use Gird Label - This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this
SQL Type
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Internal Format - Format that will be recorded in the database.
Use ComboBox - Use a combox to select the field info
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Select
Allows to use in the form field an object type select (combobox).
General Settings
Attributes:

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup method

command.
Attributes :
internal value.
statement.

Attributes:
Single Value


)



Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music


internal value.
statement.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Double Select
Component that displays two lists of values. In the first list are the values available for selection and the second
are the values actually selected.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two
Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes :
; ).
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Checkbox
Allows you to use in the form field an object of type checkbox.
General Settings
Attributes:
object.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup Methods

command.

Attributes:
; ).
Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

specified position.

Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Separated by.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Radio
Allows you to use in the form field an object of type radio.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are shown by it.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup Method

table.
Attributes :

selected.
Attributes :


AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Grid Fields
Attributes:
Data type - It defines the field data type on the search.

Search Label - The field label used on the search.
Use same Label used on the Grid - Allows to use the same field label used on the grid.
Height - Define the field height
SQL Type- SQL Field Type in the database.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Sorting
Attributes:
Data Type - "Sorting Fields" is a new feature that enables to be selected the order fields (ORDER BY
clause) that are part of the body of the Grid.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
This data type is one of the great news of the ScriptCase5, using the technology Ajax, it provides the fulfillment of
a field with more agility.
Attributes:
Search Label- Allow to define the field title in the search.

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Attributes:
nm_number,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Number. That is, the label is a field
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Application
Settings
Define applications attributes.
Image1: Application Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Description - This field can be used to describe of the application objectives.
Application Images - Specific images used by this application.
Localization - Generated application language used, all the hints and messages are converted to the
chosen language.
Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application.
Share theme variable - Use the session theme variable in this application.
Edit Project - Allow all project users to edit this application.
Timeout - Timeout time in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP.
Timeout Message - Timeout for Ajax update message.
Update and removes lines... - Records can be selected in the checkbox to be updated or removed.
HelpCase Link - Associate a HelpCase manual to your application.
Maximum File Size - Max upload file size for this application.
Message Title - Text used in title line as label.
Use Enter to Tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Image2: ErrorSettingsInterface.
Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application. Values: right, left, top and bottom.
Show error title in the application - Allow to show the title line of the error message.
Show error title in the field - Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field. The standard
value is deactivate.
Error title - Title of the error message in the application.
Error Script - Show information of the script and line where the error occurs.
Error SQL - Show the SQL command that originated the error.
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Commands in the moment of its use.
Ajax error output - Open a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode.
Timeout Error - Time to display the validation error message.
Navigation
Attributes:
the application for any reason is not avaliable, this global is most commonly used to filter the form in the SQL
menu.
Return After inserting - Define the application return mode: return to edit a record after insert it or open the
new record mode after insertion.
Exit Application - Exit application after the form processing.
Messages
This interface is used to configure the messages of the application.
Image 1: Validation messages.
Attributes:
No records message - Messsage displayed when there is no records to show.

Primary key violation - Message displayed when there is an error with the primary key.
Unique key violation - Message displayed when validating an unique key.
Interface used to configure the messages upon insert a record.
Image 2: Insertion messages interface.
Attributes:
Message after insert - Message displayed after the insertion of a record.

Message to confirm insert - Confirmation message displayed before the insertion of a record.
Interface used to configure the messages upon Update a record.
Image 3: Update messages interface.
Attributes:
Message after Update - Message displayed after the Update of a record.

Message to confirm Update - Confirmation message displayed before the Update of a record.
Interface used to configure the messages upon Delete a record.

Image 4: Exclusion messages interface.
Attributes:
Message after Delete - Message displayed after the Delete of a record.

Message to confirm Delete - Confirmation message displayed before the Delete of a record.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.


Synchronize Table
This process will realize a comparison between the definitions of the application fields and the table fields that has
origin in the database. In case that in origin table occurs any update, as for example the inclusion of a new field,
or exclusion, or still a change in the data type, this update will show it visible as seen in the image below:
Image1: Synchronize table function interface.
After accessing the function from the link “Synchronize table” is show a comparison table between the
application fields (left table) and the table fields of the database (right table), above Image, the marked fields in
“red” will be deleted of the application, the marked fields in “Green” will be inserted in the form, and the marked
fields in “orange” will be updated, so they suffer type update in the database.
Note: When a table field in the database is renamed, the effect of the table synchronization, comparatively, will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in the
application plus the inclusion of a new field.
Link
We use to link the form application which we are defining with other applications, we can link our form with
application of the types: Search, Form, Control, Menu and Tab.
There are three types of links available:
Application - Used to link our form to any other type of application. This linking type is associated to events
of Inclusion and/or alteration, when occurs one of those events the navigation will be effected to the
application that we are calling.
Field - Used to link our form through a link to any other type of application. For effecting this linking we
have to create a special field of the type Formula Label and associate to it the linking.
Capture - Will be created an icon beside the field inside the form, when being selected it opens other
window showing a search application. In this application that will be opened can do searches and return a
value to text field.
In the windows below, the user will be able to edit an existent linking or to do a creation of a new
application.
Image1: Menu of Links.
Creating Links
In the screen below the user will must specify which the linking type to be effected, “Application”, “”Field” or
“Capture”.
Image2: Interface of Linking between applications.
Used to link our form to each other type of the application. This linking type is associated to events of Inclusion
and/or Alteration, when occurs one of this events the navigation will be effected to the application that we are
calling.
The window below “Application List” show the form applications, the user will must choose the application which
will must be linked and clink on Continue >>.
Image3: Interface Linking between application.
In the window below “Definition of Parameters”, at the left side, is shown the application fields which we are
linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and, at the right side, will must be selected the option for
passing value, there are three options, they are:
Field - When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content.
Value - In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed.
Empty - Choosing this option it will be passed no value to the field.
Image4: Interface of Definition of the Parameters.
In the window below “Linking Properties” will must be filled the relative attributes to the linking.
Image5: Interface of Linking Properties.
Attributes:
Redirecting after insert - With this option activated, when occurring the inclusion will be done the navigation
for the application that we are linking.
Redirecting after Update - With this option activated, when occurring the alteration will be done the
navigation for the application that we are linking.
Form property - Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar of the filter.
Will be created an icon beside the field in the filter form, when being selected it opens another window showing a
search application. In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value to the text field.
The window below “Linking Type” show that when it is selected the linking “Capture Type”, appears a
combobox with the fields of the origin application to be selected the field that will be used for the link.
Image6: Interface Parameter Definition.
The window below “Application List” show the search applications, the user will must choose the application
which will must be linked and click on Continue >>.
Image7:Application Link Interface
In the window below “Definition of Parameters”, at the left side, is shown the application fields which we are
linking and that need to receive parameters to execution and, at the right side, will must be selected the option for
passing value, there are three options, they are:
Field - When choosing this option have to inform the field to be used for passing content.
Value - In case of selecting this option in the text field inform fixed content to be passed.
Empty - Choosing this option it wil be passed no value to the field.
Recovering the field value - It should be selected the field of the search application to the linking object, so its
content return for the field the filter form.
Image8: Interface Parameter Definition.
Concluding the linking, the user will be able to update and remove the linking done, as its necessary.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Tabs Applications
Overview
Tabs applications
This application type allows to organize multiple applications display in one single screen in a tab structure.
Usually applications related to a common topic are grouped into a tab application for example: Employees /
Projects.
Image1: TABS application.

Tabs
Tab Settings
Image1: Tab Settings Interface.
This property, Tab Settings, allows to define the following attributes:
Title - Application title that will be shown in the toolbar.

Organization - Allow that the application run in the folders through an iframe or normal.
Type - How the folders organization will be presented, it can be:
Folder above - Display the folders above the application.
Folder below - Display the folders below the application, next to the footer.
Folder in the left - Align the folders in the left, like a vertical menu.
Folder in the right - Align the folders in the right.
Menu above - Have the same principle of 'Folder above', but its visual schema has the menu style.
Menu below - Have the same principle of 'Folder below', but its visual schema has the menu style.
Menu in the left - Have the same principle of 'Folder in the left', but its visual schema has the menu
style.
Menu in the right - Have the same principle of 'Folder in the right', but its visual schema has the menu
style.
Side by Side - Show all applications in folders order, one next other.
Table size - Size of the main table.

Measurement Unit - The unit used by table size. Can be: Pixel or percentage.
Tab Alignment - Define the tab position. Can be: center, left or right.
Application Alignment - Define the application position, Can be: center, left, or right.
Exit - Define how the app will be presented, can be:
Button on the bottom of the page.
Folder.
Button in the toolbar
Exit Icon - You can define the icon of the exit button on the toolbar. Use the image selection resource to
visualize and select in easy way the desired image.
Folder Settings
This function serve to link each folder with a pre-existent application.
Image1: Folder Settings Interface.
Add a folder - To create a tab, click in 'Add' and fill these fields:
Label - Application name that will be shown in the tab or menu (examples: Personal Data, Finance Data,
etc.);
Image - Choose an image that will be used on this tab;
Update - Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then update the desired data.
Finally, click on the 'update' button.
Delete - Double click on the folder name (left column / list of folders) and then delete the item.
Clean - Clean all data of selected item.
Application Settings
Here we define the application for each tab. See the picture:
Initially the user must click on the tab that want to update. You have the following options:
Add - When you click in 'Add', a screen with app list will show up to choose the application. (Picture 2).
Edit - Select the application and then, click on edit button. The following steps are selection of the application
and the definition of the iframe size (Picture 3), requested in the add application process.
Remove - Select the application that you want to delete and click on remove.
How to Add and Edit Applications
Selecting the application and click on 'Next', as the screen below:
Image2: Application Link Interface.
On the next screen you define a few parameters of the link:

Iframe width - Width size of the iframe. If you put in 100% the application will be adjusted more easily.
Iframe height - Height size of the iframe. If this size is small than your app, a scrollbar will appear
automatically.
Reload Iframe - When this option is enabled makes the application of the tab, to be reloaded each time you
change the tab.
Parameters / Value - For each parameter of the application that we choose, you have options to be chosen,
they are:
Variable - Name of the global variable to get the content.
Value - Static content to be loaded for the parameter in the execution time.
Empty - Leave empty or do not change if it has some value.
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Pdf Settings
In this window, the user will define the configuration of the PDF, available in tab application, as following:
You have the following attributes:
Create PDF - Define if the app will have the output in PDF format.
PDF Orientation - Define how will be the orientation sense of the generated reports in PDF, can be: picture
or landscape.
PDF Format - Format of the pages generated in PDF, as: Letter, A4, A5, etc.
Open PDF Directly - Indicate if the application will allow to generate the PDF directly by the button or if will
be through a link to the PDF.
Allow to print - This option allow that the user print the PDF.
Allow to modify - This option allow that the user modify the PDF.
Layout
Settings
Attributes:

Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Log
Options:

Application
Settings
Here we have the general application settings:
Application Code - Application name and code for ScriptCase internal use.
Connection - ScriptCase connection used by this application.
Default Profile - Default connection profile to be used on production environment.
chosen language.
Exit URL - URL address to be when the user click in exit button.
Folder - Folder where the application will be placed in scriptcase work area.
Description - Name descriptive of the application.
HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a page of project documentation.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.

Dashboard Applications
Overview
Dashboard Application
Allows you to display various types of applications nested on Widgets similar to those for iGoogle. They are
usually incorporated into reports and / or Charts that display information from the database, also can be displayed
information external URL's.
Image1: Dashboards Display.

Dashboard
Settings
Image1: Dashboard Settings Interface.
This property Dashboard Settings allows to set the following attributes:
Column
Width -Column width where will be the Widget.
Add Column - Adds a Widget to the selected column.
Remove Column - Removes the selected column and all the Widgets
that are associated with the column.
Widget
Title - Title that will appear in the Widget.
Link - Application or URL to be loaded into the Widget selected.
Height - Height of the Widget in pixels.
Reload time - Charging time of application or URL selected in the
Widget, it must be defined in seconds.
Mobile - Allows to change the Widget column at run time.
Removable - Allows to be remove the Widget at runtime.
Collapsible - Allows to expand the Widget at run time.
Maximize - Allows to maximize the Widget at run time.
At the page bottom we can see two more options:
Add Column - Adds a column to the Dashboard application.

Save - Saves the Columns and Widgets information.
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Layout
Settings
Attributes:

Header & Footer
HEADER AND FOOTER

HEADER
alongside it.
FOOTER
Template".
alongside it.
Log
Options:

Application
Settings
Image1: Settings Interface.
In this folder you define the application attributes , such as:
Application Code - Application code for ScriptCase internal use. Should begin by letter.
screen, on the "Friendly URL" column at the applications list.
Connection - Connection name used by ScriptCase to access the tables. User can select it.
Locales - Application language.
Session Locales - Provides a variable locales in session.
Folder - A folder containing the application.
Editing by Project - If you have Not checked the application can only be edited by the owner.
Description - Application descriptive name.
HelpCase Link - Help Page.
Control Applications
Overview
Control Application
This application type is structured differently from form applications. It is not based on a database table, allowing
the form creation using fields added manually and source validation. Common examples of this application type
are the forms for login and batch processing.
Figure1: Control Interface
Functionality Description
Hidden Fields Hide fields in forms display while keep the field
value from form to submit.
Read-Only Fields are displayed but edit are not allowed.
Fields
Fields Fields with obligatory entry. Values must be
Required entered.
Fields Format According the field type required validation are
generated, different formats area are available.
Events Allow the developer to add business rules in PHP
Programming code. The form events are triggered during the
processing in the server or by the browser
(AJAX).
Links creation Link a form with other applications..

Control
Settings
In this window are congregated diverse configurations linked to the exhibition format and the way of update.
Figure 1: Settings Interface.
See below the attributes description:
Attributes:
Keep Values - Allow to keep the values of the last access to the form, thus having this value in the next
access.
Line Breaks in Title - It allows to break the line of the Titles
Horizontal Alignment - Allow to define the horizontal alignment of the application. The options are: center,
left and right.
Margins - Allow to define the application margins (Above, below, right and left).
Table Width - Allow to define the table width of the application.
Table width unit - When defining the property “Table width” can determinate the width unit, they are:
Percentage, Pixels and Automatic.
Layout and Behavior

Automatic tab - Advance the focus to the next field after completing the maximum number of characters
allowed in the field.
Highlight Text upon focus - Highlight field contents when the field receives focus.
Use Enter to tab - Use the "Enter" key to tab from one field to the next field.
Field with initial focus - Field that receives focus when the application is loaded. Initial focus doesn't work
with fields containing watermark
Focus on field with error - Focus on the first field with an error when submiting the form. If any validation
errors occur, the focus will advance to the first field with an error.
Edit Fields
New interface included in the V6. It allows the user to arrange and edit the fields
Image 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the name of the field.

2 - Label - Column to edit the field label displayed in the end application.
3 - Datatype - It allows to change the field type.
4 - Read-Only - Define if the field is just read-only.
5 - Required - Define if the field is required or not.
Note: Observe that all lines are draggable. There you can define the position of fields, blocks and pages. Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in
Pages.
Display
Options:
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Toolbar
Define toolbar attributes and options such as validation, formatting and help settings.
Figure 1: Toolbar Interface
The application toolbar is divided in two parts:Top and bottom. It is possible to select the buttons
Attributes:
Navigation - Buttons used to navigate on the application or exit from control application.
Other - Other buttons type: Theme, Webhelp, PHP, Javascript or link button.
Ordinance of the buttons - This option lets you define what will be the display order of buttons used in the
application.
sEttings buttons
Figure 3: Toolbar Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Button - Show all buttons selected in application.

Label - Set a label for button.
Hint - Set a message that will show when the mouse is on the button.
Access Keys - Allows you to set hotkeys keyboard to a button.
OPTIONS
Figure 4: Toolbar Options Interface.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Allow to define if there is automatic fields formatting on the form.

Help by Block - Indicates if the helps of the relative fields, will be grouped per block. In each field we can
define a text of help to it, with this option activated appear an icon in the title bar of the block to the calling of
the help page .
General Help - General help “consolidates” all fields help in a unique page, placing an icon in the toolbar to
calling the help page.
Sql
In this group is defined the attributes relative to the connection to the database.
Figura1: SQL Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Connection - Show the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this
connection can be changed with another that have the same tables (SQL).
Case Sensitive - This option should be set to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it
is should not respect this setting.
Javascript
Attributes:
form “form”.
Choose event - In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we will write

Edit Javascript
reload on the form.
the selected value.
}
}
OnBlur Example:

{
}
onChange examples:
{
}
{
}
{
}
onMouseOut example:
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
CAPTCHA
Read more:

application.
Log
Options:

Authentications
Overview
Authentication
Image1: Authentication Option.
Scriptcase can us to link our applications using OAuth methods. These methos will allow us to integrate our
project with these data sources:
Facebook
Twitter
Google+
PayPal
Facebook
Image1: Facebook authentication Fields.
When creating a Facebook Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
App ID - Facebook Application ID. This Id will be given by the Facebook Developer's page.
Secret - Facebook service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.
Method return - Method to be ran when Facebook service return the data requested.
Image2: Facebook developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create Facebook application and receive your key and secret for your website, you must follow these steps:
1. Login to your Facebook account

2. Go to https://developers.facebook.com/apps and register your account
3. Click on + Create New App
4. Enter your APP Display Name, App Name Space and click on continue.
Image3: App Name and Namespace
Enter your SC application details and save changes. On the top of the page you can find your APP ID and
APP Secret for your SC application only.
Image4: Website details
You can use this APP ID and App Secret to connect this SC application to Facebook.
Twitter
Image1: Twitter authentication Fields.
When creating a Twitter Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
Key - Twitter Application ID. This Id will be given by the Twitter Developer's page.
Secret - Twitter service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.
Method return - Method to be ran when Twitter service return the data requested.
Image2: Twitter developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create a Twitter application and receive your key and secret for your website, you must follow these steps:
1. Go to https://dev.twitter.com/ and register your account
2. On the "My Applications" page click on Create New Application

3. Enter your Application details as asked and proceed with the application creation.
Image3: Application details.
On the top of the page you can find your Consumer ID and Consumer Secret at the OAuth tool tab for
your SC application only.
Image4: OAuth keys
You can use this Consumer ID and Consumer Secret to connect this SC application to Twitter.
Google+
Image1: Google+ authentication Fields.
When creating a Google+ Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
Application Name - Google+ Application Name.

Client ID - Google+ Application ID. This Id will be given by the Google+ Developer's page.
Secret - Google+ service will give you a secret key to enable your application to run on a website.
Method return - Method to be ran when Google+ service return the data requested.
Image2: Google+ developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create a Google+ application and receive your key and secret for your website, you must follow these steps:
1. Go to https://code.google.com/apis/console/ and register your account

2. On the "API Access" page click on "Create an OAuth2.0 client ID"
3. Enter your Application details as asked and click "Next".
3.
Image3: Application details.
4. Enter the Client ID as requested in the page and click "Create Client ID".
Image4: Client ID Details
5. On the next Page, you will find the data required by Scriptcase.
Image5: OAuth Keys
You can use this Client ID and Secret to connect an SC application to Google+.
Paypal
Image1: PayPal authentication Fields.
When creating a PayPal Authentication Button, you need to fill these fields:
PayPal URL - This url may be to the PayPal SandBox or the PayPal API itself. The SandBox is the place for
tests before the application runs in a real environment.
Id - The PayPal ID to receive the payment.
Order number - This order number must .
Customized field - URL to where PayPal must redirect the user with the data retrieved.
Variable with the description - Here will be.
Variable with the Total amount - Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.
Paypal Method - Method to be ran when PayPal service return the data requested.
Method Cancel - Method to be ran when the user cancel the purchase.
Method IPN - Method to be ran when PayPal service confirm the payment. This method is comonly used to
modify the database and register the purchase as complete.
Image2: PayPal developpers page. (01/29/2013)
To create a PayPal payment method you must fill the fields correctly. In order to test your application, you must
use the PayPal SandBox and create a fake PayPal account:
1. Go to https://developer.paypal.com/ and register your account

2. Click on "create a preconfigured account".
3. Enter the test account details as asked and save the changes.
Image3: Test account details.
4. On the Test Accounts page, activate your newly created account.

4.
Image4: Info about the test account
The variables returned by the request can be find below:
[mc_gross]
[invoice]
[protection_eligibility]
[address_status]
[payer_id]
[tax] =>
[address_street]
[payment_date]
[payment_status]
[charset]
[address_zip]
[first_name]
[mc_fee]
[address_country_code]
[address_name]
[notify_version]
[custom]
[payer_status]
[business]
[address_country]
[address_city]
[quantity]
[verify_sign]
[payer_email]
[txn_id]
[payment_type]
[last_name]
[address_state]
[receiver_email]
[payment_fee]
[receiver_id]
[txn_type]
[item_name]
[mc_currency]
[item_number]
[residence_country]
[test_ipn]
[handling_amount]
[transaction_subject]
[payment_gross]
[shipping]
[ipn_track_id]
Fields
Overview
This interface allows informing the rules of validation and formatting of the content of each field of the control. The
configuration of the fields is made giving a click in the field to be formatted, in the existing list, the left part of the
folder “Form”.
Made this, the system opens a screen to the right of this list, where it must be verified if in the field Type of the
Data the value attributed for the ScriptCase through the analysis of table SQL is in accordance with the existing
content. In case that he isn’t, the user will have selecting in the list (combobox) a type adjusted for the content of
its field. For each Type of selected Data a screen with different characteristics will be formatted. Example: Fields
of the type Text possess different characteristics of a field of the type Date. Thus being, the formatting of the
screen will be in accordance with the chosen type.
Text
General Settings
characters.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:


not accepted.
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS

Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Attributes
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as multiple lines text, it accepts letters,
numbers, characters. Upon selecting the data type as multiple lines text the attribute Lines is enabled to
definethe number of lines is selected.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:


not accepted.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Integer
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accepts only integer
numbers.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal
General Settings
Figure1: .General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Currency
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as currency, it accepts only decimal
values.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
General Settings
Attributes
Data type - Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
Minimum date:
Maximum Date:
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Time
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific Time rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes :
Data type - Define the application field type. Date and Time fields are formatted according to specific Data
and Time rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Image(file Name)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image(file name) type, it stores a file
as Client Name.
semicolon.
update mode".
Multi-Upload
Attributes:

The options are:

parameters..
it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

General Settings
Attributes:
the server.
as Client Name.
semicolon.
update mode".
Multi-Upload
Attributes:

The options are:

parameters..
it.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Credit Card Number
cards.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is
formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and used by the validation routines to
validate according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Image1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes :

as Client Name.
update mode".
Values Formats
Attributes:
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

E-mail
General Settings
Attributes:
>Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its
formats.
Label - Field title in application.
Initial Value - Populates the field with a pre-defined value when the end-user clicks on the "new" button.
Select from the options below:
Defined Value - Uses the value entered for the Initial Value attribute. It is possible to receive parameters
by using this function. Example: By entering [var_logged_user] it is possible to use a session variable
created at a login screen.
System Date - Uses the server date. Note: When you use the System Date option, you do not need to
enter an Initial value.
Initial Value - The value displayed for the field when using the Defined Value option.

Field without label attribute. Field with label attribute.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Url
General Settings
Figure1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes
Data type- Define the application field type. URLfields display links.
as Client Name.


update mode".
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Html Color
General Settings
Figure1:General Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color an icon is displayed by
its side with a colors palette.
as Client Name.
as Client Name.

update mode".
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Select
Use a select (combobox)) object in form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The field type Select is a drop-down object that allows the selection of information using a
list box.
as Client Name.
update mode".
Edition Lookup
Lookup method

command.
Attributes :
internal value.
statement.

Attributes:
Single Value


)



Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music


internal value.
statement.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Double Select
Component that displays two value lists. A list with values available to select and another with the selected
values.
Figure1: Double Select object .Available values/ Selected values.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type- The field type Double Select is a drop-down object that allows the selection of multiple
information using two list boxes and a navigator ( << < > >> ).
as Client Name.
update mode".
Edition Lookup
Attributes :
; ).
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Check Box
Use a checkbox object in form field.
General Settings
Atributos:
Data type - The field type checkbox is an object that allows the single or multiple information using an
objects selection box.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Edition Lookup
Lookup Methods

command.
Attributes:
; ).
Separated by.
Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

specified position.

Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Separated by.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Radio
Use a radio object in form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type- The field type Radio is an object that allows the selection of a single information from all
information displayed.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Edition Lookup
Lookup Method

table.
Attributes :
selected.
Attributes :

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Html Image
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Image it displays an image.
Imagem - Sets the image to be displayed. The icon "Choose image"; list ScriptCase standard images for
selection. The icon "Upload an image" allows the developer to send the server an image located on another
machine.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Label
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. Label fields are display only fields.

Text - Text box to enter a text displayed by the field side.
Reload - Reload the form when clicking in the link created with the text entered in the Text attribute.
Position - Position the field on the selected block, when reloading the form.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value of must be alpha-numeric. This list is
dynamically loaded with Ajax technology
General Settings

as Client Name.


update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:


not accepted.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value of must be numeric. This list is
dynamically loaded with Ajax technology
General Settings
Attributes:
as Client Name.


update mode".
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Menu Links
Create a menu structure in the form.
Proprieties:

Values Format
Proprieties:
Menu Item - Insert , Update and Remove menu items control.

Label - Define menu item label.
Link - Define an application or extern link called when a menu item is selected.
Icon - Define the icon displayed at the item link side for the display Link mode.
Default - Define it the menu item is selected by default in the display modes (Select and Radio).
Insert - Insert new menu item
Update -Update menu item.
Remove - Remove menu item.
Clear- Clear a menu item data
Clear all - Remove all menu items data.
Display Mode - Menu Links generation format : Select , Radio or Link:
Example using Select mode :
Example using Radio mode :
Example using Link mode :
Hide Label - Do not display the link labels. This option is available to the Display Link mode.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Profile
Display the production environment connections available in a Select object at run time.
To use this option do not enter the connection name at deployment time. See deployment.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Editor Html
Attributes:
characters.
as Client Name.
update mode".
Toolbar
Attributes:
Properties :
Bottom.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Locales
Add an select object to the application. The object allows to select a language for the project application.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Layout
Layout
Blocks
Settings
Header & Footer
Blocks

Attributes:

Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Colors Schema
Layout Settings
Attributes:

Header & Footer
HEADER AND FOOTER

HEADER
alongside it.
FOOTER
Template".
alongside it.
Events
Events
Image 1: Event Button access of Control application.

onApplicationInit - Occurs once when the application is loaded (first time).
onScriptInit -Occurs when the application is loaded
onRefresh -This event is executed during the application page reload.
onValidateSucess -Occurs when validation is successful. .
onValidateFailure -Occurs when a validation failure is found.
onValidate - This event is executed by clicking on validation buttons (ok, update, insert, delete, search)
depending on the used application. In case of form the buttons are: update, insert and delete.
onLoad - This event occurs when the browser loads the window.

Control - Ajax Events
AJAX EVENTS
page.
to another object.
Example:
to the browser.

Buttons
Buttons
New Button
Types button: (Javascript, PHP, Linking).
Deleting a button
option.
Javascript Button
Control - Creating a Javascript Type Button

Code

Php Button
Control - Creating a Php Type Button

Code
Image2: PHP Interface.

Link Button
Control - Creating a Linking type button

The linking button requires a link associated to it. In the application menu (on the left side of the window) there is
an option to create new links configure the new Linking button, and follow the steps below to create the link
required to complete the operation.
Creating a new Link


Link Operation Mode - How will be presented the link.
Open in the same window - Show the form in the same browser window, exiting the search and going
to the form.
Open in other window - Open another window to show the form.
Open in a Iframe - Show the form in the same in the same window that the search, below of search an
Iframe is created to display the form.
Output URL of the called application - web address accessed when the user exit the grid.
Linking Link Hint- Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.

Ajax Button
To create a new button, then click "New button", enter the name and select the button type.
Image 2: Edit the button function
Application
Settings
Define common ScriptCase application attributes.
See below the attributes description:

Attributes:
Application Code - Application Code assigned during application creation.
Description - Used to describe application goals.

Images Directory - The base directory where the application images are stored.
Documents Path - . The absolute path where the application documents are stored.
ApplicationImages - Specific images used by this application. This option deploys the images called in
event with the application.
Example: echo "<img src='image_button.jpg' width='30' height='30' />" ;
Choose an image uploaded to ScriptCase before. Remove the image in application.
Localization - Generated application language (all the hints and messages) and locales (specific data types
format)

Edit Project - Allow other users of the group to edit the application.
Timeout - Execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP
Timeout Message- Show a message after timeout limit.
HelpCase Link - Associate a Help Manual to your application.
Maximum file size - Set the upload maximum file size for image or document field.
Message title- Message box displayed title
Error Settings
Define ScriptCase applications error settings. See below the attributes description:
Image 3: Error Settings Interface
Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application
Error position on the field - DError position when criticizing a field.
Show the Error Title in the Application - Show the title line of the error message in the application.
Show the Error Title in the Field - Show the title line of the error messagem in the field.
Error Title - Title message of the error.
Script Error - Display script line and info where the error occurred.
SQLError - Display SQL command that originated the error.
DebugMode - Run application in debug mode displaying SQL commands
Ajax Error output - Display Ajax events SQL and PHP output in a window.
Navigation
Attributes:
SQL menu.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.


Links
Links
Links the control application that we are defining with other applications of the following types: Grid, Form,
Control, Menu and Tab.
There are 4 links types available:
Application - It is used to link the control to another application type. This type of link call the other
application during onsubmit event of calling application.
Field - Used to connect the control via a to any other type of application. To make this connection we
should create a special field type Label and associate the same connection.
Capture - Creates an icon next to the field inside the control application, when selected it opens another
window displaying a grid application. In the open application the user can start a search and return a value to
a text box.
Button - Used to connect the form to another application by clicking on the button previously created (link
type Button ).
The user can edit an existing link or create a new one using the "New LInk" option.
Figura Link between applications interface - Links created.
Link Type - Application

Linking Type - Capture
Link Type - Field
Link Type - Buttons

Application
Used to link the Form to any other applications type. This link type is associated to submit events. When an event
occurs then the application is redirected to the called application.
The “Applications List ” displayall applications. The user can choose the application that will be linked and click
in Next >>
Figure4: Link between applications Interface
“Parameter definition”, at left side, display the global variablename or field name which we are linking and that
needs to receive parameters. Select the option to inform the value, there are three options:
Field - Inform the field to be use its value.

Fixed - inform a fixed value.
Empty - No value is passed to the field.
Link to an Application:
Figure5: Parameters Definition with global Variable Interface
“ Link Properties” define the link attributes

Link to Grid Application: Link to Form Application:
Figure8: Link to Grid Application Properties Figure9: Link to Form Application Properties
Attributes:
Link Propreties - Select the target where application will open.

Form Properties - Allow to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar.
Grid Property - Define the grid settings
"Linking" display the link created with action buttons.
Figure10: Link between applications Interface

Button
A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form, when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or
form application.
Using the opened application to search for information, add, edit or delete a record.
Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application.
Select the link button to enable.
Figure 31: Link Type Interface
Below, “List of Applications”displays all applications, the user must seelect the application to be linked and click
in Next >>
Figure 32: Interface of linking between applications.
In “ Parameter definition”, at left side, it is displayed the global variablename or field name which we are linking
and that need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected the option to inform
the value, there are two options, and they are:
Fixed - In this case, in the text field, you must inform a fixed value.
Empty - Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the field.
Figure 33: Parameters Definition Interface with global Variable.

Figura 35: Parameters Definition Interface
In “ Linking Properties” enter the link relative attributes.
Figure 36: Link Properties to Grid Application. Figure 37: Link Properties to Form and Control
Application.
Attributes:
Link Operation Mode- Allows choose the target where application will open.
Exit URL for the Target Application -
Hint of The link - Enter a text to display when the mouse is over the button.
Form Properties - Allows to select the buttons displayed in the toolbar.
Grid Property - Allows configure the grid settings.
Below "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Figure 38: Link Interface

Capture
A button is created in the toolbar inside the control form, when clicked it opens the window displaying a grid or
form application.
In this application that will be opened we can do searches and return a value for the text field.
Figure 30: Capture Link in Control Application.
The screen below “Linking Type” shows that, when it is selected the linking type “Capture”, it appears a
combobox with the fields of the origin application, to be selected the field that will be used for the Link.
Figure12: Interface of Definition of the Parameters.
Below, “List of Applications”displays all applications, the user must select the application to be linked and click in
Next >>
Figure13: Interface of Linking between applications

In “ Parameter definition”, at left side, it is displayed the the application fields which we are linking and that
need to receive parameters for running and at the right side, will have to be selected the option to inform the
value, there are two options, and they are:
Figure15: Parameters Definition Interface with parameters.
Fixed - In this case, in the text field, you must inform a fixed Value.
Empty - Choosing this option will not be passed any value to the global variable.
In “ Linking Properties” enter the link relative attributes.
Figure16 : Link Properties Interface
Modal - Displays the called application with dark background.

Figure17 : Example of capture link using modal target.
Below, "Linking" displays the link created with button to edit the actions.
Figure18: Linking Interface
Figure19: Linking Interface
Recover the field value - Selected a field of the grid application called linking object and it returns a value to a
field of the control form.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Blank Applications
Overview
This type of application allows the developer to write PHP / HTML code and display a process result. A good
example of its use is called the batch process, the advantage of using this application instead of creating a .php
program manually outside the ScriptCase is the possibility of using ScriptCase macros well as native integration
with control access to their systems.
Blank
Onexecute
In this menu is entered the PHP code that will run by the application.
Image1: OnExecute.
Attributes:
OnExecute - Allows to entry PHP commands, ScriptCase macros and to use code libraries.
Any event can use pre-defined functions available in Scriptcase. These functions are called "Scriptcase Macros".
See more about Scriptcase Macros.

Sql
In blank applications you can use one connection to access the database by default but as in other application
types (forms, inquiries and control ) you can run SQL commands using other connections than the native
application connection.
Image1: SQL Settings.
Attributes:
Connection - Allows you to choose one of your project databases connections.

Security
The blank applications can have their access password-protected or use your project security settings, see below
the two options highlighted.
Image1: Security Options.
Use security - Disable access to this application and only allow access to authorized users, read more.
Use Password - Set a password for this particular application.

Log
Options:

Applications
Settings
In this folder are common attributes to applications created by ScriptCase, bellow is described these attributes.
Image1: Settings Interface
Atributos:
Application Code - Application code given when creating the application, this code can be renamed via the
main menu.
Description - This field can be used to enter a brief application description.
Application Images - To use images within the application in implementations of Business Rules,
eliminating the use of macro sc_image.
Locales - Application generated language , all the hints and messages will be placed in the chosen
language.
Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the workgroup.
Editing by Project - .Allow other project users to edit the application.
Error Settings
Image2: Error Settings Interface
Atributos:
Debug Mode - Run the application in debug mode, displaying the SQL commands as they are executed.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.

Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Menu Applications
Overview
Menu application
Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications, it is also possible to create
external links on the menu items. The menu structure can be modified at run time. Depending on the user profile
you are able to apply security settings and customize the layout.
Image1:Horizontal menu.
Image2: Vertical Menu Interface.

Menu
Settings
Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as following:
Image1: Menu Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Orientation - Orientation of the menu in the screen : horizontal line or vertical.
Horizontal
Vertical
Note: If the vertical orientation is used, it is necessary to adjust the menu width.
Horizontal Alignment Of the Menu - Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or right.
Vertical Alignment of the items - Align menu items vertically as: top, center or bottom.
Horizontal alignment of the items - Align menu items horizontally as: left or right.
Friendly URL - This field allows you to change the URL that will be called by the application, allowed
Menu Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Menu Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Iframe Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are opened.
Iframe Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications are opened.
Hide menu items - Select the option to hide an item, instead of disabling it, when using security schemes or
access control.
Hide the menu toolbar - Remove the toolbar items instead of disabling them, if the security option is
enabled in the applications.
Open items with OnClick - Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick.
Preserve icon space - Preserves icon space in the menu even if the item has no icon.
Scrollbar - Enables the scroll bar.
Select Language - Selects the language from the menu bar.
Select Theme - Select the theme from the menu bar.
Alignment of Theme and Language - Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu.
Always show items - Show the items of the menu even if the applications do not exist or they weren't
generated.
Default Application - Menu start application: an application, blank or an URL.
Navigation
The menu navigation settings allow you to define the tab attributes and navigation paths, please check more
details below:
Attributes:
Open items in tabs - When this option is set as "Yes", menu tabs option will be available and the menu
items will always open as tabs in a horizontal bar below the Menu.
Tab context menu - This option creates a context menu to manage the opened menu tabs as you can see in
the image below.
Minimum tab width - Minimum tab width to standardize the sizes of all the tabs.
Maximum tab width - Maximum width of the tab, if the width exceed this the text will be hidden.
Show navigation breadcrumb - Show the navigation breadcrumb each time an opened application calls
another application.
Use default icons in the item - If set as "Yes" it enables the use of standard icons when the menu item has
no icon, you are able to customize those standard icons inside the "Layout options >> Menu icons" or using
the menu items options updating one by one.
Use default icons in the tab - If set as "Yes" it enables the use of standard icons when the menu tab has
no icon. You are able to customize the tab icons using the "Menu Items" options updating an image for each
tab item.
Default Application - Using this option you can select an initial application for the menu, this application will
open once you run the menu for the first time.
Menu Itens
Menu - Items
Use this interface to structure the menu, indicating which the applications are called.
Note: In mobile devices, in case the menu item has a link and subitems, the link won't be considered so that the
subitems can be shown.
Image1: Menu Settings Interface
Label - Application title in the menu.

Link - Application name. The developer can click in to select the application.
Hint - Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user(Optional)
Icon - Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. You can
standardised those images inside the menu Layout >> Menu icons. Click in the to open the Images
Manager and select the image.
Active tab icon - Enter the image to customize the item tab icon when activated. You can standardised
those images inside the menu Layout >> Menu icons. Click in the to open the Images Manager and select
the image.
Inactive tab icon - Enter the image to customize the item tab icon when inactivated. You can standardised
those images inside the menu Layout >> Menu icons. Click in the to open the Images Manager and select
the image.
Target - Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another window.
Creating a Menu - Resources & process (Icons on the top of the menu list).
Insert item - Add a menu item.

Insert Sub-Item - Add a sub-item to the menu.
Remove - Removes an item from the menu. Select the item or sub-item, and click in the button to remove.
Import - Import applications from the project creating links to them.
Move Up - Move up a menu item or sub-item.
Move Down - Move Down an item or sub-item.
Move Left - Move an item or sub-item to the left, removing a level from it.
Move Right - Move an item or sub-item to the right, adding a level to it.
Linking applications is easy and fast. Select an application from a list to add to the menu after we click on the icon
on the side of the link text box. To structure the menu use the structure buttons.
Image2: Import Application Interface.

Toolbar
Use this interface to build a quick bar in the menu application linking applications through buttons, icons and text
links.
Image1: Toolbar Interface
Creating items (Icons on the top of the menu list).
Insert item - Add a new item on the toolbar of the menu.

Insert Separator - Add a separator into the toolbar.
Moving items (Arrows).
Move Up - Move up a toolbar item or sub-item.

Move Down - Move Down a toolbar item or sub-item.
Move Left - Move a toolbar item or sub-item to the left, removing a level from it.
Move Right - Move a toolbar item or sub-item to the right, adding a level to it.
Items settings.
Type - It can be a link, a button or an incon.

Link - Application name. The user can click in to select the application.
Icon - Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Click in to
select the image desired. (Optional)
Hint - Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. (Optional).
Display - This option allows to choose if the item will display only texts, only an image or both.
Image Position - It defines if the image will be displayed on the right or on the left side.
Target - Defines how to display the applications: on the same window or on another one.
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Events
Events
Figure 1:Menu´s Event Interface.
OnApplicationInit - Occurs only one time when the application is initialized.

Onload - Occurs a when a menu loads.
Execute - Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is chosen.

Layout
Overview
Layout Settings
Attributes:

Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Log
Options:

Application
Application Settings
Below some menu application settings description:
Figure1: Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Application Code - Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . An application can
be renamed using the main menu.
Connection - Defines the connection used by the ScriptCase to access database tables.
Language - Language of the generated application, all hints and messages are displayed in selected
language.
Charset - Selects the charset that will be used on the application.
Folder - Folder where the application will be stored in the work group.
Description - Descriptive application name and information.
Applications Icons - Icons that will be used by the application.
Converter
It is used to convert an Menu application to a Tree Menu format.
It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format.
Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Menu Tree Applications
Overview
Tree Menu application
Tree Menu applications are used to offer a single access point to the project applications, it is also possible to
create external links on the menu items. The menus structure can be modified at run time for example depending
on the user profile.
Image1: Tree menu application.

Menu
Settings
Using the menu settings interface the user can define the application attributes as follows:
Image1: Menu SettingsInterface.
Attributes:
Horizontal Alignment Of Menu - Define the application horizontal alignment in the page as: left or rigth.
Vertical Alignmentof the items - Align menu items vertically as: top, center or bottom.
Horizontal alignment of items - Align menu items horizontally as: left or rigth.
Menu Width- Width in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Menu Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the menu.
Iframe Width - Width in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be opened.
Iframe Height - Height in pixels or percentage of the size of the iframe where the applications will be
opened.
Hide menu items - Select the option to hide an item, instead of disabling it, when using security schemes or
access control.
Open items with OnClick - Opens menu items only with the mouse onclick.
Preserves icons space - Preserves icons space in the menu even if the item has no icon.
Scrollbar - Enables the scroll bar.
Select Language - Selects the language from the menu bar.
Select Theme - Select the theme from the menu bar.
Theme and language alignment - Themes and language items horizontal alignment in the menu.
Default Application - Menu start application: an application, blank or an URL .
Items
Image1: Menu Settings Interface.
Using this option define the menu structure and the called applications. Enter the following attributes:

Link - Application name. The user can click in to select the application..
Icon - Enter the image name to display as icon to the side the application label in the menu. Click in to
select the image desired. (Optional)
Hint - Enter a descriptive text to assist the application identification by the user. (Optional).
Target - Defines how to display the applications in the menu: in the same window or another window.
Creating a Menu - Resources & process.
Insert item - Add an application to the menu. ( as an item)

Insert Sub-Item - Add a sub-item to the menu.
Update - Modify a menu item or sub-item.
Clean item - Clean the picture of attributes.
Clean Menu - Excludes all items and sub-items from the menu.
Import Applications - Select the applications that will be called.
Importing applications is easy and fast. Selects applications from a list to add to the menu. To structure the menu
use the structure buttons.
Image2: Import Application Interface.

After importing the applications, the link receives the name from the application as below:
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Events
Events
Figure 1: Event button access of Menu application.
OnApplicationInit - Occurs only one time when the application is initialized.

Onload - Occurs a when a menu loads.
Execute - Occurs at the moment where an item in the menu is executed or an application is chosen.

Layout
Overview
Layout Settings
Attributes:

Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Log
Options:

Application
Settings
Below some menu application settings description:
Figure1: Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Application Code - Application code determined at the application creation to identify it . An application can
be renamed using the main menu.
Connection - Defines the connection used by ScriptCase to access database tables.
Localization - Language of the generated application, all hints and messages are displayed in selected
language.
Share theme variable - Shares themes with other applications based on the session values.
Edit Project - Allow users to edit the application.
Description - Descriptive application name and information.
Applications Icons - Icons that will be used by the application.
Converter
It is used to convert a Tree Menu application to a Menu application format.
It does not change any of the application orginal settings except for the format.
Search Applications
Overview
Search applications
Used to search data to form applications. It is created based on a SELECT statement, this application type works
necessarily linked to a form application
Some search form features:
Feature Description
Fields The search form automatically formats several
formatting fields types such as date, time, numbers, etc.
Search Define the search criteria individually for each
condition search field.
Fields The search form automatically validates several
validation fields types such as date, time, numbers, etc.
Save search Save the data entered on the search form for re-
usability.
Image1: Search form application.

Search
Settings
Attributes to define the search form (filter) settings (Alignment, Width, Criteria, etc).
Figure1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Empty Search - Select “Yes”, to display all the records. (including empty (blank) search fields)
Search Criteria - Allows to use the commands SQL “AND” or "OR" in the search criteria;
Horizontal Alignment- Define the position to align the search form horizontally;
Margins - Define the search form margins ;
Display Condition - Display search condition so that the user can choose an option.
Keep Values - When enbaled the values of the last filter are saved and displayed when the user return the
search screen.
Preserver fields and Orders - Determine which values to keep to each search form.
Table Width - Define the search form HTML width value.
Use Iframe - When enbaled it displays the search form and results in the same window , in two FRAMES,
one above of the other.
Initial State - When enbaled it displays initially the filter with grid inside of the located iframe below the filter.
This option is associate “To use Iframe”.
Iframe Height - Height in pixels of the serach form results iframe. This option is associate “To use Iframe”.
Case Sensitive - Considers Case Sensitive.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Required Fields
Define the required fields in the application.
Image 1: Required Fields Interface.
A marker (*) is displayed beside the field in the generated application. The required fields are validated and a
message is displayed if the field is empty.
Markers Positioning - Where the marker will be displayed in relation to the field.
Display message - If selected this option displays a message upon validation.
Criteria
button.
Buttons:

Toolbar
The application toolbar is divided in two parts:superior and inferior. It is possible to select the buttons
Figure1: Toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Toolbar (top / bottom) - Select the buttons that are displayed in the search toolbar. Use the arrows on the
right side of the button selection box to order the toolbar buttons.
Buttons Settings
Attributes:
Access Keys - Define the access keys shortcuts.

Options
Figure3: Options Interface.
Attributes:
Buttons Position(Top/Bottom) - Positioning of the buttons on the Top and Bottom toolbars.
Save Criteria
This resource allows to organize search profiles, it creates the option Save filter in the Search application, so it is
possible to save a search to be used afterwards. Rules can be added. With this feature is possible to save
searches by user login.
Figure1: Save Criteria Interface.
Figure2: Save Criteria Interface.

Sql
This module is used to edit the Search application SQL.
Image1: SQL Settings Interface.
Attributes:
SQL Select Statement - Shows the SQL Select statement that is being used.
SQL Preparation - Allows to execute a SQL command (e.g:: procedure), before the execution of SQL Select
Statement (if necessary).
Connection - Displays connection name used for that application.
Image2:Variable for Table Interface.
Fields Variable - Variables for substitution of the field names of the application. For each dynamically
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Log
Options:

Fields
Overview
It shows just selected fields in the Search ("SEARCH->SELECT FIELDS”).
To each field we can define a lot of attributes. When selecting a data type, the edit page is refreshed to show
specific seetings to each data type. These types are:
Text
Integer
Currency
Decimal
Date
Time
Date and Time

Select
Double Select
CheckBox
Radio
Text Auto-Complete
Number Auto-Complete
New Field
added.
Text
Attributes:
and characters.
Width - Define the field width.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Integer
Image1:Interface of General Configuration.
Atributos:

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Currency
VALUES FORMAT

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS

Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal
VALUES FORMAT

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS

Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Display - Allow to select the fielddisplay format.
Display Format - Allow to display beside the field the fulfillment mode of the date field.
Display Calendar - Allow to display beside the field a calendar icon, this makes possible the selection of the
Field's Behavior
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Time
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Display- Allow to select the field display format.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

Display - Allow to select the display format of the field.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Select
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as a textm it accepts letters, numbers
and characters.
nm_date_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup method

command.
Attributes :
internal value.
statement.

Attributes:
Single Value


)


Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music



internal value.
statement.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Double Select
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two
Label Search - Allow to define the field title in the filter.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes :
; ).
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Checkbox
General Settings
Attributes:
object.

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup Methods

command.
Attributes:
; ).
Separated by.
Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

specified position.

Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Separated by.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Radio
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup Method

table.
Attributes :

selected.
Attributes :

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Layout
Overview
Blocks

Attributes:

Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Settings
Attributes:

Header And Footer
HEADER
alongside it.
FOOTER
Template".
alongside it.
Events
Events
Image 1: Search´s Event Interface.
onApplicationInit - Occurs when the application is initiated.

onScriptInit - Occurs every time the application is loaded.
onRefresh- Occurs when the application is loaded.
onValidate - Occurs when a validation is carried through.
onSave - Occurs when the application is saved.

Application
Settings
Figure1: Settings Interface
Attributes:
Application Code - Determine the application name. It can be renamed through the main menu.
Localization - Generated application language , all the hints and messages are displayed in selected
language.
Share location variable - Shares location with other applications based on the session values
Share theme variable - Shares themes with other applications based on the session values
Edit Project - Allows other users of the group edit the application.
Timeout- Execution timeout in seconds. Zero assume the PHP default value.
HelpCase Link - Associate a this application to a project documentation page.
Figure2: Error Settings Interface .
Attributes:
Show the Error Title in the application - Display the error message in the application.
Show the Error Title in the field - Display the error message in thefield.
Error Title - Error message Title in the application.
>Script Error - Display script information where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Show the SQL command in the error.
Debug Mode - To run the application in debug mode, showing all SQL commands used in that application.
Navigation
Attributes:
SQL menu.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.


Link
Used to link the Search form with Form applications.
There are two link types available in a Search:
Application - Used to link to a Form application. Next to each record an icon is displayed to link to a
Form application.
Capture - Used to get a value from a Grid application record to the field.
Image1: New Link Menu
Select the link type.
Image2: Linking between Applications-Link Type Interface.
Link a Search with a Form application.
The screen bellow displays all applications available in the project.
Image3: LinkbetweenApplications - Application List Interface.
In Image4 the Search fields must be associated with the Form fields.
Image4: LinkbetweenApplications - Parameters Interface .
In the screen below, “ Link Properties” enter the link attributes.
Link Properties:
Link Operation Mode - Define how the linked Form will be displayed.
"Open in the same Window" - Open the linked application in the same window.
"Open in another Window" - Open the linked application in another window.
"Open in Iframe" - Open the form in the same window, but in a different frame(Below).
"Open in Parent" - Open the form in the same window, but in the frame where is calling the Search.
"Modal" - Open the Form in a Modal window.
Form Property
Enable or Disable buttons in the target Form application.
Create and displays an icon beside the field. The icon allows to retrieve the field a value from a Grid
Application record.
Image6: Grid Search with link of type capture in the field.
Select a Grid application.
Image8:Application List Interface.
Image9 displays the parameters definition. It shows which fields or variables should receive parameters to execute the Grid. The parameters options are:
Fixed - Use the text box to informa a fixed value or a variable.

Empty - Choose this option to pass no value to the Grid.
Image9: Parameter definition Interface
Image10: Links created.
Actions
Properties Editing the link properties.

Link Edit a Link
Delete Delete a link
In the link properties you can modify the link to modal.
Image11: Link properties

Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Report Pdf Applications
Overview
Report PDF application.
This application is used to format PDF files, it is possible to build PDF files by defining each field´s position on the
generated report. This application type is based on SELECT statements.
Picture1: PDF Report in action.

Report
Settings
Attributes:
PDF Orientation - Define the report page orientation: Landscape or Portrait.

Type:
Records per Page: Used to print a record on a single page.
Records per Line: Used to display the records as a conventional grid.
PDF measure unit - Unit used in printing format-: points, millimeters, centimeters and counts.
PDF format - Output print (paper) size.
PDF Destination: Send the output to de selected destination:
Browser: Open the pdf file immediately on a browser. Ex.: myfile.pdf
Download: Creates a link to download the file, in this case you must specify the filename.
Server: The pdf files are stored on the server side specified by the path. Ex.:c:\folder\file.pdf
Upper Margin - Define the pdf upper margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.
Bottom Margin - Define the pdf bottom margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.
Right Margin - Define the pdf right margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.
Left Margin - Define the pdf left margin, in the same measurement unit specified for your pdf report.
Create Search - Generate a filter form displayed before running your pdf application.
Page Amount - Set the amount of pages on the pdf report.
Amount of columns - Set the number of columns by page.
Columns width - Set the columns width.
Columns height - Set the columns height.
Font And Background
Here you can define some layout settings such as font, images, help rulers.
Font face - Font face for your pdf report.

Text Font size - Font size.
Text color - Text Color.
Text font style - Bold, Italic, Underlined.
Show ruler - A useful X & Y ruler will be displayed on you pdf to help you with the coordinates settings.
Image - Background Image for your report.
Width - Image width.
Height - Image Height.
Position X - Where, on X axis, the image will be position.
Position Y - Where, on Y axis, the image will be position.
To print - Print the file directly.
Sql
Figure1: Interface of SQL Configuration
SQL Select Statement - Displays the SQL select command.
Tip: The user can use the SQL Builder for fast assembly of the command.
SQL Preparation - Enter the SQL commands or procedure names to be executed before the
application main select.
Connection - Shows the connection name (database) that the application is using, this connection can be
changed for another that has the same tables (SQL).
Use Customized Message - Allows defining the message to be shown if the grid do not return a record
(EOF).
No Records Message - Message to be shown. Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”.
Font Face - Font name used, click on the icon and choose a font. Field associated to “ Use Customized
Message”.
Font Size - Choose the font size. Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”.
Font color - Font color. Field associated to “ Use Customized Message”.
Variable for table - Table name variable.
Note: In the first field should be filled with the variable name. The second field must be filled with part of the
table name to be replaced.
Fields Variables - Variable to replace select field name.
Note: In the first field must be filled in the name of the variable in the second field should be selected the
name of the field to be replaced.
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
Pdf Layout
Interface
Interface to define where each field is displayed on the PDF report.
Attributes:
Seq - Cell number. It is automatically set by the interface.

Cell - Cell name.
Pos X - Defines the field position, on X (horizontal) axis.
Pos Y - Defines the field position, on Y (vertical) axis.
Width - Cell's width.
Alignment - Cell's Horizontal Alignment.
Field - Data displayed on the cell.
Code
Use a set of commands to manipulate the pdf report.
The Report PDF application is based on the TCPDF class. The class methods are available to the user as well
macros listed in the table bellow. Use the object $pdf with the selected method, exemplo: $pdf-
>AcceptPageBreak(parameters);
Click here to access the TCPPF a documentation.
Method FPDF Macro ScriptCase Description

AcceptPageBreak sc_pdf_accept_page_break
Accept an automatic page break.
AddFont sc_pdf_add_font Add new font.
AddLink sc_pdf_add_link Create internal link.
AddPage sc_pdf_add_page Add new page.
AliasNbPages sc_pdf_alias_nb_pages Define alias to page number.
Cell sc_pdf_cell Print cell.
Close sc_pdf_close: close the document.
error sc_pdf_error Display error message.
Footer sc_pdf footer.
GetStringWidth sc_pdf_get_string_length
Calculate string seize.
GetX sc_pdf_get_x Returns X position.
GetY sc_pdf_get_y Returns Y position .
Header sc_pdf_header header.
Image sc_pdf_image Puts an image on the page.
Line sc_pdf_line Draws a line.
Link sc_pdf_link Inserts link.
Ln sc_pdf_ln ConImagethe line break.
MultiCell sc_pdf_multi_cell print text with line break.
Output sc_pdf_output Saves or send a document.
AliasNumPage sc_pdf_page Returns the string alias used for the
page number.
AliasNbPages sc_pdf_page_tot Returns the string alias used for the
total number of pages
Rect sc_pdf_rect Draws a rectangle.
SetAuthor sc_pdf_set_author Define document author.
SetAutoPageBreaksc_pdf_set_auto_page_breakActivates/deactivates automatic page
break.
SetCompression sc_pdf_set_compression Turns on/off page compression.
SetCreator sc_pdf_set_creator Define document creator.
SetDisplayMode sc_pdf_set_display_mode Define display mode.
SetDrawColor sc_pdf_set_draw_color Define the color used to picture.
SetFillColor sc_pdf_set_fill_color Define fill color.
SetFont sc_pdf_set_font Define font settings.
SetFontSize sc_pdf_set_font_size Define font size.
SetKeywords sc_pdf_set_keywords Set document keywords.
SetLeftMargin sc_pdf_set_left_margin Define left margin .
SetLineWidth sc_pdf_set_line_width Define line width.
SetLink sc_pdf_set_link Set internal link.
SetMargins sc_pdf_set_margins Define margins.
SetRightMargin sc_pdf_set_right_margin Define right margin.
SetSubject sc_pdf_set_subject Define subject.
SetTextColor sc_pdf_set_text_color Define text color.
SetTitle sc_pdf_set_title Define document title.
SetTopMargin sc_pdf_set_top_margin Define top margin.
SetX sc_pdf_set_x Define X position.
SetXY sc_pdf_set_xy Define XY position.
SetY sc_pdf_set_y Define Y position.
Text sc_pdf_text Print string.
Write sc_pdf_write Print characters string.
Positioning
Interface to define the field display sequence (use the arrows to set a field position).
Fields
Report Pdf Fields
Report PDF - Fields

In this sessions is displayed how to Configure only the grid selected in the menu "GRID - SELECT FIELDS ".
Field - field is possible to define the attributes. The edit page is re-loaded to display/configure each field specific
attributes depending on field type.
Text
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type text it accepts letters, numbers and special
characters.
Case Settings - Convert the field font case. All upper case, if the select option is Upper Case, all lower
case if the select option is Lower Case, only first letter of first word to upper case, if the select option is
Capitalize first word, first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize all word.
HTML Content - Define the field content as HTML. An HTML Content field process html tags.
Grid Mask - Define the field grid mask. For example, to format a phone number with parentheses and
dashes. The mask uses the characters "X" and "Z", where X enable zero and Z disable zero.
SQL Type - Determine the field type in database.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Multiple Lines Text
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type multiple lines text is basically a text box.
Case Settings - Convert the field font case. All upper case, if the select option is Upper Case, all lower
case if the select option is Lower Case, only first letter of first word to upper case, if the select option is
Capitalize first word, first letter of each word to upper case if the select option is Capitalize all words.
HTML Content - Define the field content as HTML. An HTML Content field process html tags.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Integer
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An integer type field accepts only integers.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Decimal
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A decimal type field accepts decimal values.
Label - Define the field title.

Do Not Repeat Value - Skip repeated information displaying a field value only once.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field. To learn more about regional settings click here.
Negative Color - Negative value's color.
Complete with Zeros - Complete the field value with zeros.. Example: The value is R$ 125,50, with number
of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the valued displayed is
R$ 125,500.
Decimal Precision - Field's Decimal precision.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.
Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2



algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Currency
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type.
Values Format
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field.

To learn more about regional settings click here.
Currency Format - Display field with currency format.

Negative Color - Negative value's color.
Complete with Zeros - Complete the field value with zeros.. Example: The value is R$ 125,50, with number
of decimals digits defined to 3 and the option Complete with Zeros selected to Yes the valued displayed is
R$ 125,500.
Decimal Precision - Field's Decimal precision.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Html Image
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An HTML IMAGE field is used for images processing.
Image - Search images to display. Use the icons to select between scriptcase standard available images or
upload an image from any directory.
Border - Image border size.
Width - Image width size. May be expressed in percent or pixels.
Height - Image height size. May be expressed in percent or pixels.
Date
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Date is formatted as in the option Values format
(Image2).
Values Format
Image2: Values Format.
Detail Mask - Format of the field display.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.


Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.
Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Time
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Time is formatted as in the option Values format
(Image2).
Values Format
Image2: Values Format.
Regional Settings - Applies regional settings to the field.

To learn more about regional settings click here.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Date And Time
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A field type Date and Time is formatted as in the option Values
format (Image2).
Values Format
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Image (database)
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An Image (Database) field process images stored in binary
format. in the database.
Image Height - Image height in pixels.
Image width - Image width in pixels.
Maintain aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in another window - Open the original image in another window.

Image (file Name)
Report PDF Fields - Image(FILE NAME)
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An Image (File Name ) field process images.
Image Height - Image height in pixels.
Image width - Image width in pixels.
Maintain aspect - Maintain the image aspect ratio when resizing it.
Open in another window - Open the original image in another window.
SubFolder - SubFolder where the files are stored.
Image Caching - Time in minutes the image cache will be kept in the server before being deleted.

Document (database)
Report PDF Fields - Document (DATABASE
Image1: Field General Settings Interface
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A Document (Database) field creates a link to each document
in the database.
Display Icon - Display the file type icon.
File Name - Field that contains document's file name, it will be stored on the database.
SQLType - Determine the field type in database.

Attributes:
Data Type - Define Document (File Name) field creates a link to each document.
SubFolder - SubFolder where the files are stored.
Icon - INSERIR DESCRIÇÃO.

Credit Card Number
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. A Card field is formatted and validate accordingly.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
E-mail
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An E-mail field display an icon linking to outlook.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Url
Attributes:
Data Type - Define the application field type. An URL field display an linking icon.
Other Page - Open link in another page.
Grid Lookup
lookup automatic).

Attributes :
Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
in Separated by.

Attributes :
Single Value




Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Married C 2 1
Single S 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


algorithm.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music

Use lookup in:
, CSV and RTF).
Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:

Image Height - Altura da Imagem
Image Width - Largura da Imagem
Barcode
Values Format interface.
Attributes:
Type - Type of bar code.

Output - Image format output.
DPI - Image quality.
Thickness - Image height.
Resolution - Resolution of the image.
Rotation - Rotate image.
Font - Barcode text font.
Display Settings
Display Settings interface.
Attributes:
Font Style - Used to select the font style that will be applied to the application object.
Style of the font - Style of the text font displayed in the pdf (Bold, Italic, Underline).
Number of characters - Number of characters to be displayed.
Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left, right, center or justify).
Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top, middle or bottom).
Background Image - Background image Field.
Line Break - Allow line breaks.
Background Color - Used to select the color to be applied to the background of the application title using a
color palette.
Height (px) - Sets the title height in pixels.
Title Horizontal Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (left, right or center).
Title Vertical Alignment - Sets the Search form label in the desired location (top, middle or bottom).
Subselect
This resource is very useful when you need to make a master-detail report, for example Categories and Products.
You must create a new "Subselect" field.
Step1:Create a new field.
Step2:Choose the "Subselect" type.
For this field type we can set up the following parameters:
Increment - The space between two lines.

Connection - Detail is stored on another database
Table - To write the SQL instruction to retrieve the data.
Subselect - SQL example SELECT ProdName, PriceUnit, UnitsStored FROM adm_products where
categoryID = {categoyid} Note the parameter {categoryid} passed.
Now, on the fields list you can expand the SubSelect Field to see it´s 'fields'.
Events
Events
If you need do something more specific on you reports, you can program it, using events. For example if you want
to sum two fields and move this result to another one, before printing the record, just edit the event OnRecord
and write a code similar to this:
{field_c} = {field_b} + {field_a};
Here you are free to program PHP, just remember the character { } , around the field name to make reference the
local variables, using [ ], you are making reference to global variables.
onApplicationInit - Occurs when the application is initiated.
onScriptInit - Occurs every time the application is loaded.
onRecord - This event is executed before printing each record.
onHeader - This event is executed immediately before printing the header. Use this event, for example, to print a
calculated value in the header.
onFooter - This event is used to show some calculated value on the footer.

Log
Options:

Search
Settings
Define all Search form attributes.
Figure1: Search Settings Interface.
Attributes
Empty Search - “Yes”, display all records, if search fields are empty. “No”, no register is displayed.
Search Criteria - Allows to select the SQL command “AND” or “OR” to define the search criteria to be
used.
Horizontal Alignment - Define the search form horizontal alignment.
Vertical Alignment - Define the search form vertical alignment.
Margins - Define the search form position (margins).
Display Condition - Display search condition so that the user can choose an option. “ AND” or “ OR”
appears in the search form for selection.
Keep Values - When activated the values of the last search are kept and shown when the user return the
search screen.
Preserver fields and Orders - Allows the end user to select form order.
Table width - Define the search form HTML width value.
Table Width Unit - Unit used in width measurement.

Use Iframe - Display search form and the search results in the same browser window, in two FRAMES, one
above the other.
Initial State - Display search first the grid in the iframe positioned below the search. Or displays just the
search . This option is associated to “Using Iframe”.
Iframe Height - Iframe height in pixels where the data retrieved by the search is displayed. This option is
associated to “Using Iframe”.
Case Sensitive - Define the search operation mode.
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Criteria
Allows to define search options (SQL) for each field. The left list displays the fields and the right list has the
search options. To select options click on the option (Equal to, Beginning with, Contains, ...) and click on "Turn On
/ Off" button.
Buttons:

Show the condition - This option is displayed just if a field has only one option selected. It allows do not
Toolbar
Image1: Search Toolbar Interface.
Attributes:
Toolbar (Top / Bottom) - Select the buttons displayed in the filter toolbars and the buttons position.
Buttons Position (Top / Bottom) - Define the buttons alignment in the toolbar.
buttons Settings
Attributes:
Hint - Define a hint in the button.
Access Key - Allows to define acess keys shortcuts.
Rules Edit
This resource allows to organize search profiles. It creates the option Save criteria in the Search application, so it
is possible to save a search to be used afterwards. Rules can be added, with this feature is possible to save
searches by user login.
Image1: Save Criteria Interface.
Image2: New/Edit Rules Interface.

Layout
Overview
Blocks

Attributes:

Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Display Settings
Layout Settings
Attributes:

Header
alongside it.
FOOTER

Template".
alongside it.
Events
In ScriptCase was incorporated the concept of Events in the applications, making possible a more standard
development. It was also created a documentation system in the ScriptCase to display the ScriptCase macros
that have reference to each selected event.
onScriptInit - This event is executed once, before the execution of the main select of the application. In this
scope, normally, are executed the macros that modify the select, such as: sc_select_field, sc_select_order,
sc_select_where(add) and etc.
onRefresh - Occurs when the application is loaded.
onValidate - Occurs when a validation is performed.
onSave - Occurs when the application is saved.

Fields
Overview
It shows just selected fields in the Search ("GRID->SELECT FIELDS”).
To each field we can define a lot of attributes. When selecting a data type, the edit page is refreshed to show
specific seetings to each data type. These types are:
New Field
added.
Text
Attributes:
and characters.
Use same label used on the Grid- This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured
in the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used.
Width- Field Size.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Convert Letter- Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the chosen option
is Uppercase, all in small letters, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the first word in capital
letter, if the chosen option is Uppercase first word, it is important to point out that the other words do not
receive this configuration. The first letter of all word in capital letters, if the chosen option is Uppercase all
words.
Submit on OnChange - Allow when activated, to submit the filter when it will have alterations in the field.
Show Condition - Allow when activated, to show or don't show the filter condition, the same just functions if
the filter will have at least one option.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Integer
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration.
and characters.
Use same Label on the Gridl -This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in
the grid, in this case the option filter label can't be used.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal
and characters.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Currency
and characters.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
VALUES FORMAT
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
and characters.
nm_date,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Date. That is, the label is a field
Use Gird Label -This option when activated, allows to use the field title that is configured in the grid, in this
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Regional Settings - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Date separator - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÂO

Display - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÂO
Use Combo-box - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Field's Behavior
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Time
and characters.
nm_hour,if is more clearly the agreement if the same is simplified to Hour. That is, the label is a field
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Time separator - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO

Display - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
and characters.
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:
Date separator - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO

Time separator -INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Display - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Use Combo-box - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Display Format - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Group Date and Time - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Display Calendar - INCLUIR DESCRIÇÃO
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Select
Attributes:
and characters.
Search Label- Define the application field title. For example: if the field has been defined in the database as
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup method

command.
Attributes :
internal value.
statement.

Attributes:
Single Value


)


Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music



internal value.
statement.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Double Select
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Double Select is an drop-down object which allow multiple selection through of two
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes :
; ).
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Checkbox
Attributes:
object.
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup Methods

command.
Attributes:
; ).
Separated by.
Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

specified position.

Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Separated by.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Radio
Attributes:
Data Type - Radio is an object which allows the selection fof just an information of all that are shown by it.
Filter Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter.
Use Grid Label - Allow to use the field title which is configured in the grid.
SQL Type - Database Field type
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Lookup Method

table.
Attributes :

selected.
Attributes :

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Grid Fields
Attributes:
Data type - “ Search Fields” is a new resource which allow the selection of the fields that will be part of the
grid body of the search.
Search Label - Allow to define the field title in the filter.
Height - Allow to determine the field height.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Sorting
Attributes:
Tipo do Dados - "Ordenação dos Campos" é um novo recurso que permite de sejam selecionados os
ordem campos ( clausula ORDER BY) que fazem parte do corpo da GRID da Consulta.

Height - Allow to determine the field height.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
Figure1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.
Attributes:

Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Image1: Interface of General Configuration of the field.
Attributes:
Field's Behavior
Attributes:
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Application
Settings
Define the common ScriptCase applications attributes. See below the attributes description:
Attributes:
Application code - Application code determinated in the moment of the application creation, this code can
be renamed through the main menu.
Description - This field can be used to describe of the application objectives.

Application images - Specific images used by this application.
Localization - Generated application language , all the hints and messages are displayed in selected
language
Charset - FALTA DESCRIÇÃO.
Share location variable - Use the session location variable in this application
Script Error - Displays the script and the line where the error occurred.
SQL Error - Displays the SQL command which originated the error.
Folder - Folder where the application is stored in the workspace.
Edit Project -Allows other group users to edit the application.
Timeout - Time of execution timeout in seconds. Zero is the standard value of the PHP.
HelpCase Link -Associate a this application to a project documentation page.
Navigation
Attributes:
SQL menu.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.

Programming
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Calendar Applications
Overview
A calendar is an organizer application for social, religious, commercial, or administrative purposes. The main
concept is defined time periods, typically days, weeks, months, and years.
Calendar for Month

This option shows all days in a selected month. The record title is displayed in the day slot.
Image1: Calendar for a month application interface.
Calendar for Day

This option shows all hours in a selected day. The record title is displayed in the hour line.
Image2: >Calendar for a day application interface.
Calendar for Week

This option shows all days in a selected week. The record title is displayed in the hour line and day columm cell.
Image3:Calendar for a week application interface.
Creating or Editing the record.

Upon selecting day and hour, double click in calendar to open the form to insert a new schedule.
Image4:Editing record in calendar application.

Settings
Settings
Use this option to define the application.
Image1: Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Horizontal Alignment - Allows todefine the application horizontal alignment in the page.
Margins - Defines the application margins (up, down, right and left).
Table Width - Application width value. The ScriptCase applications are generated in the HTML standard,
and are organized in tables, lines and cells. This parameter defines the most external application table width.
Table Width Unit- Measurement unit used in table width defined in the previous item: percentage, pixel or
automatic. When using percentage is generated a HTML with the format <TABLE WIDITH="70%"> (as an
example with 70 as the field width input). In pixel, the generated html to the same application has the tag
<TABLE WIDITH="70px">. For the automatic option the '%' or 'px' is omitted and the browser will
automatically dimension the table.
Width - Iframe form width. *
Height - Iframe form height. *
* The form application that insert a new schedule in calendar application, open in modal iframe on top of calendar.
Edit Fields
The Edit Fields options was included to Scriptcase on the version six, this new menu option groups the most
commonly used field configuration for all fields at the same place.
Figure 1: Edit Fields Interface.
Options:
1 - Fields - This column is used to show the field's name.

2 - Label - Column to edit the field's label displayed in the generated application.
3 - Data type - This allows the change of the field's type. Select the desired data type from the dropdown
box.
4 - Form option. Not available for Grid Applications
4.1 - New - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when entering a new record
(Addition mode).
4.2 - Update - Check the checkbox to specify that the field must be displayed when editing a record
(Edition mode).
4.3 - Read-Only - Defines if the field will become a read-only field, this way it cannot be edited.
4.4 - Required - Defines if the field will become a required field.
4.5 - PK - Will set a field or fields as a primary key for the application. If only one field is selected it will
work as a regular primary key, if two or more fields were selected it will work as a composite key.
4.6 - DB Value (Insert) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected field
when inserting a new record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP. This option allows you to set
a default value to the field.
4.7 - DB Value (Update) - This option defines whether it is to be given internal values to the selected
field when updating a record, such as autoincrement, date, datetime and IP.
5 - Page - Indicates that there is a Page in the application. An application may have multiple pages, which
are arranged as high-level tabs. Each page can contain one or more blocks.
6 - Block - Indicates that there is a Block in the application.
7 - Page: Fields not shown - This contains all fields that will not be displayed in the generated application.
Note: Please note that each line is draggable. This allows you to define the position of fields, blocks and pages by dragging fields up or down to a different block or page.
Remember: Fields are grouped in Blocks and Blocks are grouped in Pages.
Display
Options:
Select Fields
Fields Positioning
Unique Key
It provides unique key validation at web server side.
Image 1: Unique Fields Interface.

Toolbar
Image1: Interface of toolbar.
Attributes:
Navigation - Displays the buttons used to navigate on the form (first, previous, next, last, exit ). The
selection of these buttons vary according to the form application.
Update - Displays the buttons used to modify recorded information on the form (insert, update, delete) . The
selection of these buttons vary according to the form application.
Buttons Settings
Attributes:
Label - Defines the label displayed on the button.
Hint - Defines a hint to the button.
Access Key - Allows to define fast access keys using the keyboard.
OPTIONS
Image3: Options Interface.
Attributes:
JS Formatting - Use automatic filled format .

Help by Block - Group help by block. Is possible to define a help text to each field and an icon is displayed
in the block title bar linking to the help page.
General Help - "Consolidates" all field help in a unique page linking to the help page.
Sql
Define the attributes relative to the connection to the table used by the form. Define primary key, filters and
ordinances for the form.
Interface
Image1: SQL Settings
Select primary key fields - In this function it is displayed a combobox object with an asterisks that indicate
what are the fields that are SQL table primary key fields . In the majority of cases, the Scriptcase identifies it.
For cases that are not identifiable by the Scriptcase the user must use the buttons to select the field as key,
note:
On/Off Button - Select/unselect the field as primary key displaying an asterisk at its left side.
All Button - Defines all fields as primary key.
None - Defines that no field is primary key (unselect all). Normally it is used to clean all definitions of the
On/Off and restart the process.
Ordinance Buttons - Allows to order the primary key fields. To order click on the field and use the
arrows.
Where Condition - Enter the WHERE to retrieve the records to edit.
Order By - Enter the ORDER BY clause to determine the order that the records are displayed. When the
navigation is used by default, the order is determinated by the primary key.
Connection -Displays the connection name (database) that the application is using for its execution, this
connection can be replaced by another that have the same tables (SQL).
Table Name - Table name that the form application is using.
Variable for Table - Fields to allow to be replaced part of the table name defined in the select, before the
execution.
Note: In the first field enter the variable name. In the second field enter the part of the table name to be replaced.
Case Sensitive - Set it to "No" only if the database is configured for case-sensitive and it is desired that the
filter does not respect this setting.
Procedures
Configures a form application to use Stored Procedure (defined by the database) for adding, updating, and
excluding information. When not configured to use procedures the default is to use Scriptcase standards for the
commands INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE.
See below step-by-step implementation for Stored Procedure Database Insertion.
Image1: Stored Procedures Interface
1 - Mark the option: “I want to use Procedure to do INSERT”. Enter the procedure name and the amount of
parameters.
Image2: Defining procedure parameters.
2- Define the fields that reference to the Stored Procedure parameters and each parameter type (input or output).
Click on the button save to complete this process.
Image3: Passing values to the Stored Procedure.

Javascript
Attributes:
form “form”.
Choose event - In this combobox we must choose the event associated to the field, for whom we will write
Edit Javascript
reload on the form.
the selected value.
}
}
OnBlur Example:

{
}
onChange examples:
{
}
{
}
{
}
onMouseOut example:
Dependencies
A resource to allow to link related tables, defining a dependency between tables. For example, the table of orders
and items, removing a record from the table of orders, all its items also have to be removed. See an example
using this resource below.
1º- First define a new dependence. In this example we will create an dependency between
adm_suppliers_products (Dependent table) with the table adm_supplier (Actual application). Click on the button
new dependency to begin.
2º - Select the dependent table and inform the amount of fields related to the father and child table. In this
example only one field is related : the supplier code.
3º - Select the keys (linking fields) : adm_suppliers -> supplierID - adm_suppliers_products ->supplierID.
4º - Click on the button generate Scripts to define the dependence rule.
Security
Attribute:
below.
the following code:
}
}
else{
}
ScriptCase.
CAPTCHA
Read more:

application.
Log
Options:

Fields
Overview
This interface allows to inform the validation rules and formatting of each form field. The configuration of the form
fields is done by clicking on the field to be formated, in the existing list, in the left side of the “Calendar” folder.
Image1: List of fields.
The system opens a screen at the right side of this list, where the field Data type is attributed by ScriptCase
according to SQL table definition. For each Data type a diferent list of characteristics is presented. Example: A
field of type Text have diferent characteristics of a field of date type, the formatting should be set according to the
chosen type.
Text
General Settings
Attributes:
characters.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)

field.
update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
Case Settings - Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the chosen option
is Uppercase, all lower case, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the first word in capital
words
Minimum Size - Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts.
Maximum Size - Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts.
Allowed Characters - Allow to select a set of valid characters. Option All defines that field will accept any
character (letters, space, number, period, comma, accent). The option Selected allows to select, add or
remove specific types of desired characters.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Multiple Lines Text
General Settings
Image1:General SettingsInterface.
Attributes:
characters.
as Client Name.

field.
update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
Case Settings - Convert the letters of the field when it loose focus. All in capital letters, if the chosen option
is Uppercase, all lower case, if the chosen option is Lowercase. The first letter of the first word in capital
words.
Minimum size - Allow to define the minimum size that the field accepts.
Maximum size - Allow to define the maximum size that the field accepts.
Allowed Characters - Allow to select a set of valid characters. Option All defines that field will accept any
character (letters, space, number, period, comma, accent). The option Selected allows to select, add or
remove specific types of desired characters.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Integer
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as integer, it accept only integer
numbers.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Decimal
General Settings
Attributes:
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Currency
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as value, it accept letters, numbers,
characters.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP

Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type -Define the application field type. Date fields are formatted according to specific date rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
Minimum date:
Maximum Date:
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Time
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type- Define the application field type. Time fields are formatted according to specific time rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:

DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Date And Time
General Settings
Attributes:
rules.
as Client Name.

update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:
DATABASE VALUE
final user.

parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Image(database)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data Type - Defines the field type. Fields type Image (Field Name) uses server stored images in the. Note
that the images are stored in the database as text.
as Client Name.
Max File Size - Defines maximum field length.
update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Image(file Name)
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Image (file name) type, it stores a file
as Client Name.
update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Document (database)
Calendar: Form Fields - Document(Database)

General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as Document it creates a link for each
existent document in the database.
as Client Name.
File Name - Field that contains the document file name.
File Size - Defines the field that contains the file size.
update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Calendar: Form Fields - Document(File Name)

General Settings
Attributes:
the server.
as Client Name.
update mode".
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Credit Card Number
cards.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When a field is defined as Credit Card Number it is
formatted upon losing focus and validated according to specific rules.
as Client Name.


Examples:

letters) AAAA GHJK
and Numbers) U7I8
key DG2P
Multiple Masks 9999-9999;(99) 9999-9999;9999 999 9999;+99 99 9999-9999
(Telephone)
update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.

parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Credit Card
Define the Credit Card Company (flag). It relates to a Credit Card Field and is used to validate information
according to the specific company rules.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Defines the application field type.

as Client Name.
update mode".
Values Formats
Attributes:
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

E-mail
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as E-mail an icon is displayed by its
formats.
as Client Name.

Display Icon - Display an email icon by the field side

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Url
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as text, it is shown a link of access.
as Client Name.


update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Html Color
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is defined as HTML Color is shown beside of the
field an icon with a pallet of colors.
as Client Name.
as Client Name.

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
GRID LOOKUP
Attributes:

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Select
Use select object (combobox) in the field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The data type Select is a drop-down object which allow the selection of information through a
sliding window.
as Client Name.
update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Lookup method

command.
Attributes :
internal value.
statement.

Attributes:
Single Value


)


Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2


Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music

Value
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Traveling
8 Books
16 Music



internal value.
statement.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Double Select
Resource to display two values: A list with values to select and a list with selected values.
Attributes:
Data type - The data type double select is a drop-down object which allow the multiple selection through two
window of selection and a navigator between them( << < > >> ).
as Client Name.
update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Attributes :
; ).
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Checkbox
Use checkbox object in the form field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type checkbox is an object that allows the selection of one or more options (by marking a
box).
as Client Name.

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Lookup Methods

command.
Attributes:
; ).
Separated by.
Attributes :
Single Value





Male M 1 1
Female F 1 1
Single S 2 1
Married M 2 1
Sports SP 3 2
Movies MO 3 2
Books BO 3 2
Traveling TR 3 2

specified position.

Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
saving.
field is 3.
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music
Description
1 Sports
2 Movies
4 Books
8 Traveling
16 Music


Separated by.
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.
Radio
Use radio object in the field.
General Settings
Attributes:
Data type - The type radio is an object that allows the selection of only one information (from the list shown).
as Client Name.

update mode".
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Lookup Method

table.
Attributes :

selected.
Attributes :

AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.

Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Text Auto-complete
value and label associated. For the Text Auto-Complete each item value must be alpha-numeric. This list is
Figure1:General SettingsInterface.

as Client Name.


update mode".
Values Format
Attributes:


not accepted.
DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

This field displays a list of items obtained from a Select command. The information entry serves as a filter of
items that will be displayed as it is typed. This list structure is similar to Select HTML object where each item has
a value and label associated. For the number Auto-Complete each item value must be numeric. This list is
Attributes:
as Client Name.


update mode".
VALUES FORMAT
Attributes:

DATABASE VALUE
final user.
parameters.
Edition Lookup
Attributes:
AJAX PROCESSING
occours.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Html Image
Image1: General Configuration Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the fields is of the type html image, it allows to insert in
the field an image.
as Client Name.
Image - Search the image that will must be shown. Choose it by using the icon “Choose image” that have
standard images or by using the icon “Upload image” that allows the choice of any image.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Label
Image1: General Configuration Interface.
Attributes:
Data type - Define the application field type. When the field is of the type label, it is shown as just an output.
as Client Name.
Text - Box where wil be informed the text that will be shown beside the field.
Use to reload - Transforms the text that was informed in the property Text, defined above, into a link that
reloads the form when it is clicked.
Positioning - Allow to position the form in the chosen block.
DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Html Editor
General Settings
Attributes:
characters.
as Client Name.
update mode".
Toolbar
Attributes:
Properties :
Bottom.

DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Theme
General Settings
Attributes:

Localization
General Settings
Attributes:

Bar Code
General Settings
Atributtes:

as Client Name.
update mode".
Barcode
Attributes:


DISPLAY SETTINGS
Title CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Field CSS
Attributes:
color palette.
Object Input CSS
Attributes:
a color palette.
Help Settings
the applications.
Attributes:
Help Type:
clicked.

Layout
Overview
Application attributes and formatting resources such as visualization schemas, organizing fields in blocks, define
the values and the header format between others.
Pages
Blocks
Colors Schema
Header & Footer
Pages
An application page can be deifined as block container. For each application it is created a page with default
name “ pag1” . It is possible to create more pages. The pages are shown in the application in tabs mode, where
each tab has the blocks defined in Organization of Blocks.
Image1: Pages settings interface.
See below an application example using two pages: General Data and Documents (see Image2).
Image2: Application using pages resources.
The application has a standard page, identified by pag1, that can be renamed, with the creation of new pages.
The use of pages is indicated when we have an application that involves a lot of table fields (more than 20 for
example).
An application can have a lot of pages, and in each of them, you can include a lot of blocks.
Image3:Page Settings Interface.
To include a new page, just fill the boxex above the button Insert, in the first field fill the page name and in the
second field select the image that will be presented as folder icon.
To delete a page, just click on the delete button.
Attributes:
Font Name - Select the font in the existing list, or enter a font name to be used in the application.
Font Size - Enter the font size.
Select font Color- Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define the
selected text color.
Select background Color - Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define
the selected text background color.
Non selected font Color - Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to define
the non selected tab font color.
Non selected background Color -Select the color from a color palette or enter the color information to
define the non selected tab background color.
Blocks

Attributes:

Add New Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.

Edit Block
Attributes:
Name - Block name.
Layout Settings
Figure1: Layout Settings Interface.
Define the application layout.
Attributes:
Header Template - Allows to choose the template to compose the application header.
Footer Template - Allows to choose the template to compose the application footer.
Theme - Choose from the available themes. The application visual mode (color, fonts, etc.) is loaded.
Header & Footer
HEADER AND FOOTER

HEADER
alongside it.
FOOTER
Template".
alongside it.
Events
Events
onInit - This event runs when the application is loading.

onRefresh - This event runs to reload the application page
onValidate - This event runs by clicking on the validation (OK, Update, Insert, Delete, Filter) depending on
application.
onBeforeInsert - This event runs after the insertion.
onAfterInsert - This event runs after the insertion.
onBeforeUpdate - This event runs before updating a record.
onAfterUpdate - This event runs after updating a record.
onBeforeDelete - This event is executed before the deletion.
onAfterDelete - This event runs after the deletion.
onLoad - This event occurs when the page is loaded, ie when navigating from one record to another, clicking
on the buttons (new, insert, etc. earlier.)

Ajax Events
page.
to another object.
Example:
to the browser.

Buttons
Buttons
Types button: (Javascript, PHP, Linking).
Deleting a button
option.
Javascript Button
Button Display Mode

Window).
Window).

Code
Deleting a button
option.
Php Button
Button Display Mode
Window).
Window).

Code
Image2: Php Interface.
Deleting a button
option.
Link Button
Button Display Mode

Window).
Window).

option to create new links configure the new Link button , and follow the steps below to create the link required to
complete the operation.
Creating a new Link

Link Operation Mode - How will be presented the link.
Open in the same window - Show the application in the same browser window, exiting the search and
going to the form.
Open in other window - Open another window to show the application
Open in a Iframe - Show the application in the same in the same window that the search, below of
search an Iframe is created to display the application.
Output URL of the called application - web address accessed when the user exit the grid.
Linking Link Hint - Message shown when the mouse is over the selected link field.
Deleting a button
option.
Ajax Button
To create a new button, then click "New button", enter the name and select the button type.
Image 2: Edit the button function
Application
Settings
Define ScriptCase applications attributes.
Attributes:
Application Images - Specific images used by this application.
chosen language.
Folder - Folder where the application is stored in the workspace.
Edit Project - Allow all project users to edit this application.
Timeout - Timeout time in seconds. Zero is the standard value of PHP.
Timeout Message - Timeout for Ajax update message.
Maximum File Size - Max upload file size for this application.
Message Title - Text used in title line as label.
Use Enter to Tab - Use the enter key to tabulate.
Error Settings
Image2: Error Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Error Position - Error position in the application. Values: right, left, top and bottom.
Show error title in the application - Allows to show the title line of the error message.
Show error title in the field - Allow to show the title line of the error message in the field.
Error title - Error message title in the application.
Error Script - Displays the script and line where the error occurs.
Error SQL - Displays SQL command that originated the error.
Debug Mode - Runs the application in debug mode, showing the SQL Commands.
Ajax error output - Opens a widow to display Ajax error messages output during debug mode.
Timeout Error - Time to display the validation error message.
Navigation
Attributes:
SQL menu.
Message after insert - Message to show after the record insertion. The message is displayed when
navigating to other page.
Message after update - Message to show after the record update. The message is displayed when
navigating to other page.
Message after insertion - Message to be shown after the insertion of a register. Will occur the navigation to
other page and the message will be shown, soon below of the message will appear the button OK that when
is clicked return to the form.
Exit Application - Exit application after the form processing.
Return After inserting - Defines if the form will return to edit the inserted record or a new record can be
entered and added.
Global Variables
GLOBAL VARIABLE
Example:


variables :
application.
browser.


Synchronize Table
This process will compare the application fields definitions of the and the table fields definition in the database.
Changes in database table as an update, inclusion, or exclusion, or a change in the data type, is displayed as in
the image below:
Image1: Synchronize table Interface
Note: When a table field in the database is renamed, the effect of the table synchronization, comparatively, will be the same of the exclusion of a field that exist in the
application plus the inclusion of a new field.
Link
Used to link the application with other applications of the following types: Search, Form, Control, Menu and Tab.
There are three types of links available:
Application - Used to link form to other application. This link type is associated to events.
Field - Used to link our form through a link to any other type of application.
Capture - Creates an icon beside the field inside the form. Displays a search application.
In the windows below, the user will be able to edit an existent link or create a new link.
Image1: Links.
Creating Links
Select the link type : “Application”, “”Field” or “Capture”.
Image2:Link between applications Interface.
This link type is associated to events.
“Application List” shows the applications. Select the application to link and clink in Continue >>.
Image3: Link between application Interface.
Below, “Parameters Definition ”, at the left side, the application fields being linked and that need to receive
parameters to execution is displayed and, at the right side, selected the option for passing value, there are three
options, they are:
Field - Enter a the field used for passing values.
Value - Enter a fixed value to be passed.

Empty - No value is passed to the field.
In the window below, “Link Properties” enter the link attributes.
Image5:Link Properties Interface.
Attributes:
Redirecting after insert - Navigates for the application linked when adding information.
Redirecting after Update - Navigates for the application linked when updting information..
Form property - Allows to select the buttons that will be shown in the toolbar.
Creates an icon beside the field in the search form. Opens another window showing a search application.
“Linking Type” (below) shows that when it is selected the link “Capture”, a combobox with the application fields
is displayed. Selected the field that is used for the link.
Image6: Parameter Definition Interface .
Below, “Application List” shows the search applications. Select the application to link and click on Continue >>.
Image7:Application Link Interface.
Below, in “Parameters Definition”, at the left side, the application fields being linked and that need to receive
parameters to execution is displayed and, at the right side, selected the option for passing value, there are three
options, they are:

Empty- No value is passed as a parameter.
Recovering the field value - Selected the search application field to link object.
Image8: Parameter Definition Interface.

Programming
Overview
Attributes
Attributes:
attributes list.
Methods

Figure 8: Events.
Using a method :

Libraries
Scriptcase Macros
Scriptcase Macros
Scriptcase has macros and special variables that allow the user to manipulate events, buttons, applications,
security control, manipulate with dates, etc.
Follows a table of all macros and special variables from ScriptCase, including the list of applications that works
for each one.
MACROS AND SPECIAL VARIABLES
SQL
sc_begin_trans ("Connection") This macro starts a set of transations in the
database.
sc_change_connection This macro dynamically change the application

("Old_Connection", connections.
"New_Connection")
sc_commit_trans ("Connection") This macro effective a set of transations in the

database.
sc_concat ()
With this macro you can
concat fields on select for
every database.
sc_connection_edit This macro edits an existing connection at

("Connetion_Name", $arr_conn) runtime.
sc_connection_new This macro creates new connections

("Connection_Name", $arr_conn) dinamically.
sc_error_continue ("Event")
This macro deactivates the
Scriptcase standard
database error treatment
message for an event.
sc_error_delete This macro configure the variable that contains

the database error message that can occurs
during the exclusion of a record.
sc_error_insert This macro configure the variable that contains

during the addition of a record.
sc_error_update This macro configure the variable that contains

during the update of a record.
sc_exec_sql ("SQL Command", This macro execute SQL commands passed as

"Connection") parameter or a SQL command in the SQL field
action type.
sc_lookup (Dataset, "SQL This macro executes a SELECT command

Command", "Connection") stored in the second parameter and returns the
data in a variable.
sc_reset_change_connection This macro erases the changes made using

"sc_change_connection".
sc_reset_connection_edit This macro undoes the connection edits made

by macro "sc_connection_edit".
sc_reset_connection_new This macro undoes the connections made by the

macro "sc_connection_new".
sc_rollback_trans ("Connection") This macro discards a set of transations in the

data base.
sc_select (dataset, "SQL This macro executes the commands passed in

Command", "Connection") the second parameter and returns the dataset in
a variable.
sc_select_field ({Field}) This macro modify dynamically a field that will be

recovered in the grid.
sc_select_order ("Field") This macro modify dynamically the grids

"ORDER BY" clause field.
sc_select_where (add) This macro adds dynamically a condition to the

grid WHERE clause.
sc_set_fetchmode (parm); This macro allows to change the type of return

from the dataset of the select commands
sc_sql_injection ({My_Field}) or This macro it used protect the field/variable

($My_Variable) against "SQL injection".
sc_sql_protect (Value, "Type", This macro protects the value passed as

"Connection") parameter according with the used database.
sc_where_current This macro its used to make a reference of the

where clause currently used.
sc_where_orig This macro saves the where clause content of

the original application select.
Variables - Database Database Global variables containing database access

Variables values used by main connection.
Date
sc_date (Date, "Format", This macro calculates and returns increments
"Operator", D, M, Y) and decrements using dates.
sc_date_conv ({Field_Date}, This macro converts the date field passed as

"Input_Format", "Output_Format") parameter with an input format to another field
with an output format.
sc_date_dif ({Date1}, "Format This macro calculates the difference between

Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2") two dates (passed as parameters) returning the
result in days.
sc_date_dif_2 ({Date1}, "Format This macro calculates the difference between

Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", two dates returning the amount of days, months
Option) and years.
sc_date_empty ({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date
field its empty retuning a
boolean.
sc_time_diff ({datetime_01}, Calculate difference in hours, returning the

"Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, amount of hours, minutes and seconds.
"Date_02 Format")
Control
sc_ajax_javascript ( This macro allows the execution of JavaScript
'JavascriptMethodName', methods in form/control events
array("parameter"))
sc_alert ("Message") This macro shows a Javascript alert message

screen.
sc_apl_conf ("Application", This macro modify the application execution

"Property", "Value") property.
sc_calc_dv (Digit, Rest, Value, This macro calculate verify digits.

Module, Weights, Type)
sc_changed ({Field_Name}) This macro returns "true" if the field name have
been changed.
sc_confirm ("Message") This macro shows a Javascript confirm screen.
sc_decode ({My_Field}) This macro returns the encrypted field or

variable to its original value.
sc_encode ({My_Field}) This macro returns the field or variable with the
content encrypted.
sc_error_exit (URL, "Target") or

(My_Application, "Target")
This macro Interrupts the
application execution if there
are error messages
generated by the macro
"sc_error_message".
sc_error_message ("Text") This macro generate an error message.
sc_exit (Option) This macro forces the application exit.
sc_getfield ('myField') This macro assign the properties of a field to a

javascript variable.
sc_get_language This macro returns the abbreviation of the

language used.
sc_get_regional This macro returns the abbreviation of the

regional settings used.
sc_get_theme This macro returns the application theme name.
sc_groupby_label ("My_Field") This macro dynamically modify the field label

displayed in groupby lines.
sc_image (Image01.jpg) This macro loads images passed as parameter

to use in the application.
sc_include ("File", "Source") This macro its used to "include" PHP routines.
sc_include_lib ("Lib1", "Lib2", ...) This macro its used to select dynamically the
application libraries.
sc_include_library ("Target", This macro includes a PHP file from a library in

"Library Name", "File", the application.
"include_once", "Require")
sc_label ({My_Field}) This macro its used to modify dynamically the

grid form field label.
sc_language This macro returns the language and regional

settings.
sc_link (Column, Application, This macro dynamically creates or modifies links

Parameters, "Hint", "Target", between grid applications and other applications.
Height, Width)
sc_log_add ("action", "description") This macro will add a register into the log table.
sc_log_split ({description}) This macro returns what was inserted in the

"description" field of the log table in an array
format.
sc_mail_send (SMTP, Usr, Pw,

From, To, Subject, Message,
This macro its used to send
Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, e-mails.
Port, Connection_Type,
Attachment, SSL)
sc_make_link (Application, This macro is used to create a string with the link
Parameters) data to another application.
sc_master_value ('Object', Value) This macro update a Master Application object

from a Detail Application.
sc_redir (Application, Parameter01; This macro its used to redirects to other

Parameter02; Target, Error) application or URL.
sc_reset_global This macro delete session variables received as

([Global_Variable1], parameter.
[Global_Variable2] ...)
sc_seq_register This macro provide the register sequential

number.
sc_set_global ($variable_01) or
({My_Field})
This macro its used to
register session variables.
sc_set_groupby_rule
Macro is used to select an
specific GROUP BY rule.
sc_set_language ('String This macro allows to dynamically change the

Language') application language.
sc_set_regional ('String Regional') This macros allows to dynamically change the

application regional settings.
sc_set_theme ('String Theme') This macro its used to dinamically define the
application themes.
sc_site_ssl This macro verifies if its been used a safe/secure

site. (https protocol)
sc_trunc_num ({My_Field}, This macro its used to set the number of

Decimal_Number) decimals.
sc_url_exit (URL) This macro modifies the application exit URL.
sc_url_library ("Target", "Library This macro returns the path of a file, inside a
Name", "File") library, to be used on the applications.
sc_warning 'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically activates or deactivates

warning messages control.
sc_webservice ("Method", "URL", This macro is used to communicate with a web

"Port", "Send Method", "Parameters service.
Array", "Setting's Array", "Timeout",
"Return")
sc_zip_file ("File", "Zip") This macro its used to generate ZIP files from a
file list and/or directories.
Variables - Totalling Totalling Variables that contains all the totals (general and
Variables for grouping).
Variables - Totalling (group by) Breaking totals variables.
Totalling Variables (group by)
Filter
sc_where_filter This macro its used to save the where clause
content generated through the filter form.
Security
sc_apl_status ("Application", This macro Activate/Deactivate the applications
"Status") at user level.
sc_ldap_login
This macro establish the
connection with the user
credentials.
sc_ldap_logout ()
Macro used to release the
connection after using the
macro sc_ldap_login
sc_ldap_search ( \$filter = 'all',

\$attributes = array() )
Macro to perform searches in
the LDAP.
sc_reset_apl_conf ("Application", This macro deletes all the modifications effected

"Property") by "sc_apl_conf" macro.
sc_reset_apl_status This macro deletes all the application security

status variables.
sc_reset_menu_delete This macro restores a menu item structure.

(removed by the macro "sc_menu_delete").
sc_reset_menu_disable This macro its used to enable a menu item

structure. (disabled by the macro
"sc_menu_disable").
sc_user_logout ('variable_name',
'variable_content', 'apl_redir.php',
Macro used to log the user
'target') out to the system.
Shows
sc_ajax_message ("Message", This macro allows the application to display
"Title", "Parameters", customized messages.
"Parameters_Redir")
sc_ajax_refresh ()
Macro to refresh a Grid
sc_block_display (Block_Name, This macro dynamically show/hide the fields of a

on/off) specific block.
sc_field_color ("Field", "Color") This macro changes the color of a determined

field text.
sc_field_disabled ("Field_Name =
True/False", "Parameter")
This macro its used to block
a field to get any data that
would be typed on it.
sc_field_disabled_record This macro has the objective to block the typing

("Field_Name = True/False", on determined fields in the Forms.
"Parametre")
sc_field_display ({My_Field}, on/off) This macro dynamically display or not a specific

field.
sc_field_init_off (Field1, Field2,...) This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields
on the initial load.
sc_field_readonly ({Field}, on/off) This macro dynamically set a form field attribute
to '"Read-Only"
sc_field_style ({My_Field}, This macro allolws to modify dinamically the grid

"Background-Color", "Size", field style.
"Color", "Family", "Weight")
sc_format_num ({My_Field}, This macro its used to format numerical values.

"Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb",
"Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros",
"Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb",
"Side_Currency_Symb")
sc_format_num_region ({My_Field}, This macro has the objective to format numbers,

"Qtde_Dec", "Insert_Zeros", using the regional settings
"Monetary_Sym")
sc_form_show 'on' or 'off' This macro dynamically show or not the form.
sc_get_groupby_rule ()
This macro provides the
name of the groupby rule
running at the time.
sc_hide_groupby_rule ('group1',
'grop2', 'group3')
Macro used to disable Group
By rules.
sc_set_focus ('Field') This macro its used to set the focus to a form
field.
Buttons
sc_btn_copy This macro returns "true" when the "copy" button
is selected in a form.
sc_btn_delete This macro returns "true" when the "Delete"

button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_display This macro shows and hides buttons on the

("Button_Name","on/off") toolbar in execution time.
sc_btn_insert This macro returns "true" when the "Add" button

sc_btn_new This macro returns "true" when the "Add New"

button is selected in a form.
sc_btn_update This macro returns "true" when the "Save" button

PDF
sc_set_pdf_name This macro will change the grid's exported files
"sc_my_file_name.pdf" name.
Variables - Authentication User/Password for the WEB server.

Authentication Variables
Menu
sc_appmenu_add_item This Macro adds dinamically an item to the
("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", menu.
"Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication",
"Parameters", "Icon", "Hint",
"Target")
sc_appmenu_create This macro dynamically creates a menu item.

("Menu_Name")
sc_appmenu_exist_item This macro checks if there is a menu item.

("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
sc_appmenu_remove_item This macro removes dynamically a menu item.

("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
sc_appmenu_reset This macro reset the array used in the

("Menu_Name") dinamically creation of a menu application.
sc_appmenu_update_item This macro updates a menu item.

("Menu_Name", "Id_Item",
"Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication",
"Parameters", "Icon", "Hint",
"Target")
sc_btn_disable ('button_id', 'on/off')

Macro used to disable Menu
buttons.
sc_menu_delete (Id_Item1) This macro remove items of the menu structure.
sc_menu_disable (Id_Item1) This macro deactivate menu structure items.
sc_menu_force_mobile (boolean)
Macro used to force the
creation of menus to mobile
devices.
sc_menu_item
This macro Identifies the
menu item selected.
sc_script_name
This macro identifies the
application name that was
selected in the menu.
sc_ajax_javascript( 'JavascriptMethodName', array("parameter"))
This macro allows the execution of JavaScript methods called from events in
form/control applications.
This macro receive two parameters: a required one which recive a the JS method name
and an optional that recive an array with the method parameters on it.
This macro is only valid in applications with AJAX support.
Examples:
Ex. 1: Method javascript without parameters:

sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName');
Ex. 2: Method javascript with a paramenter:

sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName', array("paramameter"));
Ex. 3: Method javascript with two paramenters:

sc_ajax_javascript('JavascriptMethodName', array("param1","param2"));
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application Control Form

ajaxFieldonBlur ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange Onchange onChange
OnClick OnClick onClick
OnFocus OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onAfterDelete onValidateFailure
onAfterInsert onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert
onValidate onAfterInsertAll
onValidateFailure onAfterUpdate
onValidateSuccess onAfterUpdateAll
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_ajax_message("Message", "Title", "Parameters", "Parameters_Redir")
This macro allows the application to show customizable messages. It's use is restricted to AJAX
events of Form/Control applications.
This macro is only available in applications with AJAX support.
Parameters Description
Message The message to be shown. This parameter is required.
Title Messagebox title, if this parameter is empty, the title will not be shown.
Message Message format parameters.
Parameters Ex.:
String modal=Y&button=Y&button_label=Ok&redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
For more details about this parameter, see Table2.

Redirecting In this section is possible to define values for the redirecting target application. This
Parameters parameter works only if a "redir" property was informed. The properties for this
String parameter must be informed in this format: parameter=value;parameter=value.
Ex.: customer_id=ALFKI;customer_name=ALBERT FRANCINET
Table2: Message Parameters String
Property Description Values Example

modal Flag to define if the message Y or N modal=Y
will be shown in modal
timeout Time in seconds to hide the Seconds timeout=5
message. If this property is
not informed, the message
will be shown indefinitely.
This property works only if
"button" property is not
enabled.
button Shows a button inside the Y or N button=Y
message. This button default
function is to close the
message. If there is
redirecting enabled, the
application will be redirected
after closing the message.
button_label Button label. This option String button=Y&button_label=OK
works only if the "button"
property is enabled.
top Message positioning value in Pixels top=300
pixels from top margin. Number
left Message positioning value in Pixels left=200
pixels from left margin. Number
width Messagebox width value in Pixels width=320
pixels Number
height Messagebox height value in Pixels height=30
pixels Number
redir URL or application name for String button=Y&redir=form_employees.php
redirecting. This macro
works only if the "button"
property is enabled.
redir_target Target for redirecting. This String redir=form_employees.php&redir_target=_blank
property works only when
the "redir" property is
enabled.
show_close Flag for exhibition of the Y or N show_close=Y
"close" button on the
messagebox title bar. When
activated, this parameter
forces a title bar to be
shown, even if there is no
title defined.
body_icon Flag for exhibiting a icon on Y or N body_icon=N
the message body. The icon
exhibition depends on the
applications theme
configuration (exhibition
schemes).
Ex. 01
sc_ajax_message ("Message", "Title", "timeout=0");
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application Control

Form
sc_ajax_refresh()
This macro is used especially in Ajax events of a Grid with the purpose of reload the Grid
data (refresh).
Ex:
sc_ajax_refresh();
Macro Scope
Grid application
onClick
sc_alert("Message")
This macro shows a Javascript alert message box.

Ex. 1:
sc_alert("This is an alert message!!");
Macro Scope
Control
Form
onLoadAll
onValidate
sc_apl_conf("Application", "Property", "Value")
This macro allows to modify the property of the application. The user can determine if a
Form will start in insert mode, or a Grid starts by filter, etc.
This macro must be used by one application to modify the properties of another
application.
Properties for Form applications
Property Value Description

start new Forces the form to start in the insert mode in order to add new
records.
insert on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "add new" button to allow
the addtion of new records.
update on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "save" button on the form.
delete on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the "delete" button on the form.
field_display_off field Dinamically hides a field.
field_display_on field Dinamically shows a field.
field_readonly field Dinamically set the "readonly" attribute in order to select the
field.
rows Forces the number of lines for each page (only for form of
multiple records).
rows_ins Forces the number of lines for insert (only for form of multiple
records).
Property for Grid applications

start filter Forces the Grid to start by the filter.
cols Forces the number of columns. (vertical and slide kind)
rows Forces the number of lines per page.
lig_edit on/off Qualifies (on) or unqualifies (off) the record edition. (the pencil
icon)
Property for all applications

exit apl/url Forces application to exit to a specified location.
Ex. 1: Forces the "my_form" application to start in the addition mode.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "start", "new");
Ex. 2: Doesn't allow the "my_form" application make addition of new registers.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "add", "off");
Ex. 3: Sets "my_field" on the application "my_form" (readonly attribute) to "true"

dinamically.
sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Ex. 4: Shows "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_on", "my_field");
Ex. 5: Forces the "my_grid" application to start by filter.

sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "start", "filter");
Ex. 6: Forces the "my_grid" application to show 20 lines.

sc_apl_conf("my_grid", "rows", "20");
Ex. 7: Hides "my_field" on the application "my_form" dinamically.

sc_apl_conf("my_form", "field_display_off", "my_field");
Ex. 8: Use the button on the toolbar menu.

if ({sc_menu_item} == "btn_1")
{
sc_apl_conf("form_customer", "start", "new");
}
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form Control Form

application application application application application application
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_apl_status("Application", "Status")
Used to control the security access. These macros activate/deactivate the applications
that a user has acess to.
Application: Is the name or the variable that contains the name of the application to be
activated/deactivated.
Status: Is the value or variable that contains the value to be attributed to the application.
The values are: "on" to activate and "off" to deactivate.
Ex. 1:
sc_apl_status ('atu_cad', 'off');
Ex. 2:
sc_apl_status ({var_name_appl}, {var_status});
Macro Scope

onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_appmenu_add_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Adds dinamically an item to a menu application.
It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the
macro sc_appmenu_create.
Parameter Description
Menu_name Application menu name.
Id_item Menu item id.
Id_Parent Parent menu item id. For roots the null/empty value is passed.
Label Menu item description.
Aplication Menu item URL or application name
Parameters String with parameters to pass to the menu item application.
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor
Icon Path to icon used in menu item.
Hint Descriptive hint to menu item.
Target Target for menu item link. ("_self" to use the same window, "_blank" to a
new one and "_parent" to exit the window.
Ex. 1: Creates a menu named menu_main.

sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Ex. 2: Adds a on the menu_main the the item_1 named Category.

sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_1','','Category','');
Ex. 3: Adds a on the menu_main (item_2) the the item_1 named Category linked to
the form_category.
sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category Form','form_category');
Macro Scope
Menu application Tree menu

onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_create("Menu_Name")
This macro initializes the array used in the dimanically creation of the menu application. It
must be informed the menu application name as parameter.
This macro must be used in control events or onload menu event.
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_create('menu_main');
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_exist_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Verify if a menu item exists and returns true or false.
menu_name Menu application name
id_item Menu item id
Ex. 1:
if(sc_appmenu_exist_item('menu_main', 'item_2')){
sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
Form','form_category');
}
else{
sc_appmenu_add_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_remove_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item")
Remove dinamically a menu item.
To use this macro it is necessary to execute the macro sc_appmenu_create before.
ParÃ¢metro DescriÃ§Ã£o
menu_name Menu
application Ex. 1:
name sc_appmenu_remove_item('menu_main','item_2');
id_item Menu item id
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_reset("Menu_Name")
This macro resets the array used in the dynamic creation of a menu application.
This macro is expecting the menu application name as the single parameter.
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_reset('menu_main');
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_appmenu_update_item("Menu_Name", "Id_Item", "Id_Parent", "Label", "Aplication", "Parameters", "Icon", "Hint", "Target")
Updates an application menu item dinamically
It is only possible to use this macro when there is an array created before by the
macro sc_appmenu_create.
It is only possible to use this macro on items created before by the macro
sc_appmenu_add_item.
menu_name Application menu item name
id_item Application menu item id
id_parent Application menu item parent id. For roots the null/empty value is passed.
Label Application menu item description.
Aplication Menu item URL or application name
Parameters String with parameter to pass to the application menu item
Ex.: param1=valor;param2=valor
Icon Icone path used in menu item.
Hint Descriptive Hint for menu item.
Target Target for menu item link
Ex. 1:
sc_appmenu_update_item('menu_main','item_2','item_1','Category
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_begin_trans("Connection")
This macro starts a set of transactions in the database.
In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database
update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or
onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the
connection is the same of the application.
In the other cases, if the user wish to make transaction control, must begin with this macro
and finish with the "sc_commit_trans()" macro to confirm the updates or
"sc_rollback_trans" to cancel the transactions.
The "connection" parameter is optional, necessary only if the command is executed in a

different database from the specified application.
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form application Control Form Men
application application application application application appl
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onAp
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onEx
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLo
OnFocus onHeader onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onAfterDelete onClick
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete onAfterInsertAll onRefresh
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onValidateFailure
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSuccess
onLoad onBeforeDeleteAll
onRefresh onBeforeInsert
onValidate onBeforeInsertAll
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdate
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_block_display(Block_Name, on/off)
Dynamically determines the display fields of a specific block.
By default all the blocks are displayed ("on" condition).
Ex. 1:
if ({type_customeri} == "personal")
{
sc_block_display(company, off);
}
else
{
sc_block_display(personal, off);
}
Obs: In grids, this macro only works with "slide" orientation.
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control

Form
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onScriptInit onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onLoad onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onRefresh onAfterUpdateAll
onValidate onScriptInit
onValidateFailure onLoad
onValidateSuccess onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_copy
Available when the "Copy" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
ScriptCase events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_copy)
sc_message("Record copied successfully!");
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application

onScriptInit onScriptInit
onLoad onLoad
sc_btn_delete
Available when the "Delete" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_delete)
{
sc_error_message("Unable to delete this record");
}
Macro Scope

onValidate onValidate
onValidateFailure onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_disable('button_id', 'on/off')
This macros is used to disable or enable buttons from a Menu application.
Ex:
sc_btn_disable('btn_2', 'off');
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit onLoad
onLoad
sc_btn_display("Button_Name","on/off")
Activate toolbars buttons on the application in execution time.
Button_Name: Is the variable name that contains the name of the button to be
activated/deactivate.
Buttons Name (Grid):
Buttons Description
Name
first Goes to the first page of the grid.
back Goes to the previous page of the grid.
forward Goes to the next page of the grid.
last Goes to the last page of the grid.
filter Displays the "Filter" button.
pdf Generates colored PDF.
det_pdf Generates detail PDF.
pdfbw Generates black and white PDF.
xls Generates the XLS.
xml Generates the XML.
cvs Generates the CVS.
rtf Generates the RTF.
word Generates the Word.
print Displays the "Print" button in the grid.
det_print Displays the "Print" Button in the detail.
summary Displays the "Summary" button in the grid.
new Displays the "New" button. (if the application has link for it, or if the form
is running in the grid iframe)
insert Displays the "Include" button of the form. (only for forms running in
gridÂ´s iframe)
update Displays the "Update" button of the form. (only for forms running in
gridÂ´s iframe)
delete Displays the "Delete" button of the form (only for forms running in
gridÂ´s iframe)
qsearch Displays the "Quick Search" button in the grid.
groupby Displays the "Group By" button in the grid.
dynsearch Displays the "Dynamic Search" button in the grid.
gridsave Displays the "Save Grid" button in the grid.
Buttons Name (Form):
Buttons Description
Name
first Goes to the first page of the form.
back Goes to the previous page of the form.
forward Goes to the next page of the form.
last Goes to the last page of the form.
new Displays the "New" button on the form, if its off the form will starts in
insertion mode.
insert Displays the "Include" button of the form.
update Displays the "Update" button of the form.
delete Displays the "Delete" button of the form.
copy Displays the "Copy" button of the form.
qsearch Displays the "Quick Search" button of the form.
pdf Generates PDF file from form.
print Open the form in print mode.
dynsearch Displays the "Dynamic Search" button in the grid.
Buttons Name (Control):
Buttons Description
Name
ok Displays the "Ok" button on a control.
exit Displays the "Exit" button on a control.
facebook Displays the "Facebook" button on a control.
twitter Displays the "Twitter" button on a control.
google Displays the "Google+" button on a control.
paypal Displays the "PayPal" button on a control.
OBS. Remember that the buttons name must be lowercase.
Ex. 1:
sc_btn_display ('new', 'off');
Ex. 2: If we use variables or fields ({Fields} or [Global_Variables]) as parameters its

not allowed the use of the quotes or single quotes.
sc_btn_display ({variavle_button}, 'off');
Macro Scope
calendar application chart application Grid application Form application Control Form
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onScriptInit onAfterDelete onScriptInit
onAfterInsert onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onRefresh
onScriptInit onAfterInsertAll onValidate
onLoad onAfterUpdate onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_btn_insert
Available when the "Add" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the ScriptCase
events, allowing especific programmation in run time.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_insert)
{
sc_message("Record inserted successfully");
Macro Scope

sc_btn_new
Available when the "Add New" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_new)
{
{My_Date} = date('Y/m/d');
}
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_btn_update
Available when the "Save" button is clicked. Can be tested and used inside the
Ex. 1:
if (sc_btn_update)
{
sc_error_message("Record updated successfully");
}
Macro Scope

sc_calc_dv(Digit, Rest, Value, Module, Weights, Type)
Calculate verifier (checksum) digits.
Digit Variable that will recieve the calculated digit.
Rest Variable that will recieve the "rest" of the division.
Value Value or Variable to calculate the digit.
Module Value or Variable containing the module to be used. Default value is
module "11".
Weights Value or Variable containing the weights to be used. Default value is the
"98765432" values.
Type Value or Variable containing the parcels calculation to be used: 1 to normal
sum of the parcels values and 2 to the sum of each algorithm of the parcels.
Default value is "1".
Ex. 1:
sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 11, 98765432, 1);
Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x3=18 ; 5x4=20 ; 4x5=20 ; 3x6=18 ; 2x7=14 ; 1x8=8
Parcels sum : 14 + 18 + 20 + 20 + 18 + 14 + 8 = 112
Rest of the division of 112 / 11 = 2
Digit: 11 - 2 = 9
Ex. 2:
sc_calc_dv({my_dv}, {my_rest}, 1234567, 10, 12, 2);
Parcels calculation: 7x2= 14 ; 6x1=6 ; 5x2=10 ; 4x1=4 ; 3x2=6 ; 2x1=2 ; 1x2=2
Parcels sum: 1 + 4 + 6 + 1 + 0 + 4 + 6 + 2 + 2 = 26
Rest of the division of 26 / 10 = 6
Digit: 10 - 6 = 4
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form application Control Form

application application application application application
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onClick onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange onFooter onApplicationInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange
OnClick onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationIn
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onNavigate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onApplicationInit onRecord onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onValidate
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateFailu
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSucc
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_changed({Field_Name})
Macro to check if the field name have been changed.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_changed({my_field}))
{
Echo "Filed have been changed";
}
Macro Scope

Form
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdate onRefresh
sc_change_connection("Old_Connection", "New_Connection")
This macro dynamically change the application connections.
Ex. 1: To change the connections:

sc_change_connection ( "Old_Connection", "New_Connection"; "Old_Connection02",
"New_Connection02");
Allows to change more then one application/connection in one command. Multiple

connections can be passed as parameters that must be separated by ";" (semicolon).
Ex. 2: To use variables or change the main connection as follows:

sc_change_connection ([Global_Connetion], [Test_Connection]);
Ex. 3: To delete the exchange:
sc_reset_change_connection ();
The exchanges take effect in the following applications
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Form Control ReportPDF

application application application application application Form application
onExecute onScriptInit onHeader onApplicationInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onHeader
onLoad onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad onLoadAll onScriptInit
onLoadRecord onRecord
sc_commit_trans("Connection")
This macro has the objective to confirm a transaction set in the database.
In form applications, the events that can run this macro is dependent of the database
update (onAfterInsert, onAfterUpdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onBeforeUpdate or
onBeforeDelete), they are automatically protected through transaction control, since the
connection is the same of the application.
If the user, in any of these events, use an application redirectioning (macro "sc_redir")
must before the redirect, use this macro to guarantee the transactions previously effected.
The "connection" parameter is optional, being necessary, only, if the command is

executed in a different database specified to the application.
Macro Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_concat()
With this macro you can concat fields on select for every database.
Example(Edition Lookup):
SELECT field1, sc_concat(field2, " - ", field3) FROM table
SELECT field1, sc_concat(field2, " | ", field3) FROM table
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form application Control Form Menu
application application application application application applic
onExecute OnClick onFooter onClick onFilterInit OnClick onBlur onApp
OnFocus onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh OnFocus onChange onExe
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave onAfterDelete onClick onLoa
onAfterInsert onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onFocus
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterInsert onClick
onBeforeDelete onNavigate onAfterInsertAll onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onRecord onAfterUpdate onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onRefresh
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidate
onLoad onBeforeDeleteAll onValidateFailure
onRefresh onBeforeInsert onValidateSuccess
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_confirm("Message")
Valid only in the PHP programming code that runs when called through a toolbar button.
This macro is used to confirm that the action must be really executed, preventing
mistakes.
Ex. 1:
sc_confirm ("Do you really wish to execute this action??");
Macro Scope
Form application Control

Form
onClick onClick
sc_connection_edit("Connetion_Name", $arr_conn)
1Âº Parameter: Connection name to be edited.
2Âº Parameter: Array of items containing the connection information to be edited. Check
out the indices of the array:
Indice Description Example

['server'] Database server (host) $arr_conn['server'] = "127.0.0.1"
['user'] Database username $arr_conn['user'] = "root"
['password'] Database password $arr_conn['password'] =
"secretpass123"
['database'] Database name used in the $arr_conn['database'] =
connection "sc_samples"
['persistent'] Defines if the connection is $arr_conn['persistent'] = "Y" / "N"
persistent or not
['encoding'] Configure the connection encoding $arr_conn['encoding'] = "utf8"
Note:Is not required to use all the indices in the array, we can pass only the required
ones.
Example:
$arr_conn = array();
$arr_conn['user'] = "admin2";
$arr_conn['password'] = "admin2pass";
$arr_conn['database'] = "sc_samples2";
sc_connection_edit("sc_connection", $arr_conn);
Macro Scope

onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange onFooter onFilterInit Onchange onChange
OnClick onHeader onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onScriptInit onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit
onAfterInsert onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onApplicationInit onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_connection_new("Connection_Name", $arr_conn)
When used, the macro creates a new connection with the information inserted in its
parameters. This connection is available throughout the current session Scriptcase and
cease to exist when the session is closed.
1Âº Parameter: Connection name.
Note: If there is a connection created within the Scriptcase with the same name, this
macro has no effect. Connections created within the Scriptcase prevail. If you want to edit
an existing connection, see the documentation for the macro sc_connection_edit.
2Âº Parameter: Array of items containing the connection information. Check out the
indices of the array:
Indice Description Example

['drive'] Driver of the database used for the $arr_conn['drive'] = "oci8"
connection (see table below)
['server'] Database server (host) $arr_conn['server'] =
"127.0.0.1"
['user'] Database username $arr_conn['user'] = "root"
['password'] Database password $arr_conn['password'] =
"secretpass123"
['database'] Database name used in the connection $arr_conn['database'] =
"sc_samples"
['persistent'] Defines if the connection is persistent $arr_conn['persistent'] = "Y" /
or not "N"
['encoding'] Configure the connection encoding $arr_conn['encoding'] = "utf8"
Note: It is required that all items are filled, with the exception of items ['persistent'] and
['encoding'].
See below the driver's list:
Driver DescriÃ§Ã£o
access MS Access
ado_access MS Access ADO
odbc Generic ODBC
db2 DB2
db2_odbc DB2 Native ODBC
odbc_db2 DB2 Generic ODBC
odbc_db2v6 DB2 Generic ODBC 6 or Lower
firebird Firebird
borland_ibase Interbase 6.5 or Higher
ibase Interbase
pdo_informix Informix PDO
informix Informix
informix72 Informix 7.2 or Lower
ado_mssql MSSQL Server ADO
pdo_sqlsrv MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV PDO
mssqlnative MSSQL Server NATIVE SRV
odbc_mssql MSSQL Server ODBC
mssql MSSQL Server
pdo_mysql MySQL PDO
mysqlt Mysql (Transactional)
mysql MySQL (Non-Transactional)
oci805 Oracle 8.0.5 or Higher
odbc_oracle Oracle ODBC
oci8 Oracle 8
oci8po Oracle 8 Portable
oracle Oracle 7 or Lower
postgres7 PostgreSQL 7 or Higher
pdo_pgsql PostgreSQL PDO
postgres64 PostgreSQL 6.4 or Higher
postgres PostgreSQL 6.3 or Lower
pdosqlite SQLite PDO
sqlite SQLite
sybase Sybase
Example:
$arr_conn = array();
$arr_conn['drive'] = "mysqlt";
$arr_conn['server'] = "127.0.0.1";
$arr_conn['user'] = "root";
$arr_conn['password'] = "pass123";
$arr_conn['database'] = "sc_samples";
$arr_conn['persistent'] = "Y";
$arr_conn['encoding'] = "utf8";
sc_connection_new("new_conn_mysql", $arr_conn);
Macro Scope

onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_date(Date, "Format", "Operator", D, M, Y)
This macro has the aim to calculate the increment or decrement of dates. For its use are
necessary some parameters as follows:
Date Date field that contains the date to be modified.
Format Formatting thats the date field is.
Operator "+" for increment and "-" for decrement.
D Number of days to increment or decrement.
M Number of months to increment or decrement.
Y Number of Years to increment or decrement.
Ex. 1:
{birthdate} = sc_date({birthdate}, "dd/mm/yyyy", "+", 30, 0, 0);
Ex. 2:
$new_date = sc_date({birthdate}, "yyyy-mm-dd", "-", 15, 3, 2);
Ex. 3:
{inclusion_dt} = sc_date(date('Ymd'), "yyyymmdd", "-", 0, 1, 1);
OBS: To be certified of the date format, before use the function, try it in any event:
echo "form_date =". {name of the field date};
Macro Scope
OnClick onFooter onApplicationInit onFilterInit OnClick onChange
OnFocus onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh OnFocus onClick
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave onAfterDelete onFocus
onAfterInsert onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onApplication
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onAfterInsert onClick
onApplicationInit onNavigate onAfterInsertAll onScriptInit
onBeforeDelete onRecord onAfterUpdate onLoadAll
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onRefresh
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidate
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateFai
onLoad onBeforeDeleteAll onValidateSu
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_conv({Field_Date}, "Input_Format", "Output_Format")
This macro converts the date field passed as parameter with an input format to another
field with an output format.
A or Y Used to reference years.
M Used to reference Months.
D Used to reference Days.
Db_Format Used to get the Dadabase date format.
Ex. 1: Converts the date from "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the "yyyymmdd" format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "aaaammdd");
Ex. 2: Converts the date from the database native format to "dd/mm/yyyy" format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "db_format", "dd/mm/aaaa");
Ex. 3: Converts the date from the "dd/mm/yyyy" format to the Database native
format.
{field_date} = sc_date_conv({field_date}, "dd/mm/aaaa", "db_format");
Macro Scope

onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange onHeader onApplicationInit onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange
OnClick onScriptInit onFooter onFilterSave OnClick onClick
OnFocus onGroupBy onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onHeader onAfterDelete onClick
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onNavigate onAfterInsert onLoadAll
onBeforeDelete onRecord onAfterInsertAll onRefresh
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2")
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) in days.
Date1 Date1 value or variable.
Format Date1 Value or Variable containing the date format stored on Date1.
Ex. 1:
{amount_days} = sc_date_dif({date1}, "aaaa-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/aaaa");
Ex. 2:
{amount_days} = sc_date_dif("2000-05-01", "aaaa-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/aaaa");
{amount_days} would be equal to -1451 (days)
Note: Formats can be different but must be in days, months and years.
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplication
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateFai
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSu
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_dif_2({Date1}, "Format Date1", {Date2}, "Format Date2", Option)
Calculates the difference between two dates (passed as parameters) returning the
amount of days, months and years.
The result is returned in an array structure, where the index 0 have the amount of days,
the index 1 have the amount of months and the index 2 have the amount of years.
Option 1 = Doesn't consider the initial day; 2 = Considers the initial day.
Ex. 1:
{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ({date1}, "yyyy-mm-dd", {date2}, "mm/dd/yyyy", 1);
{dif_days} = {differences[0]};
{dif_months} = {differences[1]};
{dif_years} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2:
{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy",
1);
{differences[0]} = 20 (days)
{differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years)
Ex. 3: Using the option 2

{differences} = sc_date_dif_2 ("2000-05-01", "yyyy-mm-dd", "04/21/2004", "mm/dd/yyyy",
2);
{differences[0]} = 21 (days)
{differences[1]} = 11 (months)
{differences[2]} = 3 (years).
Note: Formats between the two dates can be different but it must have days, months and
years
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplication
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_date_empty({Field_Date})
This macro checks if a date field is empty.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_date_empty({my_date}) )
{
sc_error_message("Invalid Date");
}
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form application Control ReportP

application application application application application Form applicat
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onHeader onClick onFilterRefresh ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onHeade
Onchange onApplicationInit onFilterValidate Onchange onChange onRecor
OnClick onFooter OnClick onClick
OnFocus onGroupBy OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onHeader onAfterDelete onLoadAll
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onRefresh
onAfterUpdate onNavigate onAfterInsert
onBeforeDelete onRecord onAfterInsertAll
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_decode({My_Field})
Returns, the encrypted field or variable, to its original value.
Ex. 1: Using a local variable:

{my_field} = sc_decode($field_cript);
Ex. 2: Using an user variable:

$my_var = sc_decode($field_cript);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the cryptography algorithm integrity (it is an open
source algorithm)
Macro Scope

OnClick onHeader onHeader onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onNavigate onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplication
onAfterInsert onRecord onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_encode({My_Field})
Returns the field or variable with the content encrypted.
Ex. 1: Encrypting a local variable:

$field_cript = sc_encode({my_field});
Ex. 2: Encrypting an user variable:

$field_cript = sc_encode($my_var);
Note: Netmake isn't responsible by the encrypting algorithm integrity, (The algorithm
provided is open source).
Macro Scope

OnClick onHeader onHeader onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onNavigate onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplication
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_continue("Event")
This macro deactivates the Scriptcase standard database error treatment message for
the event passed as parameter allowing it to be substituted by the programmer
customized error treatment.
It can be used in along with variable: {sc_erro_delete}, {sc_erro_insert} and/or

{sc_erro_update}
The events to be passed as parameter are: insert, delete or update.
Ex. 1: Using on the event onDelete for the message returned by mssql, trigger
treatment, which cancels the record exclusion, displays a error message in the format
[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase the record.
sc_error_continue("delete");
if (!empty({sc_error_delete}))
{
$tmp = strrpos({sc_error_delete}, "]");
if ($tmp !== false)
{
{sc_error_delete} = substr({sc_error_delete}, $tmp 1);
}
sc_error_message({sc_error_delete});
sc_error_exit;
}
Macro Scope

Form
onBeforeDelete onBeforeDelete onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onBeforeInsert
onBeforeUpdate onBeforeUpdate
sc_error_delete
This variable returns a string with a database error message, which occurs by trying to
exclude a record.
It is used when there is a need to treat these messages.
Like for example, in case of database validations via triggers or procedures that they
return messages.
Ex. 1: Content of the variable {sc_erro_delete}, returning an error message generated

by database trigger using
MsSQL.â??[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't erase this
register.â??
Note: To access the database return error, sees the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete onAfterDelete
sc_error_exit(URL, "Target") or (My_Application, "Target")
Interrupts the application execution, if there is error message generated through "
sc_error_message" macro, displaying the error messages. If informed an URL or the
name of an Application, an "OK" button is displayed, bellow the error messages to redirect
the processing to the informed URL/Application.
The target parameter is opitional.
Ex. 1: Displays only the error messages.

sc_error_exit();
Ex. 2: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to URL.
sc_error_exit(http://www.mysite.com);
Ex. 3: Display the error messages and the "OK" button to redirect to Application,
opening in another window.
sc_error_exit(my_application, "_blank");
Macro Scope
calendar application Search Form application Control Form

application
ajaxFieldonBlur onFilterValidate ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
onAfterDelete onAfterDelete onScriptInit
onBeforeDelete onAfterInsertAll onValidate
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate onValidateFailure
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll onValidateSuccess
onValidate onBeforeDelete
onValidateFailure onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_insert
This variable returns a string with the database error, that occurs when adding a record. It
is used when is neede to treat these messages. For example, in case of database
validations via triggers or procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_insert}, returning an error message generated by database

trigger the using mssql
â??[Microsoft] [ODBC SQL Server Driver] [SQL Server] You can't add this register.â??
Note: To access the return of the database error, see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope

onAfterInsert onAfterInsert
sc_error_message("Text")
This macro generates an error messages.
In "Form and Control" applications, the messages are presented together with other
error messages found in the application, except when using the "sc_error_exit" macro.
In "Grid and Menu" applications the messages only will be presented through the "
sc_error_exit" macro.
Ex. 1:
if ({discount} > 0.10 && [glo_usr] == 'operator')
{
sc_error_message("Discounting of " . {discount} . " above of the allowed one");
}
In this example, if the value in the discount field is over 0.10 and the user try to add or
save this record, the operation is finished and the error message is presented.The
command must finish with ");" (close parentheses and semicolon) used as delimiter for the
macro interpreter.
Macro Scope
calendar application Search Form application Control Form

application
ajaxFieldonBlur onFilterValidate ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
onValidate onBeforeDelete
onValidateFailure onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onNavigate
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_error_update
This variable returns a string with a database error message that occurs when updating a
record. It is used when there is a need to treat these messages. For example, in case of
database validations via triggers or procedures that return message.
Ex. 1: Variable {sc_erro_update}, returning an error message generate by a database

trigger using mssql.
â??[Microsoft][ODBC SQL Server Driver][SQL Server] You can't updatethis record.â??
Note: To have access the return of database error see the macro "sc_error_continue".
Macro Scope
onAfterUpdate onAfterUpdate
sc_exec_sql("SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows to condition the circumstances thats the SQL commands are executed.
The "Connection" parameter is optional. Required only, if the command is executed in a

data base different from the application.
Ex. 1:
if (sc_after_delete) {
sc_exec_sql("delete from mytable where key = {key_ant}");
}
Macro Scope
Onchange onHeader onGroupBy onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onEx
OnClick onScriptInit onHeader onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLo
OnFocus onScriptInit onFilterValidate OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onNavigate onAfterDelete onClick
onAfterInsert onRecord onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onLoadAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_exit(Option)
This macro can be used in the ScriptCase events and created button and may return
values/process after the execution.
Option Description
sc_exit() Returns to the previous application without display anything.
sc_exit(ok) Displays a window with an OK button adn returns to the previous
application.
sc_exit(sel) Doesnâ??t display the window with an OK button and returns to the current
application, repeat the application select.
sc_exit(ref) Doesn't display the window with an OK button refresh data and returns to
the current application.
sc_exit(ok,ref) Same of the sc_exit(ref) function; however, display the OK button.
sc_exit(ok,sel) Same of the sc_exit(sel) function; however, display the OK button.
This option is only valid for Form and Control Applications.
Opton Description
sc_exit() Doesn't complete transactions in database.
sc_exit(c) Commit pending transactions.
sc_exit(r) Rollback pending transactions.
Macro Scope

Form
onScriptInit onClick onClick
sc_field_color("Field", "Color")
This macros its used to change/restore a grid field text color dynamically.
Ex. 1: Change the grid text field â??customer_idâ?? color.

sc_field_color ("customerid", "#33FF66");
Ex. 2: Change the "value_orderâ??field text color, if the value is greater that 1000.
Otherwise, use the default color.
if ({value_order} > 1000)
{
sc_field_color ("value_order", "#33FF66");
}
else
{
sc_field_color ("value_order", "");
}
Ex. 3: Using a local variable.

sc_field_color ("customerid", {fld_color});
Ex. 4: Using a global variable.

sc_field_color ("customerid", [glo_color]);
Macro Scope
Grid application ReportPDF

application
onRecord onRecord
sc_field_disabled("Field_Name = True/False", "Parameter")
This macro its used to block a field to get any data that would be typed on it.
Fields that its going to be blocked should be followed by the option "true" (default) or
"false".
The parameter its optional, "I" its used only to block de addition of new records, "U" to
block only the update, in case of the parameter has not been informed the scriptcase will
use both options.
Ex. 1: Blocks only one field for addition and update.

sc_field_disabled("Field_01");
Ex. 2: Unblocking a field for addtion and update.

sc_field_disabled("Field_02=false");
Ex. 3: Blocks several fields, only for update.

sc_field_disabled("Field_01; Field_02; Field_03", "U");
Ex. 4: Combination of block and unblock of several fields, for adition and update.
sc_field_disabled("Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true");
Macro Scope
calendar application Form application Control ReportPDF

Form application
onLoad onLoad onLoadAll onHeader
onNavigate
sc_field_disabled_record("Field_Name = True/False", "Parametre")
This macro has the objective to block the typing on determined fields in the lines of the
Multiple Record form, Editable Grid and Editable Grid View.
Fields that are suppose to be blocked should be applied the options, "true" ( To block) or
"false" ( to unblock). If not informed, the default value is "true".
The optional parameter is using the â??Iâ??

to block while inserting a new record and â??Uâ??
to
block while updating a record. If not informed, Scriptcase will block on both occasions by
default.
Ex. 1: Blocking the field while including and updating.
sc_field_disabled_record(â??Field_01");
Ex. 2: Unblocking the field while including and updating.

sc_field_disabled_record(â??Field_02=false");
Ex. 3: Blocking the various fields only when updating.

sc_field_disabled_record(â??Field_01; Field_02; Field_03", "U");
Ex. 4: Combination of blocking and unblocking various fields while including and
updating.
sc_field_disabled_record("Field_01=true; Field_02=false; Field_03=true");
The macro can also work within a condition, blocking a specific field on the record line.
Example 1:
if ({Filed_01} == 1)
{
sc_field_disabled_record("Filed_03");
}
Example 2:
switch(trim([arr_apps][ {app_name} ]))
{
case 'form':
break;
case 'calendar':
sc_field_disabled_record("priv_export; priv_print");
break;
case 'cons':
sc_field_disabled_record("priv_insert; priv_delete; priv_update");
break;
default:
sc_field_disabled_record("priv_insert; priv_delete; priv_update; priv_export; priv_print");
break;
}
Macro Scope
Form application
onLoadRecord
sc_field_display({My_Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically display a specific field.

By default all the fields are display ("on" condition").
Ex. 1:
if ({tp_customeri} == "personal")
{
sc_field_display({company_name}, off);
}
else
{
sc_field_display({personal_name}, off);
}
Macro Scope
calendar chart Grid Form application Control Form ReportPDF

application application application application
ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onScriptInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onScriptInit
Onchange onHeader Onchange onChange
OnClick onScriptInit OnClick onClick
onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidateSuccess onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_init_off(Field1, Field2,...)
This macro is intended to inhibit the query fields on the initial load.
Fields inhibited by this macro can be enabled by using the "Columns" button.
Ex 01:
sc_field_init_off ({orderID}, {TotalValue});
Macro Scope
chart application ReportPDF

application
sc_field_readonly({Field}, on/off)
This macro dynamically set a form field attribute to 'ReadOnly'. Use this macro only to do
it at 'runtime'. Otherwise set this parameter on / off on the form interface. section "Read-
Only".
The on/off parameter its opitional, used by an ajax event to define if a field its going to be
read-only (On) or read-only (Off).
Ex 1: To set a field as read only even when the form is in "Addition mode":
if (sc_btn_new)
{
sc_field_readonly({my_field});
}
Ex. 2: To set a field as read only dynamically use:

sc_field_readonly({my_field});
Macro Scope

onValidateFailure onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidateSuccess onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_field_style({My_Field}, "Background-Color", "Size", "Color", "Family", "Weight")
This macro allows to modify the grid field style dinamically.
Field Name
Background-Color (optional) Field cell background Color
Size (optional) Field font size
Color (optional) Font Color
Family (optional) Font family
Weight (optional) Font weight
Ex. 1:
sc_field_style({my_field}, '#33FF99', '15px', '#000000', 'Arial, sans-serif', 'bold');
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
sc_format_num({My_Field}, "Group_Symb", "Dec_Symb", "Amount_Dec", "Fill_Zeros", "Side_Neg", "Currency_Symb", "Side_Currency_Symb")
This macro its used to format numerical values.
My_Field Variable or field to format (The return is in the next variable).
Group_Symb Integer values grouping symbol.
Dec_Symb Decimals separator symbol.
Amount_Dec Number of decimals to be displayed.
Fill_Zeros Complete decimals with zeros (fill in) (S = yes and N = no).
Side_Neg Negative sign position. (1 = left and 2 = right)
Currency_Symb Monetary symbol to be displayed.
Side_Currency_Symb Currency symbol position. (1 = left and 2 = right).
Ex. 1: Formatting an integer.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', '');
Input value = 001234567890
Output value = 1.234.567.890
Ex. 2: Formatting a negative value and truncating decimals.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', '', 0, 'N', '1', '');
Input value = 0012345678.90-
Output value = -12.345.678
Ex. 3: Formatting a value with 4 decimals and filling with zeros.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 4, 'S', '1', '');
Input value = 0012345678.9
Output value = 12.345.678,9000
Ex. 4: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros and using monetary
symbol.
sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', 'US$');
Input value = 0012345678.9
Output value = US$ 12.345.678,90
Ex. 5: Formatting a value with 2 decimals, filling with zeros.

sc_format_num({my_value}, '.', ',', 2, 'S', '1', '');
Input value = .9
Output value = 0,90
Macro Scope

OnFocus onScriptInit onHeader onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationIn
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onValidateFailu
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateSucc
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_format_num_region({My_Field}, "Qtde_Dec", "Insert_Zeros", "Monetary_Sym")
This macro has the objective to format numbers, using the regional settings
My_Field Variable or field that has a value to be formated (if the value is 0
the result will be the same as the variable).
Qtde_Dec Amount of decimals that'll be displayed.
Insert_Zeros Complete with the non exisiting decimals (Y = yes and N = no).
Monetary_Sym Display monetary symbol (Y = yes and N = no).
Ex. 1: Formating a value with 2 decimal spaces, inserting the zeros and the
monetary value.
sc_format_num_region({my_value}, "2", "Y", "Y");
Input value = 9
Output value = R$0,90
Macro Scope
Blank Grid Search Form application Control Form Menu Tree menu
application application application application
onExecute onClick onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplicationInit onApplication
onApplicationInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange onExecute onExecute
onFooter onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick onLoad onLoad
onGroupBy onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationInit
onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onNavigate onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onRecord onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRefresh
onAfterUpdateAll onValidate
onApplicationInit onValidateFailure
onBeforeDelete onValidateSuccess
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_form_show'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically display or not a form.

By default, the form is displayed ("on" condition).
Ex. 1: Doesn't display the form.

sc_form_show = 'off';
Macro Scope

Form
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit
onLoad onLoad onLoadAll
sc_getfield('myField')
This macro is used to assign objects (that represent the field's form) to a javascript
variable, allowing the user to access the object properties. This macro will run on control
and forms at the javascript events and methods.
EX:
Showing the value of the "client" field of a form cli_js = sc_getfield('cliente'); alert
(cli_js.value);
Macro Scope
sc_get_groupby_rule()
This macro is used to retrieve the name of the groupby rule that is being used at this
moment. The return value is a String containing the name of the rule.
Ex:
if (sc_get_groupby_rule() == "rule1")
[title] = "Sales X Region";
Macro Scope
chart application Grid application

onFooter onScriptInit
onHeader onNavigate
onScriptInit onRecord
sc_get_language
This macro returns the abbreviation of the language used.
Ex. 1:
$my_language = sc_get_language();
Macro Scope

onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onApplicationInit onFooter onApplicationInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur
Onchange onFooter onScriptInit onFilterInit Onchange onChange
OnClick onHeader onNavigate onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onScriptInit onRecord onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onValidateFailure
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateSuccess
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_regional
This macro returns the abbreviation of the regional settings used.
Ex. 1:
$my_regional = sc_get_regional();
Macro Scope

onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_get_theme
This macro returns the application theme used.
Ex. 1:
$my_theme = sc_get_theme();
Macro Scope

onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSucces
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_groupby_label("My_Field")
This Macro dynamically modify the field label displayed in group by lines.
Ex. 1:
sc_groupby_label('state') = "state grouping";
Ex. 2:
sc_groupby_label('balance') = "balance total";
Macro Scope
Grid application
onGroupBy
sc_hide_groupby_rule('group1', 'grop2', 'group3')
This macro is used to disable Group By rules in execution time.
The Group By rules ID should be informed as parameters in the macro.
Ex:
if( [usr_login_group] == 'seller' ){
sc_hide_groupby_rule('rule_1', 'rule_2');
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit onScriptInit
sc_image(Image01.jpg)
This macro its used to copy images in some events or Javascript commands to load
images to an application.
All images used in the applications are automatically copied to each application.
Ex. 1:
sc_image (img1.gif, img2.jpg);
Note: The images must exist in the development environment images directory
(../devel/conf/sys/img/img/).
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form Control Form Menu

application application application application application application applicatio
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFooter onFilterInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplica
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onClick onScriptInit onLoad
onLoad onScriptInit onLoadAll
onValidate onLoad onValidateFailure
onLoadRecord onValidateSuccess
onValidate
sc_include("File", "Source")
The Scriptcase allows the user to catalogue his PHP scripts to use in various applications.
To catalogue the scripts go to the ScripCase main menu at "Tools > Library" and use
the "upload" option existing in the interface.
When a script is catalogued, the user has the option of the context choice where it will be
stored, global level (Scriptcase), group level or user level.
- Public: All the projects will have acess.
- Project: Only the project users (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
- User: Only the user (the one's that will be loged at that time) will have acess.
The sc_include macro, the user must inform the script name that will be included and
the source.
- Script Name: Script name to be included.
The Source context that the script was saved, that could be:
- Sys or Blank: Scriptcase global level.
- Prj: Group level.
- Usr: User level.
Ex. 1: Including a catalogued script to global level.

sc_include(my_script.php);
Ex. 2: Including a catalogued script to the group level.

sc_include(my_script.php, grp);
Ex. 3: Including a catalogued script to the user level.

sc_include(my_script.php, usr);
Macro Scope

Onchange onHeader onNavigate onFilterInit Onchange onChange
OnClick onScriptInit onRecord onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onApplicationInit onAfterInsertAll onRefresh
onBeforeDelete onAfterUpdate onValidate
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_include_lib("Lib1", "Lib2", ...)
This macro its used to select dynamically the application libraries.
PHP JavaScript
Libraries Libraries
tcpdf Jquery
fpdf_html jquery_thickbox
excel jquery_blockui
rtf tiny_mce
- jquery_touch_punch
Ex. 1:
sc_include_lib ("tcpdf");
$pdf=new TCPDF();
$pdf->AddPage();
$pdf->SetFont('Arial','B',16);
$pdf->Cell(40,10,'Hello World!');
$pdf->Output();
Macro Scope
Blank Grid application

application
onExecute onScriptInit
sc_include_library("Target", "Library Name", "File", "include_once", "Require")

This macro includes a PHP file from a library in the application. You must have a library
created in Scriptcase to make use of this macro. To create a library, go to "Tools ->
Libraries".
Target Tells you what the scope of the library. Can be "sys" for libraries of Public
scope or "prj" for libraries of Project scope.
Library Name given to the library at the time of creation.
Name
File Absolute path within the library.
include_once Make sure that the file will only be included once. If not informed, this value
(optional) is set as "true".
Require If the file or library does not exist, the application to be executed and
(optional) returns an error. If not informed, the value is set as "true".
Ex: Including a file from a library:

sc_include_library("prj", "phpqrcode", "qrlib.php", true, true);
Macro Scope

Onchange onFooter onRecord onFilterInit Onchange onChange
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_label({My_Field})
This macro its used to modify dynamically the grid form field label.
Ex. 1: Using the field name.
sc_label("Customer") = "Cust Name";
Ex. 2: Using a variable as paramenter.

sc_label({Customer}) = "Cust Name";
Ex. 3: Using a global variable.

sc_label([global_variable]) = "Cust Name";
Macro Scope
calendar chart Grid Form Control ReportPDF

application application application application Form application
onScriptInit onScriptInit onClick ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onScriptInit
onLoad onScriptInit Onchange onChange
onRefresh onNavigate OnClick onClick
OnFocus onFocus
onLoad onLoadAll
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
sc_language
This macro returns the language and regional settings.
Ex. 1:
echo "Language: ".{sc_language};
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form Control Form Men

application application application application application application app
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onA
onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onL
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_ldap_login
$ldapConn = sc_ldap_login($server [, $domain, $user, $password, $dn, $group]);
This macro initiates the connection and bind it to the user credentials. This macro needs
the following parameters:
Server =
Domain =
User =
Password =
DN =
Group =
There are three possible returns:
Macro return Situation

(string)'ldap_connect_error' Connection error with LDAP host/service.
(string)'ldap_bind_error' Authentication error after successfull connection.
(resource) Successful connection and bind.
Macro Scope

onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit
onValidate onValidate onValidate
sc_ldap_logout()
This macro is used to release the connection after using the macro sc_ldap_login.
Ex1:
sc_ldap_logout();
Macro Scope

sc_ldap_search( \$filter = 'all', \$attributes = array() )
Macro to perform searches in the LDAP.
$filter 'all' or 'member':
'all' returns all information that the logged user can see.
'member' returns the information aobut that member
$attributes Array of LDAP filter options.
Ex:
$result = sc_ldap_search($filter, array('mail', 'displayname'));
Macro Scope

sc_link(Column, Application, Parameters, "Hint", "Target", Height, Width)
This macro dynamically creates or modifies links between grid applications and other
applications.
Column: Grid column field name to generate the link.

Application: Application name to establish the link.
Parameters: Parameters required by the called application.
Must be informed "=" (attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by
";" (semicolon).
Hint: Observation or tip displayed when the mouse cursor passes over the link.
Target : Where the application will function call and may be:
Target DescriÃ§Ã£o
"_self" For carrying on the same page (overrides the query);
"_blank" To run on another page (pop-up);
"iframeT" To run in an iframe above the Grid (top);
"iframeL" To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left);
"iframeR" To run in an iframe, the left of the Grid (Left);
"iframeB" To run in an iframe below the Grid (Bot);
"modal" Opens a new window and blocks any interaction in the main window;
In the case of modal target, there are two optional parameters *:
*Height: Set the height of the modal window (default 440);

*Width: Set the width of the modal window (default 630);
Note: If omitted, will be assigned the value "_self".
Ex. 1: Creates a link to the costumer.php application, on the Id field, passing the
global variable [global_costumer] as and the product field (local variable) {Id} to the
costumer.php application:
sc_link(Id, costumer.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}, "Client Data", "_blank");
Ex. 2: Creating a dynamic link to another application depeding on the field valor
{costumer_type} and opening it in a modal.
if ({costumer_type} == "F") {
sc_link (costumer_type, type_f.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Personal Data ",
"modal", 500, 700);
}
else{
sc_link (costumer_type, type_a.php, product=[global_costumer]; Id={Id}," Company Data
", "iframeR");
}
Ex. 3: Creating a link to an URL: in this case, "paramater and target" have no effect.
It will be executed redirecting to a informed URL.
sc_link (my_field, http://www.scriptcase.com, ,"hint of the link");
Macro Scope
Grid application ReportPDF

application
onRecord onRecord
sc_log_add("action", "description")
This macro is intended to add a record to the log table, thereby making the message and /
or the name of the action customizable to the developer. The macro parameters can use
PHP variables.
Ex:
sc_log_add ("access", "Application has been accessed by the user trial");
Macro Scope
Blank calendar application Grid application Form application

application
onExecute onValidate onScriptInit onValidate
sc_log_split({description})
This macro is intended to provide access to the information written in the last insertion in
the log table, allowing the manipulation of the data before and after the record update
returning it in an array mode. The information is stored in the "description" field of the log
table in the string format with delimiters.
Ex:
$arr_description = sc_log_split({description});
Input: -> keys fields Array ( [clientid] => ANTON ) [fields] => Array ( [old] => Array ( [CEP]
=> 50710500 [Address] => Rua Desembargador Joao Paes 657 [City] => Farol [State] =>
RS ) [new] => Array ( [CEP] => 53230630 [Address] => Avenida Presidente Kennedy,
1001 [City] => Peixinhos [State] => PE ) ) )
Macro Scope
Blank calendar application Grid application Form application

application
onExecute onLoad onScriptInit onLoad
sc_lookup(Dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro allows the user to execute SQL commands and returns the result to the
"dataset" variable. The "dataset" structure is an array (line/column).
The "connection" parameter is optional. Use when the command is executed in a

database different from that specified for the application.
Ex. 1:
sc_lookup(dataset, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers" );
To have access to the first line (Dataset), use :

{customer_id} = {dataset[0][0]};
{customer_name} = {dataset[0][1]};
{credit_limit } = {dataset[0][2]};
To have access to the second line (Dataset), use:

{customer_id} = {dataset[1][0]};
{customer_name} = {dataset[1][1]};
{credit_limit} = {dataset[1][2]};
If occurs error in the execution of the SQL command, the variable attributed to the
dataset will return as "false" and the error message will be available in the "dataset_erro
" variable. It is also important to verify the select returned data, to prevent access to
inexistent variables, once the output array only will be created if the select command
returns data.
Ex. 2:
sc_lookup(my_data, "select customer_id, customer_name, credit_limit from customers");
if ({my_data} === false)
{
echo "Access error. Message=". {my_data_erro} ;
}
elseif (empty({my_data}))
{
echo "Select command didn't return data";
}
else
{
{customer_id} = {my_data[0][0]};
{customer_name} = {my_data[0][1]};
{credit_limit} = {my_data[0][2]};
}
Ex. 3: The SQL command also can be composed of application fields (local
variables) or of global variables:
sc_lookup(dataset, "select order_value from orders where clienteid = '{customer_id} ' and
salesman_id = [var_glo_salesman]");
Note: The command must always finished with semicolon ";".
Note2: For a big result returned in the dataset we recomend the use of the macro
sc_selec instead of this one.
Macro Scope
onValidateSuccess onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_mail_send(SMTP, Usr, Pw, From, To, Subject, Message, Mens_Type, Copies, Copies_Type, Port, Connection_Type, Attachment, SSL)
This macro its used to send emails.
SMTP SMTP server name or IP address. (String or Variable that contains the
server name)
Usr SMTP user name. (String or Variable that contains the user name)
Pw SMTP password. (String or Variable that contains the password)
From From email. (String or Variable that contains the email)
To List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or
variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one
variable that contains one array of emails.
Subject Message subject. (String or Variable that contains the subject)
Message Message body. (String or Variable that contains the message)
Mens_Type Message format: (T)ext or (H)tml.
Copies List of the emails that will recieve the message, it could be a string or
variable that cointains one or more emails separated by ";" or one
variable that contains one array of emails.
Copies_Type Type copies: BCC (Hiden copies) or CCC (Regular copies).
Port The port used by your e-mail server. Use the port 465 for the security
type SSL, and the port 587 for the security type TLS or the port 25 for
no security. If not informed, Scriptcase will set the default port: 25
Connection_Type Indicating a secure connection. Use S for SSL, T for TLS or N for non
secure connections. If not informed, Scriptcase will set the default
value:N.
Attachment Absolute path of the file that will be attached in the email
SSL Optional parameter to add SSL settings. If you need to add more than
one setting, use ";" for separate them. Ex: $ssl =
'allow_self_signed=false;verify_peer=false';
Note: To use safe connection its required to have the PHP "php_openssl" extension
enable.
Ex. 1:
sc_mail_send('smtp.meuserver.com.br', 'usr', 'pw', 'from@netmake.com.br', '
to@netmake.com.br', 'Test Email Subject', 'Message', 'H',
'abc@cop.com.br;zxy@cop.com.br', 'H', '', '', 'c:/test/arq.txt');
Ex. 2: Usising variables and defining the port.

sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], [usuar], [glo_pw], {from}, {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'T',
[glo_copias], 'CCC', '419', 'S', {attached});
Ex. 3: No user and password.

sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from.netmake.com.br', {to}, {sunject}, {message}, 'H', '', '', '',
'', [glo_att]);
The amount of emails sent will be stored at the special variable "sc_mail_count".
If any error happend when the scriptcase try to send the email, the variable "sc_mail_ok"
will recieve "false" and the error message will be stored on the variavle "sc_mail_erro".
Ex.4 :
sc_mail_send([glo_smtp], '', '', 'from@netmake.com.br', {to}, {subject}, {message}, 'H');
if ({sc_mail_ok})
{
echo "sent {sc_mail_count} e-mail(s) with sucess!!";
}
else
{
sc_error_message({sc_mail_erro});
}
Macro Scope
onExecute onAfterDelete onFooter onClick onFilterInit onAfterDelete onClick onAp
onAfterInsert onHeader onHeader onFilterSave onAfterDeleteAll onScriptInit onEx
onAfterUpdate onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterInsert onLoadAll onLo
onBeforeDelete onRecord onAfterInsertAll onRefresh
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_make_link(Application, Parameters)
This macro creates a string containing a link to other Scriptcase application (when writing
html code).
Application Name of the application to establish the link.
Parameters Parameters necessary so called application. In the format: "=" (the
attribution sign) . More than one parameter must be separated by ";"
(semicolon).
Ex. 1: Creating a string with a link for the datacli.php application, without
parameters passage.
$string_link = sc_make_link(datacli.php);
Ex. 2: Creating a string with a link for the application datacli.php, with parameters
passage.
$string_link = sc_make_link(datacli, parm1={company};parm2=[glo_office]);
Macro Scope
Blank chart application Grid application Control Form
application
onExecute onFooter onScriptInit onValidate
onHeader onNavigate onValidateSuccess
onScriptInit onRecord
sc_master_value('Object', Value)
Update a data in the master application, in real time, according to changes made in a
given field of the detail application.
Object Object name to be updated in master Application. It's not necessary the {}
in a field name.
Value Object value. The value can be a field or a variable.
Ex. 1:
sc_lookup(result,"SELECT SUM(Total) FROM adm_order_itens WHERE OrderID =

'{OrderID}'");
//Using sc_format_num() to format the value that will be updated in the master
application
$value = sc_format_num({result[0][0]}, ',', '.', 2, 'S', 1, '');
sc_master_value('OrderPrice', $value);
* If the value, that will be sent to the master, be numeric, you have to use the
sc_format_num() to format it. To see the macro documentation, click here.
Macro Scope

Form
onApplicationInit onAfterInsertAll
onBeforeDelete onAfterUpdate
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit
onLoad onBeforeInsert
onRefresh onBeforeUpdate
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
sc_menu_delete(Id_Item1)
This macro removes menu items passed as parameters. Can be use in menu applications
or tree menu.
Observe that the parameters used in this macro are the "ID" of the items.
If a menu item its removed and it have "nodes", they will be hidden too.
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_menu_disable(Id_Item1)
This macro deactivates menu items pass as parameters. Can be used in menu
applications or tree menus.
The parameters passed are items "IDâ??.Menu items are deactivated recursively (when a
submenu item is deactivated its â??nodesâ?? are also deactivated).
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_menu_force_mobile(boolean)
This Macro is used to force the creation of menus to mobile devices.
The parameter (true or false) is optional. If no value is passed, it will use the value "true" (
enable mobile mode)
Ex1:
sc_menu_force_mobile(true);
Ex2:
sc_menu_force_mobile(false);
Macro Scope

onLoad onApplicationInit
onLoad
sc_menu_item
This variable is only avaliable for menu application and it has the objective of giving acess
to a menu item that was selected, this way the user can take desicions before to run the
application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variable.

if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_1")
{
sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]);
}
Ex. 2: If an application requires a global variable another application can initialize it

accordingly.
if ({sc_menu_item} == "item_5" && (!isset([glo_employ]) || empty([glo_employ])))
{
sc_redir(apl_inf_emp);
}
Ex. 2: Use the button on the toolbar menu.

if ({sc_menu_item} == "btn_1")
{
sc_apl_conf("form_customer", "start", "new");
}
Macro Scope

onExecute onApplicationInit
onExecute
sc_redir(Application, Parameter01; Parameter02; Target, Error)
This macro its used to redirect the processing to other application or URL.
If the redir uses parameters, these must be passed in the following format:
1) After the name of the application, use the comma delimiter (,) then
2) = (equal sign) .
3) More than one parameter, must be separated by semicolon (;)
4) The target determine which application is opened (default=_self): _self, _parent, _blank
or modal.
5) Optional parameter to set error messages redirection in the application: "F" redirects if
there is error in the application (default value) and "E" does not redirect.
OBS. If your connection uses transaction control the use of this macro on the events
onAfterInsert, onafterupdate, onAfterDelete, onBeforeInsert, onbeforeupdate or
onBeforeDelete should come after the use of macro sc_commit_trans so this way it will
save the form changes.
Ex. 1: Application without parameters nor target.

if ([global_user] == "test")
{
sc_redir(application_x.php);
}
Ex. 2: Application with parameters and without target.

{
sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx");
}
Ex. 3: Application without parameters and with target.

{
sc_redir(application_x, "", "_parent");
}
Ex. 4: Application with parameter and target.

{
sc_redir(application_x, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank");
}
Ex. 5: URL.
{
sc_redir(http://www.my_page.com);
}
OBS. Everthing that was passed as parameter to the called application will be avaliable
as global variable.
EX: sc_redir(employee.php, parm1={var_test}; parm2="xxx", "_blank");
In the employee.php application the parameters will be acessible at [parm1] and [parm2]
Macro Scope

onExecute onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onFilterInit onAfterDelete onApplicationIni
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateFailur
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSucce
onValidate onBeforeInsert
onValidateSuccess onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_conf("Application", "Property")
This macro have the objective to delete all modifications effected by the sc_apl_conf
macro.
The property parameter its opicional, if its passed it will only erase the modification from
that specific application.
Ex. 1: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application, property

"start".
sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application", "start");
Ex. 2: Deleting the modifications of the "my_application" application.

sc_reset_apl_conf("my_application");
Ex. 3: Deleting the modifications of all the applications.

sc_reset_apl_conf();
Macro Scope

onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_apl_status
This macro has the objective to clean all security variables, set through the sc_apl_status
macro.
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_apl_status();
Macro Scope

onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_change_connection
This macro has the objective to erase the changes made using the macro
"sc_change_connection".
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Form Control Form Menu T

application application application application application application m
onExecute onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit onApplicationInit o
onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onScriptInit onLoad
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_connection_edit
This macro undoes the connection edits made by macro "sc_connection_edit".
Macro Scope

onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_connection_new
This macro undoes the connections made by the macro "sc_connection_new".
Macro Scope

onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_global([Global_Variable1], [Global_Variable2] ...)
This macro has the objective to delete global variables, stored in the PHP session.
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_global ([Login], [Pass]);

Macro Scope

OnClick onHeader onGroupBy onFilterRefresh OnClick onClick
OnFocus onScriptInit onHeader onFilterSave OnFocus onFocus
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationIn
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdateAll onValidateFailu
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateSucc
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_reset_menu_delete
This macro its used to restore a menu item, deleted by the macro "sc_menu_delete".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_menu_delete();
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_reset_menu_disable
This macro have the objective to enable a menu item, disabled by the macro
"sc_menu_disable".
Ex. 1:
sc_reset_menu_disable();
Macro Scope

onLoad onLoad
sc_rollback_trans("Connection")
This macro its used to cancel a transaction set in the database.
The "Connection" parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a different
data base from the specified to the application.
Macro Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onHeader onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApp
Onchange onScriptInit onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExe
OnClick onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoa
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onRefresh
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_script_name
This macro is available to the MENU applications to access the application name that was
selected in the menu. It allows the user to make dacisions before executing the
application if a pre-process is required to that application.
Ex. 1: To clean global variables.

if ({sc_script_name} == "apl1")
{
sc_reset_global([global1], [global2]);
}
Macro Scope

onExecute onExecute
sc_select(dataset, "SQL Command", "Connection")
This macro executes the SQL commands passed as parameter and access the "dataset"
in the command.
Different from sc_lookup macro, this macro doesn't manipulate the dataset (the user is
responsible for all the manipulation).
If an error occurs in the sql command execution, the variable attributed to the database
returns as "false" and the error message is available in the "dataset_error" variable.
The connection parameter is optional, use only if the command is executed in a data base
different from the specified in the application.
Ex. 1:
sc_select(my_data, "select clientId, clientName, limitecred from costumers");
if ({my_data} === false)
{
echo "Access error. Message =". {my_data_erro};
}
else
{
while (!$my_data->EOF)
{
{clientName} = $my_data->fields[1];
$my_data->MoveNext();
}
$my_data->Close();
}
Ex. 2: The SQL command can passed as application fields (local variables) or of
global variables.
sc_select(dataset,"select price order from order where clientId = '{clientId}' and cod_Seller
= [var_glo_seller]");
Note: The command must always be finished with semicolon";".

Macro Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApp
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExe
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoa
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_select_field({Field})
This macro modify dynamically the SELECT:

Is possible to modify dynamically the grid fields through the dynamic modification of the
original select.
Ex. 1:
A table with the columns year and the months from January to December is used to
create a grid using a parameter, displays the years and only a specific month. Passing the
parameter as a global variable named "show_month", in the application is found the
following structure:
Select Clause: select year, pair_month from table
sc_select_field(pair_month) = [show_month];
sc_label(pair_month) = [show_month];
Modify the select, and the grip column label.
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause.
At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the
substitution execution during the grid time.
Ex. 2: Select Clause: select code, name, value from table order by code. To change the
order, from code to name, use: sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Note: This command must be in the context of the evento "onInit";
Macro Scope

sc_select_order("Field")
It is possible, during the grid execution time, modify the grid ORDER BY clause.
At least one ORDER BY is required in the original grid SQL command to allow the
substitution during the grid execution time.
Ex. 1: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price FROM table ORDER BY code
To change the order from code to name, we will have:
sc_select_order("code") = "name";
Ex. 2: Select Clause: SELECT code, name, price, date FROM table ORDER BY code,
name, price
To change the order from name to date, we will have:
sc_select_order("name") = "date";
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
Macro Scope

onScriptInit onHeader
onScriptInit
sc_select_where(add)
Is possible, during grid execution time to add a field/condition to the search WHERE
clause.
Ex. 1: It adds the contente between the quotes (") in the grids select.
if (empty({sc_where_current}))
{
sc_select_where(add) = "where campoX > [global]";
}
else
{
sc_select_where(add) = "AND campoX > [global_variable]";
}
Note: This command must be in the context of "process before the select".
Macro Scope

onScriptInit onHeader
onScriptInit
sc_seq_register
This macro provide the record (being processed) grid sequential number. It can be used,
only in onRecord event.
Ex. 1:
if({sc_seq_register} == 10) {
// last line of the page
{total} = {sum_total};
}
Macro Scope
Grid application
onRecord
sc_set_fetchmode(parm);
This macro allows to change the type of return from the dataset of the select commands.
The macro will processed before running the SQL command. Informing the parameter, the
dataset will return the index or the name of the column.
parm = 0 : Returns an array with the index and the name of columns (Scriptcase's
Default)
parm = 1 : Returns an array only with indexes of the columns
Example 1: Returning an array with the name of the columns.
sc_set_fetchmode(0);
sc_select(my_data, "SELECT customerid, stateid, birthdate, creditlimit FROM customers
where customerid = 'ALFKI'");
while (!$my_data->EOF){
$meus_dados->fields['customerid'];
$customer = $my_data->fields['stateid'];
$customer = $my_data->fields['birthdate'];
}
$my_data->Close();
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Example 2: Returning an array with the index of the columns.
sc_set_fetchmode(1);
sc_select(my_data, "SELECT customerid, stateid, birthdate, creditlimit FROM customers
where customerid = 'ALFKI'");
while (!$my_data->EOF){
$my_data->fields[1];
$customer = $my_data->fields[2];
$customer = $my_data->fields[3];
}
$my_data->Close();
Macro Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onExe
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onLoa
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_focus('Field')
This macro its used to set the focus to a form field.
Ex. 1:
sc_set_focus('name');
Macro Scope

OnClick OnClick onApplicationInit
onLoad onLoad onScriptInit
onRefresh onRefresh onLoadAll
onValidateSuccess onValidateSuccess onRefresh
sc_set_global($variable_01) or ({My_Field})
This macro its used to register global variables. Create a session variable with the same
name and content of the local variable.
NOTE: This macro will be discontinued soon. You should use the method of creating
global variables â??â??using brackets. Ex: [var_glo_user] = "test";
Ex. 1: Registering a users variable.

$my_var = "mary";
sc_set_global($my_var);
Creates a session variable with the name "my_var" with the "mary" content.
Ex. 2: For register a field value as a session variable.

sc_set_global({fieldname});
Note: This macro doesn't attribute values. Only register the session variables from PHP.
Macro Scope

onAfterDelete onHeader onFilterValidate onAfterDelete onApplicationI
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onBeforeUpdate onApplicationInit onValidateFail
onScriptInit onBeforeDelete onValidateSuc
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_groupby_rule
This macro is used to select a GROUPBY rule in execution time in the onApplicationInit
event.
Ex:
sc_set_groupby_rule = "rule id";
Macro Scope

sc_set_language('String Language')
This macro allows to define the application language dinamically.
Ex. 1: Changes the laguage to English.

sc_set_language('en_us');
Ex. 2: Changes the laguage to Spanish.

sc_set_language('es');
It still allows to define the language and regional settings of the applications using a
delimiter ";" between the parameters.
Ex. 1: Changing the language to English and regional settings to Canada.

sc_set_language('en_us;en_ca');
Ex. 2: Changing the language to Spanish and regional settings to Mexico.

sc_set_language('es;es_mx');
Ex. 3: Changing the language to Germanian and regional settings to Luxembourg.

sc_set_language('de;de_lu');
Ex. 4: Changing the language to Eslovak and regional settings to Slovak Republic.
sc_set_language('sk;sk_sk');
Macro Scope

onFilterValidate onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_set_pdf_name"sc_my_file_name.pdf"
The resulting files of the exported data (PDF, XLS, XML, CSV and RTF) are stored in
"temporary" directory specified in the Scriptcase's configuration in development and in
production, with the prefix "sc_" followed by a unique identification so the file of a user
does not overwrite to one another.
The prefix "sc_" makes Scriptcase delete the old files. To assign different names
Scriptcase patterns, can use the following macros:
- sc_set_csv_name
- sc_set_pdf_name
- sc_set_rtf_name
- sc_set_xml_name
- sc_set_xls_name
- sc_set_word_name
Ex1:
sc_set_xls_name = "my_file.xls";
Ex2: sc_set_csv_name = "sc_my_new_file.csv";
NOTE:
1) These macros should be used in the event "onScriptInit."
2) Even using the macro, remained the prefix "sc_" (as Ex2), the Scriptcase will delete the
file when it reaches the configured timeout limit (see the setting "File Lifetime" in the
production environment).
Macro Scope
onHeader onScriptInit
onScriptInit
sc_set_regional('String Regional')
This macros allows to dynamically change the application regional settings.
Ex. 1:
sc_set_regional('en_us');
Macro Scope

onValidateSuccess
sc_set_theme('String Theme')
This macros allows to define the application theme dinamically.
Ex. 1:
sc_set_theme('Newyellow');
Macro Scope

onValidateSuccess
sc_site_ssl
This macro its used to verifie if a used site is a safe site. (https protocol)
Ex. 1: Using an affirmative.

if (sc_site_ssl)
{
echo "ok - Safe site";
}
Ex. 2: Using a negative.

if (!sc_site_ssl)
{
echo "Warning - Unsafe site";
}
Ex. 3: Redirecting if the site isn't safe.

if (!sc_site_ssl)
{
sc_redir("http://www.erro_page.com/") ;
}
Note: This macro works only to the web server llS.
Macro Scope

onExecute onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onApplicationInit
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onFilterInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_injection({My_Field}) or ($My_Variable)
This macro its used to protect the field/variable against "sql injection".
Macro used for protection against "sql injection" in commands generated by the developer
when using the macros: sc_lookup, sc_select or sc_exec_sql.
Ex. 1: Protecting a local variable:
$field_protect = sc_sql_injection({my_field});
Ex. 2: Protecting an user variable:

$field_protect = sc_sql_injection($my_var);
Note: that all database accesses, generated for the Scriptcase, have protection against
"sql injection".
Macro Scope
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onClick onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onExe
Onchange onHeader onFooter onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onLoa
OnClick onScriptInit onGroupBy onFilterSave OnClick onClick
onAfterDelete onScriptInit onAfterDelete onScriptInit
onAfterInsert onNavigate onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll
onAfterUpdate onRecord onAfterInsert onRefresh
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_sql_protect(Value, "Type", "Connection")
This macro will protect the value passed as paramenter according with the used
database, the "Connection" parameter is opicional, if not informed scriptcase will use the
default connection.
The "Type" parameter so far can only use the "Date" value.
Ex 01: In this example we will protect the dates passed as parameter so this way it
can be correctly interpreted to the ACCESS database.
sc_select_where(add) = " AND news_noticias.noticia_data_pub

BETWEEN ".sc_sql_protect($data_inicial, "date")." AND ".sc_sql_protect($data_final,
"date")."";
Macro Scope
Blank calendar Grid Search Form application Control ReportPDF

application application application application Form application
onExecute onValidate onClick onFilterValidate onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll onRecord
onFooter onAfterInsertAll onValidate
onGroupBy onAfterUpdateAll
onScriptInit onBeforeDeleteAll
onNavigate onBeforeInsertAll
onRecord onBeforeUpdateAll
onValidate
sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02 Format")
sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02 Format");
This macro calculates the difference between hour, minutes and seconds for two datetime/time values.
The result will be returned in an array, with the dimensions [0], [1] and [2] containing hours, minutes
ParÃ¢meter Description
datetime_01 Value or variable for datetime_01
Date_01 Format Value or variable to specify the format of datetime_01
datetime_02 Value or variable for datetime_02
Date_02 Format Value or variable to specify the format of datetime_02
Ex. 1: General Format

{differences} = sc_time_diff({datetime_01}, "Date_01 Format", {datetime_02}, "Date_02 Format");
{diff_hours} = {differences[0]};
{diff_minutes} = {differences[1]};
{diff_seconds} = {differences[2]};
Ex. 2: Returning positive values

{differences} = sc_time_diff("2012-07-25 05:33:45", "yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss", "2012-07-21 15:22:57", "yyyy-
{differences[0]} would be equal to 86 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to 10 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to 48 (seconds)
Ex. 3: Returning negative values

{differences} = sc_time_diff("2012-07-21 15:22:57", "yyyy-mm-dd hh:ii:ss", "2012-07-25 05:33:45", "yyyy-
{differences[0]} would be equal to -86 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to -10 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to -48 (seconds)
Ex. 4: Considering only the hours format - Positive return

{differences} = sc_time_diff("18:14:55", "hh:ii:ss", "10:55:22", "hh:ii:ss");
{differences[0]} would be equal to 7 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to 19 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to 33 (seconds).
Ex. 5: Considering only the hours format - Negative return
{differences} = sc_time_diff ("10:55:22", "hh:ii:ss", "18:14:55", "hh:ii:ss");
{differences[0]} would be equal to -7 (hours)

{differences[1]} would be equal to -19 (minutes)
{differences[2]} would be equal to -33 (seconds).
Macro Scope

onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_trunc_num({My_Field}, Decimal_Number)
This macro is used to truncate numerical values which exceed the decimals amount
specified.
ParÃ¢metro DescriÃ§Ã£o
My_Field Variable with value to format (return in the same variable).
Decimal_Number Amount of decimals to display.
Ex. 1:
sc_trunc_num({my_value}, 2);
Input value = 1250.235

Output value = 1250.23
Input value = 1250.2

Input value = 1250

Macro Scope

onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_exit(URL)
This macro modifies the application exit URL.
Ex. 1:
sc_url_exit(http://www.scriptcase.net);
Ex. 2:
sc_url_exit(aplx.php);
Macro Scope
calendar chart Grid Search Form application Control Form ReportPDF

onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onRecord
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onFilterInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_url_library("Target", "Library Name", "File")
This macro will return the file path, inside a library, to be used on the scriptcase
applications. It is necessary to have a library created on Scriptcase to use this Macro. To
create a library, go in the "Tools > Library" Menu.
Paramenter Description
Target Tells you what the scope of the library. Can be "sys" for libraries of Public
scope or "prj" for libraries of Project scope.
Library Given name to the library at the time of creation.
Name
File Absolute path within the library.
Ex. 1 - Importing CSS files from a library:

<<span class="obs">*link rel="stylesheet" type="text/css" href="<<span
class="obs">*?php echo sc_url_library('prj', 'bootstrap-3.3.2-dist', 'css/style1.css'); ?>" />
Ex. 2 - Importing a JS file from a library:

<<span class="obs">*script type="text/javascript" src="<<span class="obs">*?php echo
sc_url_library('prj', 'bootstrap-3.3.2-dist', 'js/bootstrap,js'); ?>"></script>
NOTE: Note that you need to remove the asterisk (*) form the examples above to use it.
Macro Scope
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_user_logout('variable_name', 'variable_content', 'apl_redir.php', 'target')
This macro is used toÂ log the user out to the system.
If the target is not informed, the default value is "_top".
Ex:
sc_user_logout('usr_login', 'admin', 'ctrl_login.php', '_self');
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Form application Control Form ReportPDF

onExecute onAfterDelete onHeader onScriptInit onAfterDelete onScriptInit onHeader
onAfterInsert onScriptInit onAfterDeleteAll onLoadAll onScriptInit
onAfterUpdate onAfterInsert onValidate onRecord
onBeforeDelete onAfterInsertAll onValidateSuccess
onBeforeInsert onAfterUpdate
onBeforeUpdate onAfterUpdateAll
onValidate onBeforeInsert
onValidateSuccess onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate
onBeforeUpdateAll
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onValidate
onValidateSuccess
sc_warning'on' or 'off'
This macro dynamically activates or deactivates warning messages control.
Warning messages are generated when a reference is made to an inexistent variable, an

item of an inexistent array, etc.
Ex. 1: To deactivate the message (do not display).

sc_warning = 'off';
Macro Scope

onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_webservice("Method", "URL", "Port", "Send Method", "Parameters Array", "Setting's Array", "Timeout", "Return")
This macro is used to communicate with a web service.
Informs what method will be used to access the web service. Ex:
Method
file_get_contents or curl.
URL URL used to access the web service.
Port Port used to access the web service.
Send Method Defines the request method of the web service. Can be GET ou POST.
Parameters Parameter's array used to access the web service, varying according
Array to the accessed service.
Settings's
Parameter's array for configuration of access method used.
Array(optional)
Timeout(optional) Service's access timeout.
Web service's return method. When it is set as "True", the return from
Return(optional) the web service comes as an array, if it is set as "False" it will return as
the original web service format. Default: True
$parms = array(
'METHOD' => 'GetBalance',
'RETURNALLCURRENCIES' => 1,
'VERSION' => urlencode(51.0),
'USER' => urlencode({paypal_api_login}),
'PWD' => urlencode({paypal_api_password}),
'SIGNATURE' => urlencode({paypal_api_key})
);
$parms = http_build_query($parms);
Ex1 - Using the macro file_get_contents:

sc_webservice('file_get_contents', $webservice_url, $_SERVER["SERVER_PORT"],
"POST", $parms, array(), 30);
Ex2 - Using the macro with CURL:

$response = sc_webservice("curl", {paypal_type}, 80, "POST", $parms,
array(CURLOPT_RETURNTRANSFER => true, CURLOPT_SSL_VERIFYPEER=>false),
30);
Macro Scope

onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
sc_where_current
Variable to reference the application where clause plus the filter selections(if any).
Reflects the where clause currently used.
Ex. 1:
$save_current_where = {sc_where_current};
Macro Scope
chart application Grid application ReportPDF

application
onFooter onClick onFooter
onHeader onFooter onHeader
onScriptInit onGroupBy onScriptInit
onHeader onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_where_filter
This macro is used to retrieve the content generated by the "filter", according with its
selections. These are the data which will be added to the application original where clause
after filter submition.
Ex. 1:
$save_current_filter = {sc_where_filter};
Macro Scope
application
onHeader onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_where_orig
This macro saves the application original where clause. Can be used inside ScriptCase
events, to manipulate the data, or to display it anywhere in the grid.
Ex. 1:
$save_where = {sc_where_orig};
Macro Scope

application
onHeader onRecord
onScriptInit
onNavigate
onRecord
sc_zip_file("File", "Zip")
This macro is used to generate ZIP files from a list of files and/or directories. The file
parameter must be one of the following:
- File name
- Directory name
- A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list.
- A variable a file or a directory name.
- A variable containing array, which contains a files and/or directories list.
The zip parameter must contain the name of the zip file generated, or the path to the file.
Ex. 1: Single file compressing.

sc_zip_file("/test/sample.htm", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 2: Single directory compressing.

sc_zip_file("/test", "/tmp/test.zip");
Ex. 3: Multiple files and directories in an array.
$prep = array();
$prep[] = "/test/sample.htm";
$prep[] = "/test";
sc_zip_file($prep, "/tmp/test.zip");
Macro Scope

onExecute onAfterDelete onApplicationInit onScriptInit onApplicationInit onAfterDelete onApplicationInit
onAfterInsert onFooter onFilterInit onAfterDeleteAll onClick
onAfterUpdate onHeader onFilterSave onAfterInsert onScriptInit
onApplicationInit onScriptInit onFilterValidate onAfterInsertAll onLoadAll
onClick
onScriptInit
onLoad
onNavigate
onLoadRecord
onRefresh
onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Authentication Variables
These variables must be defined on applications with PDF export on environments with
integrated authentication.
Variables Description
[sc_pdf_usr] Authentication User.
[sc_pdf_pw] Authentication Password
Ex. 1:On a login application, it is possible to set these variables from the info given by the
user:
[sc_pdf_usr] = {login_usr};
[sc_pdf_pw] = {senha_usr};
Macro Scope
Grid application Form application

onApplicationInit onScriptInit
onFooter
onGroupBy
onScriptInit
Database Variables
Global variables containing database access values used by main connection.
sc_glo_server Server name.
sc_glo_db Database name.
sc_glo_db_type Database type (mssql, oracle, mysql, etc).
sc_glo_user Connected user name.
sc_glo_pass Database password access.
sc_glo_cript_pass Encrypted password (S/N).
sc_glo_decimal_db Used decimal separator (point or comma).
Ex. 1:
$my_database = [sc_glo_db];
These variables only reference the values without updating it (it is not possible to
attribute/modify the values). To define user and the password to connect to the database,
use the following variables:
sc_db_master_usr User login to be used.
sc_db_master_pass Password to be used.
sc_db_master_cript Encrypted password (S/N) (see sc_encode macro).
Important: These variables only take effect during next application execution remaining
valid during all the session (unless modified).
Ex. 2: An application type "control" with a form created with information "login" and
encrypted "password". These data must be used to connect to the database, during the
system applications execution.
$temp_pass = sc_encode({password});
[sc_db_master_usr] = {login};
[sc_db_master_pass] = $temp_pass;
[sc_db_master_cript] = "S";
Macro Scope
Blank calendar chart Grid Search Form Control Form Menu
application application application application application application application
onExecute ajaxFieldonBlur onFooter onFooter onFilterInit ajaxFieldonBlur onBlur onApplication
Onchange onHeader onGroupBy onFilterRefresh Onchange onChange onExecute
OnClick onScriptInit onHeader onFilterSave OnClick onClick onLoad
OnFocus onScriptInit onFilterValidate OnFocus onLoadAll
onNavigate onRefresh
onRecord onValidate
onValidateFailure
onValidateSuccess
Totalling Variables
During group by and summary processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each
group level.
The routines are defined in event â?? onGroupByâ??determining the break levels and
avalilable to each record. Totals special variables are then referenced substituting the
group name for the key word â??groupbyâ??, as in:
{count_ger} Records total amount.
{sum_parcel} Will show the total sum
for the field "Parcel"
{sum_balance} Will show the total sum
for the field "Balance"
{count_groupby} Current Group records
total.
{sum_groupby_parcel} Current Group level sum
for the field â??Parcelâ??
.
{sum_groupby_balance} Current Group level sum
for the field â??Balanceâ??
.
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city that totalizes a balance field,
in the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the balance
as follows.
{sum_groupby_balance} = {sum_groupby_balance} / {count_groupby};
Macro Scope

application
onFooter onFooter onFooter
onHeader onGroupBy onHeader
onRecord onRecord
Totalling Variables (group by)
During the group by processing, Scriptcase generates total variables to each group level.
The routines are defined in event â??
onGroupByâ??determining the group levels. Totals
special variables are then referenced substituting the group name for the key word â??
quebraâ??, as in:
Variable Description
{count_ger} Records total amount.
{sum_parcel} Field â??parcelsâ?? total
.
{sum_balance} Field â??Balanceâ?? .total
{count_quebra} Current group level records total.
{sum_quebra_parcel} Current group level field â??parcelsâ?? .total
{sum_quebra_balance} Current group level field â??Balanceâ?? .total
Ex. 1: In an application with a group by state and city and that totalizes a balance
field, in the group totals, is possible to display the average (avg) instead of the
balance as follows.
{sum_quebra_balance} = {sum_quebra_balance} / {count_quebra};
Macro Scope
Grid application
onFooter
onGroupBy
Events X Applications
Reference table of available macros by Events and Applications.
Blank application calendar application chart application
ajaxFieldonBlur sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
Variables - Database
Onchange sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
OnClick sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
OnFocus sc_ajax_javascript
sc_ajax_message
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
onAfterDelete sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_delete
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterDeleteAll
onAfterInsert sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_insert
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterInsertAll
onAfterUpdate sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_error_update
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onAfterUpdateAll
onApplicationInit sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_calc_dv sc_calc_dv
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new sc_connection_new
sc_date sc_date
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2 sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode sc_decode
sc_encode sc_encode
sc_format_num sc_field_display
sc_get_language sc_field_init_off
sc_get_regional sc_format_num
sc_get_theme sc_get_language
sc_image sc_get_regional
sc_include sc_get_theme
sc_include_library sc_hide_groupby_rule
sc_language sc_image
sc_ldap_login sc_include
sc_ldap_logout sc_include_library
sc_ldap_search sc_language
sc_master_value sc_redir
sc_redir sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_change_connection
sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_global
sc_reset_global sc_set_global
sc_set_global sc_set_groupby_rule
sc_set_language sc_set_language
sc_set_regional sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl sc_site_ssl
sc_time_diff sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit sc_url_exit
sc_url_library sc_url_library
sc_warning sc_warning
sc_webservice sc_webservice
sc_zip_file sc_zip_file
onBeforeDelete sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_continue
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeDeleteAll
onBeforeInsert sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_continue
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeInsertAll
onBeforeUpdate sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_changed
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_continue
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onBeforeUpdateAll
onClick
onExecute sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_change_connection
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_format_num_region
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_include_lib
sc_include_library
sc_language
sc_log_add
sc_log_split
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_change_connection
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_language
sc_set_regional
sc_set_theme
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onFilterInit
onFilterRefresh
onFilterSave
onFilterValidate
onFooter sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_format_num
sc_get_groupby_rule
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_reset_global
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
Variables - Totalling
onGroupBy
onHeader sc_begin_trans
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_format_num
sc_get_groupby_rule
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_make_link
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_set_pdf_name
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
Variables - Totalling
onScriptInit sc_apl_conf sc_apl_conf
sc_apl_status sc_apl_status
sc_begin_trans sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display sc_block_display
sc_btn_copy sc_btn_display
sc_btn_display sc_calc_dv
sc_calc_dv sc_change_connection
sc_change_connection sc_commit_trans
sc_commit_trans sc_concat
sc_concat sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_edit sc_connection_new
sc_connection_new sc_date
sc_date sc_date_conv
sc_date_conv sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_dif_2 sc_decode
sc_date_empty sc_encode
sc_decode sc_exec_sql
sc_encode sc_field_display
sc_exec_sql sc_format_num
sc_exit sc_get_groupby_rule
sc_field_display sc_get_language
sc_field_readonly sc_get_regional
sc_format_num sc_get_theme
sc_form_show sc_image
sc_get_language sc_include
sc_get_regional sc_include_library
sc_get_theme sc_label
sc_image sc_language
sc_include sc_lin_cod_barra_arrecadacao
sc_include_library sc_lin_cod_barra_banco
sc_label sc_lin_digitavel_arrecadacao
sc_language sc_lin_digitavel_banco
sc_lookup sc_lookup
sc_mail_send sc_mail_send
sc_master_value sc_make_link
sc_redir sc_redir
sc_reset_apl_conf sc_reset_apl_conf
sc_reset_apl_status sc_reset_apl_status
sc_reset_change_connection sc_reset_change_connection
sc_reset_connection_edit sc_reset_connection_edit
sc_reset_connection_new sc_reset_connection_new
sc_reset_global sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans sc_rollback_trans
sc_select sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode sc_select_field
sc_set_global sc_select_order
sc_set_language sc_select_where
sc_set_regional sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_theme sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl sc_set_language
sc_sql_injection sc_set_pdf_name
sc_time_diff sc_set_regional
sc_trunc_num sc_set_theme
sc_url_exit sc_site_ssl
sc_url_library sc_sql_injection
sc_user_logout sc_time_diff
sc_warning sc_trunc_num
sc_webservice sc_url_exit
sc_zip_file sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_where_current
sc_where_filter
sc_where_orig
sc_zip_file
onLoad
onLoad sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_copy
sc_btn_display
sc_btn_new
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_disabled
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_form_show
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_label
sc_log_split
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onNavigate
onRecord
onRefresh sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_display
sc_calc_dv
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_label
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidate sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_delete
sc_btn_display
sc_btn_insert
sc_btn_update
sc_calc_dv
sc_changed
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_form_show
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_image
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_ldap_login
sc_ldap_logout
sc_ldap_search
sc_log_add
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_sql_protect
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidateFailure sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_delete
sc_btn_display
sc_btn_insert
sc_btn_update
sc_calc_dv
sc_changed
sc_commit_trans
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_mail_send
sc_master_value
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
onValidateSuccess sc_ajax_javascript
sc_begin_trans
sc_block_display
sc_btn_delete
sc_btn_display
sc_btn_insert
sc_btn_update
sc_calc_dv
sc_changed
sc_commit_trans
sc_concat
sc_connection_edit
sc_connection_new
sc_date
sc_date_conv
sc_date_dif
sc_date_dif_2
sc_date_empty
sc_decode
sc_encode
sc_error_exit
sc_error_message
sc_exec_sql
sc_field_display
sc_field_readonly
sc_format_num
sc_get_language
sc_get_regional
sc_get_theme
sc_include
sc_include_library
sc_lookup
sc_mail_send
sc_redir
sc_reset_global
sc_rollback_trans
sc_select
sc_set_fetchmode
sc_set_focus
sc_set_global
sc_site_ssl
sc_sql_injection
sc_time_diff
sc_trunc_num
sc_url_exit
sc_url_library
sc_user_logout
sc_warning
sc_webservice
sc_zip_file
Deployment
Overview
It is common to test new applications in a local development environment. Once the applications are satisfactorily
tested in a secure environment then applications are released to production environment.
The deployment process involves publishing the ScriptCase developed applications (and libraries) in a PHP
supported WEB server.
The following topics cover the ScriptCase deployment process.
Typical Deployment (recommended)
Advanced Deployment.
Configuring a Production environment

Typical Deployment
The user friendly typical deployment process generates a package with selected applications and libraries
enabling instant project availability with minimum effort.
Step 1: Select ScriptCase menu item Project Deploy, as in the image below.
Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. It is possible to deploy all the Project or select an application set.
Step 3: Select Typical deployment.
Step 4: Include the common libraries required by the applications in the production environment in the
deployment package. Define Project initial application.
Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to select Deploy
with common library unless when the common libraries are updated in another ScriptCase release.
Step 5: Choose Deployment Output. ScriptCase offers the following options:
1 - Create ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a download link to
the deployment package.
2 - Deploy on a Server directory: Â Deploy the applications in selected directory. Enter the directory
specification as in image bellow. This option should only be used case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase
server.
3 â??Deploy on FTP server: Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server. Enter remote server
required information as in image bellow.
Step 6: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report.

Once the applications are deployed is necessary to configure the production environment before using the system
for the first time. Click here for more info.
Advanced Deployment
ï»¿ This deployment type is used to manually configure the production environment (common library) in the
production server informing the exact environment location.
Step 1: Access the ScriptCase menu item ProjectDeploy, according to image below.
Step 2: Select the applications to deploy. It is possible to deploy the entire Project (the entire application set) or a
partial set of Project applications.
Step 3: Select Advanced deployment.
Step 4: Create a deployment template to save (and re-use) the defined configuration.
Step 5: Define the production environment directory structure according to the common libraries structure defined
in the production server. Consider that environment directory root is prod_scriptcase. See a configuration
example below.
*Note â?? The character "/", means the Server Web root, utilized in relative paths.
Production Directory - Relative path to prod (dir).

/prod_scriptcase/prod
Images Directory (used for upload) - Relative path to img.

/prod_scriptcase/file/img
Temporary Directory- Relative path to tmp.

/prod_scriptcase/tmp
Documents Directory (used for upload) - Absolute path (full path) to doc.
C:/Apache/Apache2/htdocs/prod_scriptcase/file/doc
Step 6: Name the connections used for Production.

Step 7: Select used Deployment Output. ScriptCase offers the following options:
1 - Generate ZIP with applications (recommended): Upon complete the process is displayed a download link
to the deployment package.
2 â??
Deploy in Server directory:Â Deploy the applications in selected directory. This option should only be used
case the deployment is in the same ScriptCase server.
3 â?? Deploy in FTP server:

Deploy the applications automatically in FTP remote server.
Step 8: Upon complete the process is displayed an application deployed report.

Step 9: The common libraries are methods required by the applications in the production environment being
required by the deployment package.
Note: In case of re-deployment (deploying again same project applications) it is not necessary to download
common library again. This info is not valid when the common libraries are update in another ScriptCase release.
Production Environment
Overview
A production environment includes a common library set used by ScriptCase developed applications. It includes
resources like: PDFÂ® programming, XLS (Excel), Database Access Layer, image processing and JavaScript
libraries. ScriptCase production environment is compatible to the following platforms:
Windows
Linux
IBM I5/OS400
FreeBSD
Solaris
Mac OS
Production Server.
A Production Server, where the production environment is installed , is the server where the Scriptcase
applications are published (a Web Server supporting PHP).
Requirements:
1 - Web Server supporting PHP.

2 - Production Server configured with common libraries.
conf
Configuration directory.
file
Directory used to upload files/images, saved in sub-dir doc and img respectively.
prod
Library directory used by the applications.
tmp
Temporary file directory.
diagnosis
Configuration file with settings like: Operating System, Enabled Extensions, Directory and Files Enabled.
Â Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-environment-produÃ§Ã£o/diagnosis.php).
info
File with info about PHP release. Access it via browser (example: http://servidor/raiz-ambiente-
produÃ§Ã£o/info.php).
Production Environment Management Access Interface
Production environment configuration resources interface. Â

Access it via http://host or ip/raiz-ambiente-produÃ§Ã£o/prod
Interface Resources.
Click here to know more about those configurations
*Note â??See the item Connecting with Database from the WebHelp for more info on how connect the
ScriptCase.
Configuring The Production Environment
Production Environment
Extract the zip file.
Includes the common libraries in the Production environment directory _lib.

In the example below was created a directory called "system" to store the applications.
Permissions â?? Reading, Write and Execution.
For Windows Servers using Web IIS Server, is necessary to define the permissions in the directory _lib (common
libraries),
and in the CMD files (C:\WINDOWS\system32) for IIS users (IUSR_NOME-DO-SERVIDOR) .
For Unix environment, is necessary to set common libraries permissions recursively. (directoty _lib, subdirectories
and files)
Example: chmod 777 _lib -R
Creating the connection with the Database using the management interface.
Step 1: Locate the production environment management interface, in the directory _lib.
In the example: http://host or ip/system/_lib/prod

Step 2: Select Create new connection.
<img src="http://192.168.254.248/tools/nm/sc_helpv8/gerado/en_us/pdfhelp_en_us/img/0302_new_deploy3.jpg" "

border="1" />
Step 3: Select the DBMS. In the example was used MySQL Database.
Step 4: Enter Database information (server id or name).
Step 5: Enter Database user id and password.
Step 6: Enter the same connection name defined in the development environment (ScriptCase).
It must be the same name since the applications are configured to use it.
Step 7: Test the connection and save the configurations.
Step 8: Run the application to verify it.

After clicking in Advanced.
Step 9: Select the decimal number separator to use in the database.
Ex: 1.21 or 1,21
Step 10: Choose if the connection will be persistent* or not.
Persistent Conexion: Persistent connections are connections that do not close when the execution of your script
ends.
Step 11: If you want to change the default charset (latin1, to MySQL) to record or edit to the database select the
desired encoding.
Editing the connection

Step 1: Select Edit connection.
Step 2: Choose the connection and edit it.
Renaming the connection

Step 1: Select Rename connection.
Step 2: Select the connection then rename it.
Optional Settings
Temporary files directory: Absolute path to the tmp folder.
Time to live (minutes) of files: Time, in minutes, the file will remain stored in the tmp folder.
PDF Server IP: Server's Internal IP on a network (NAT IP used to call the generated html exported by
Scriptcase).
Language: Select the language that you desire to the Production Environment.
Authorization key to view Ggoogle maps: To use the Google Maps you must have the Authorization key, that
is freely generated.
Link to get the authorization key: https://developers.google.com/maps/documentation/javascript/get-api-key#key
The key will be used only for one machine, because it's based on a digital signature.
Change Password
Step 1: Inform the current password.
Step 2: Inform the new password.
Step 3: Confirm the new password.

Tools
Overview
ScriptCase has a set of built-in tools to help the user to use its advanced options. The options available in the
Tools menu are:
SQL Builder - SQL commands fast formatting tool.

Data Dictionary - Data Repository with reusable information about your data.
Express Edit - Project Applications common attributes editor.
Create Web Help

Libraries
Locales
Layout
Sql Builder
Overview
SQL QUERYS building Wizard tool. Allows the choice of databases, tables, fields, joins, order by and where,
visually.
To access it, the user must choose the database, the SQL command, tables and fields. The builder then
assemble the SQL command. Each of the sessions below covers a portion of the building process:
Database Selection
Tables Selection
Fields Selection
Joins definition
Criteria Settings
Order Settings
Running the query

Saving the query
Databases
Choose the database that is used by the application.
The user must choose the data base and click in the "Confirm" button. Upon completing the operation the wizard
proceeds to next step.
Image1:Databases Folder.
Tables Selection
The next step, using the Tables Tab, is the tables selection used in the SQL command. To select a table, use the
arrows. The selected table is displayed on the right.
Click in Confirm to complete the selection proceed.
Figure1:Tables Folder.
Fields
Using the Fields tab, the user should select the fields used by the application. Select the fields as in previous
steps.
Click in Confirm to complete the selection and move to next step : JOINS definition.
Figure1: Fields Folder. Attributes:

Table/Alias - Used to create an alias to the table name. It is used normally when a table is used more than
once in the SQL command or the original name is too extense or complex.
Joins
Use this tab to create join commands with SQL tables selected on Tables tab.
It can be acccessed after set the definitions in the Fields Tab.
An example of join use would be the following: In a table of customers register T1 there is the "Customer Code"
field. In a Purchase Order T2 table also there is the "Customer Code" field and the purchase orders of the
customers. If we are making a join of the tables CadClientes and CadPedVendas, we will use a commom field
("Customer Code") and we will have as result a cartesian product of these two tables in accordance with the kind
of defined join (equal to, bigger than, smaller than...). In other words, they will be joined and the data ordered in
accordance with the kind of defined join.
Figure1: Join folder
Table 1 - Display a previously selected table list: Select the first join table.
Type - Join type:
Inner - Left Join -

Right Join -
Bigger -
Smaller -
Bigger Equal -
Smaller Equal -
Not Equal -
Table 2 - Display a previously selected table list: Select the second join table.
Add Button -
Update Button -
Remove Button -
Clean Button -
Chart - Presents the join command mounted;
Figure 2: Join Folder with fields.
The window initially presents two lines of fields for joins realization. Each field contains the list of the table fields
selected. If the two lines are fulfilled, clicking on the Confirm button, will be opened more two fields, therefore the
SQL Buider undrestand that the user wishes to make more joins. If not, the user can leave the folder, therefore
the commands were already incorporated in the main command that is being mounted. To being make a join the
check box on the left of the field line is automatically fulfilled.
Click in Confirm to move to next step, the Criteria settings used to define search conditions.
Criteria
Use the Criteria tab to set the search condition used by SQL Buider for each selected field.
Figure1:Conditions Folder.
Attributes :
Conditions - To set the search condition for a field, the user select the field (from a list of selected fields in the
Fields folder) and select the operation:
= Equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records that contain the
selected field;
> - Greater than- Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field
values greater than the value entered in the next box;
< - Less than - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with field values
less than the value entered in the next box;
>= - Greater or equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all records with
field values greater or equal to the value entered in the next box;
<- - Less or equl to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that are
less or equal to the value entered in the next box;
<> Not Equal to - Determines that the application must select in the table or tables all recordss that don't
contain the selected field;
LIKE - Means equal and is applied to text fields, when the database doesn't allow the use of the "=" symbol;
Example: To search for records of customers born from 01/01/1970, select the Date of birth field, select the
symbol >= and enter "01/01/1970".
Click in Confirm to move to next step : Execution folder or Saved folder.

Order By
This tab is used to set the order used to display each selected in the application.
Select the field in the combo box, and select the order criteria: ASC = Ascendant or DES = Descendant and click
on Confirm.
Figure1:Order by Folder
When confirming it, SQL Builder moves automatically to the next step : Execution folder or Saved folder.
Run
Use this tab to execute the SQL command created from the selections, search and order criteria defined by user.
Figure1: Execution Folder.
Attributes>
SQL command : The SQL command assembled from the user information (selections, search and order
criteria).
Records per Page - Determine number of records displayed on result. Example: 30 registers per page;
Run Button - Executes the created command.
Copy Button - Copy the SQL command to save (copied) into the application in the SQL command area.
Save
SQL commands can be saved to be use in the future. The user can create a new command from an already
existing command.
Figure1: Save Folder.
Saved Statments - A list of existing (saved) SQL commands.

To edit the command - Edit the the SQL command.
Remove the command - Deletes the SQL command.
Save statement as: Enter a name to save the SQL command above.
Database Builder
Overview
Database Builder allows the Scriptcase user to manage his database or create a new one.
Access it through the menu Tools >> Database Builder
Image 1: Database Builder Access.
Database Builder is available in several languages and it can manage any database enabled in Scriptcase.
Image 2: Selecting a database.
After selected a database connection created in the project we have total control of the database.
Image 2: Database Builder Interface.
Interface:
1. SQL Command - Executes a SQL command.

2. Dump - Exports the database as a SQL dump.
3. Logout - Exit from the current database management.
4. Select Database - It allows to select any database existing in that connection.
5. Create Table - Creates new tables in the database.
6. Select - View the table records.
7. Tables - View the table structure.
8. Selected Option - Shows the path of the current option selected.

9. Database Options - Allows to edit the database, schemas and privileges
10. Seearch - It looks inside the database what was typed there.
11. Options to multi tables - Execute a function for several tables at the same time.
12. Move / Copy - Move or Copy all information from the current database to another one.
13. Creating - There we have options to create: Tables, Views, Procedures, Functions and Events.
Sql Command
It allows us to execute any SQL command or import a .sql file to execute it.
Image 1: Database Builder SQL Command.

Sql Dump
It allows us to export the database through a SQL dump to several export formats.
Image 1: Database Builder SQL Dump.

Create Table
It allows us to create new tables in the database.
Image 1: Database Builder Create Table.

Select
This option allows us to see all records from a table. It executes a SQL command: SELECT * FROM table
Image 1: Database Builder Select.

Table Options
In this screen we can see the structure of the table.
Image 1: Database Builder Table.
Alter Table - Clicking on it, we can alter the table structure. By adding or changing field names, types, etc.
Image 2: Database Builder Alter Table.
New Item - Clicking on it, we can insert a new record into the table.
Image 3: Database Builder New Item.
Indexes, Foreign Keys and Triggers - They allows to add or alter Indexes, Foreign Keys and Triggers.
Data Dictionary
Overview
Using ScriptCase data dictionary users can create a data repository to use in generated applications. The data
associated to database table fields are stored to be used in different applications. It very useful to create a
normalized data environment in an organization. It also improves development by speeding up data update and
by minimizing errors (updates data only once in a single place - the repository - and have it used in all
applications).
Allows to standardize:
Data Type
Label
Size
Decimals
Description
OPERATIONS
Operations performed in the repositories:
Open - Determines the tables containing definitions and the fields used.
Properties - Displays and updates selected repository general definitions.
Delete - Removes (deletes) selected repository.
Repository
Creates new repository for a specific data base.
Since a Scriptcase repository is associated to database table fields there is a logic relationship between a
repository to a database. ScriptCase data dictionaries are organized by database.
Attributes:
Data Dictionary Name - Repository ID.

Description - Repository description;
Connection - database connection used.
Associate dictionary with connection - link your repository with the connection.
When a repository is created the system identifies the database tables existent. Add new tables to the repository
or update the tables.
Use the Database´s Tables tab to select an existent database table and include it to the repository. It is possible
to add a lable to it to be used externenally to the database.
Figure2:Database Tables.
Use the Repository Tables tab to update the information about a repository table.
Figure3: Data Dictionary Tables
A created repository can be included in the language files.
Figure4:Language file index generation.
Table Update
Attributes:
Data Type - ScriptCase field type.

Label - Enter a label to the field.
Length (DB) - Define the field length in the applications;
Decimals - Use for fields type DECIMAL, NUMERIC, etc.
Edit
Figure1: Data Dictionary Properties.
The Data Dictionary properties are displayed. Edit the property and click in Update to commit the changes.
Figure2: Update Data Dictionary properties.
Attributes:
Data Dictionary - Data Dictionary ID.

Description - Repository description.
Connection -Table connection used.
Express Edition
Overview
A new Scriptcase resource now available is APLICATIONS EXPRESS EDITION (by project). Using this resource
is possible to define attributes common to more then one project application. See below a mini-tutorial on how to
use the EXPRESS EDITION step-by-step.
1- Select the application to edit (edit mode): All or select a set.
Figure1:Selecting the applications.
2 - Selecting a application set to edit.
Figura2: Select application to edit using Express Edition.
3 - Select the properties to apply to the selected application as well as the Express Edition type (individually per
application or "in bulk").
Figure3: Select Express Edition type.
4- Define the selected applications common attributes. Click in Apply to perform the Express Edition.
Figure4: Editing Parameters.

Image Management Center
Using the Image Management Center you can control all the images used in the development in one place. Is it
possible to manage the images at the user-level, project or public, organize into folders and upload multiple
image files at the same time.
Image Management Center is only available when a project is open on Scriptcase.
Figure1: Image Management Interface.
1 Image Target 2 Image Action 3 Display Options 4 Navigation Toolbar
Images Target
Images on Scriptcase can be store in four different levels, Scriptcase, public, project and user.
Scriptcase - At this level will be stored all default images used on Scriptcase.
Public - Images saved as Public will be available to all other users.
Project - Images saved as Project will be available only on the project that the image was uploaded.
User - Images will be only availabe for the user who made the upload.
Figure2: Image Target.
Images Action
This button is used to define what actions we want to take, you can upload an image, copy, remove and rename.
All actions taken will run on the preveious selected image target, is not possible to upload images to the
Scriptcase image target.
Upload - Using this option you are going to select one or more images to upload.
Copy - This option will clone a the selected images.
Remove - Using this option you will erase the images from the Image Management Center
Rename - This option allows you to rename a single image.
Figure3: Image actions.
Display
The display option is used when we need to show more information below the image, information such as Date of
the upload, size and resolution.
Figure5: Display Option
Sort
The Sort options is used when we want to change the file order, we can order by the file name, file extension, file
size and date. There is another option to set if we want to show the images by the sorting option selected in a
ascending or descending way.
Figure6: Sorting options
Resolution
This option will filter all images with the selected resolution.
Figure7: Resolution Filter Option
Search
The search option will search among all images the name of the image typed.
Figure8: Search.
Navigation Toobar
On the navigation toolbar you can set a page to navigate, set how many images we want to see per page, we will
find the arrows to navigate forward, backwards, to the last and to the first page and we can also see the record
count.
Figure9: Search.
Helpcase
Overview
HelpCase is a fully integrated web documentation generator for projects developed in ScriptCase. With HelpCase
the documentation for your system becomes a much easier task.
Please navigate through the options below to learn how to create your documentation using Scriptcase's
HelpCase tool:
Create Edit Settings Generate

Creating A Documentation
You can find HelpCase option access in the menu item "Tools".
A documentation built in HelpCase is always associated with a Scriptcase project. During the new Manual
creation you don't have to select the project, because it is already selected according to the project which
ScriptCase is accessing at this very moment.
Create new HelpCase: Enables the interface for new HelpCase creation.
Creating a new documentation
HelpCase Name: Please enter a name to your new HelpCase.

Description: Please enter a comment or description for the new HelpCase.
*: Required fields.
Starting the Project
Once you create your HelpCase, the screen below will be displayed by ScriptCase so you can begin
documenting the features and descriptions of your project.
New documentation created
Next step: HelpCase -Editing the documentation
Go back
Editing The Documentation
EDITING INTERFACE
The editing interface of HelpCase is divided into two parts, the right part designed to list only files and the
contents of it, and the left part the structure of folders and its files.
HelpCase's editing interface
Initially HelpCase contains a single directory named root.
The directories that you will create will be displayed in the treeview on the left menu.
CREATING A NEW DIRECTORY
- Creates a new html file in the documentation in the selected directory
Creating a new HTML file

Directory name: Enter a name for the directory.
Menu title: Enter a title for this item to identify it in the documentation index.
*: Required fields.
DISPLAYING/HIDING A DIRECTORY.
- Displays the selected directory, once you generate the documentation.
- Hides the selected directory, once you generate the documentation.
RENAMING A DIRECTORY
- Rename the directory and the selected file.
The option to rename the folder can also be used to change the title name for the index menu.
Creating a new directory within the root
Rename file to: Creating a new directory within the root.

Rename title to: Enter a new title, it also identifies the item inside the documentation index.
*: Required fields.
Creating a new HTML file
- Creates a new HTML file within the selected directory.
Criando um novo Arquivo HTML para Manual

HTML file name: Enter a name for the file.
Menu title: Enter a new title, it also identifies the item inside the documentation index.
*: Required fields.
HelpCase directories menu. Spotlight: file created.
DELETING A DIRECTORY AND ALL ITS FILES
- Deletes a directory and all files and subdirectories.
It is not possible to remove the root directory, it is a directory system level that organizes the Manual.
Next step: HelpCase - Documentation settings
Go back
Documentation Settings
Editing a file
When you select a file, an interface for editing HTML will open to the right side of the Manager:
HTML file editor.
LAYOUT SETTINGS
We can customize the layout of HelpCase according to our project through the configuration options:
HelpCase configuration panel.
Settings: It has all the basic HelpCase layout configuration.

Initial page: Content that will be displayed for HelpCase homepage.
Layout:
View: For the header template customization.
Header : Configure the header items used in the header template.
CSS: Custom CSS encoding that will be used in HelpCase layout.
With the basic configuration, we can customize the items that are displayed in HelpCase, as well as choose
whether it will be generated with the old or new style.
LAYOUT SETTINGS.
Use new Helpcase generator: Sets the documentation style. The old Helpcase (before Scripcase 8.1) does
not support the new customization options. If you change to the new Helpcase you will overwrite your current
style sheet and you will lose the changes you made previously.
Display header: Enables or disables the display of the generated documentation header.
Display a "home page" button: Option to display or not a "Home" button within the documentation.
Display search tab: Displays the search tab within generated documentation.
Display breadcrumb: Enables or disables the function to show the navigation path (breadcrumb).
Navigation anchor: Defines which HTML tag after the navigation path will be created. The default is after
the body tag, e.g. h1.
We can customize the HelpCase homepage through the option below:
Homepage editing screen.
Homepage: Page where you can design your documentation homepage.
In the Layout we can define which theme will be used for HelpCase (we can edit or create new specific themes to
HelpCase).
Screen for you to chose the the header template.
Header layout: Defines a template to be used in the header. You can edit and/or create new templates.
We can configure the items to display them in the HelpCase header.
Header items settings
Title: Sets the HTML title attribute value of the generated documentation.
Logo: Here you can upload an image as a header logo.
Background color: Sets the background color of the generated manual, the default color is #333333.
LIN1_COL1: Sets the value of the header variables.
On this item, we can code CSS so that the display of HelpCase matches the desired need.
CSS code customization
Next step: HelpCase - Generating the documentation
Go back
Generating The Documentation
To finish the project documentation HelpCase offers some options to manage it:
HelpCase Toolbar
Generate - Does the indices generation and creates a treeview Menu with the project indexed. After the
generation is done it opens the Documentation page.
Upload - Used to include images or files within the documentation.
Links - Interface to Express Edition to link Project Applications (queries, forms, etc.) with the Documentation
page.
Close - Closes HelpCase.
After the Documentation with all project document guides is created, ScriptCase will display all the links as
below:
Generated Documentation
Open HelpCase: Open the documentation within a new page.

Documentation download: Download the zipped documentation .
The image below presents a generated Documentation.

Go Back
Scripts
Scripts resource allows implementing standard routines in many applications and projects. You can use three
different levels (Public, by Project and by User). For Scripts at Project level, use the option Default Values in the
Menu Project to create each new application already with the Script.
To-do List
This tool will allow the Scriptcase users, under the same installation, to create TO-DO check list with percentage
control, the TO-DO list can be attached to a user, projetc or public for everyone.
A message with a warning will shown up to users who have unfinished Task on the TO-DO list.
Figure1: TO-DO List Interface.
1 List Target 2 TO-DO Task List 3 New TO-DO Item
List Target
TO-DO Lists on Scriptcase can be created in four different levels, public, individual for the user who chreated,
project public and project individual.
Public List - The TO-LIST will be visible for all Scriptcase users under the same installation.
My List - The TO-DO list created will be visible only for the TO-DO List creator.
Project: Public List - The TO-DO list created will only be visible for the users who have access to that
specific prject .
Project: My List - The TO-DO list will only be visible for the TO-DO list creator in that specific project.
Figure2: TO-DO List Target.
TO-DO Task List
In this area will be exhibithed all TO-DO Task Lists on the previous selected TO-DO List target.
TO-DO - Name of the task created.

Application - Taget apllication that has a task attached to it, the application target is not required when we
are creating a new task.
Owner - User who created the task.
Responsible - User responsible to finish the task.
Percetage Done - Percentual number to express the amount of the task that was completed already.
Deadline - Final date to finish the task.
Figure3: Tasks Lists.
New TO-DO Item
Button used to add new TO-DO Tasks, this options is enable for users under the same Scriptcase installation.
TO-DO - Name of the task created.

Percetage Done - Percentual number to express the amount of the task that was completed already.
Deadline - Final date to finish the task.
Responsible - User responsible to finish the task.
Who Can Change - User who can edit the task.
Application - Taget apllication that has a task attached to it, the application target is not required when we
are creating a new task.
Notes - Place to enter the task description and details.
Figure4: Creating a new Task

Message Center
The developers now can communicate using Scriptcase interface itself, through the exchange of messages
between different users under the same Scriptcase installation.
A message with a warning will shown up to users who have recieved a new message.
Figure1: Message Center Interface.
1 Folders List 2 Message List 3 New Message
Folders List
Inbox - It will show the messages sent to the user.

Outbox - It will show the messages sent by the user.
Message List
In this area will be exhibithed all messages selected on the previous selected folder.
Sent In - Date when the message was sent.

Subject - Tittle of the message.
From - User who sent the message.
To - User receive the message.
Read In- Date and time when the message was readed.
Options - Configurations to update the message.
Figure2: New message alert.
New Message
Button used to create a new message, this message can be sent to any users registered under the same
Scriptcase installation.
TO - Who will receive the message, there is an option to send to all users.
Subject - Tittle of the message
Message - Message that will be send to the previous selected users.
Libraries
This features allows you to import complete libraries and create files from any extension(.JS, .CSS, .PHP...).
These libraries can be used within your Scriptcase projects, facilitating code reuse.
To use this new feature, you must understand two new macro operations, specifically created for this feature:
sc_url_library() and sc_include_library()
Creating a new library

1 - Access the menu Tools > Libraries
2 - Click on Create a new library.
3 - In this step, we must inform the library name and select the level to create it.
Public - Available for all projects within Scriptcase.

Project - Available only for the project in which it was created.
After the creation, the libraries will be listed as below.
The Libraries management interface allows us to select which one will be part of the project, you can also
create a new library or delete existing ones.
Save the project libraries - Save the libraries selected to be used within the project.
Create a new library - Creates a new library
Edit - Allows the creation of upload files within the library.
Rename - Rename the library.
Delete - Deletes the library.
Creating files
1 - Click edit, to open the library.
2 - You can create several extensions using this library, you can also create an architecture of folders in order to
better organize your files.
3 - To create a file or folder, simply enter a name.
Note: It is not required to inform an extension for files.
Files Upload To access a library, it is also possible to upload any extension files (.html, .zip ...)
In this way, it is possible to upload complete libraries, that can be used within Scriptcase projects.
1 - Click Upload.
2 - File upload screen.
Note - To upload the compressed files, first you must uncompress it inside the current folder.
3 - This is how we will see the files inside the library.

The files are displayed with its extensions.
After the whole process for libraries and its files creation, you should inform which libraries will be used in the
project.
For this we must check the library name and save the project libraries.
So they will be available for use within the projects, with the specific macros help: sc_url_library() and
sc_include_library()
1 - Click to use or remove a library in the project. Then click on "Save the project libraries".
Locales
Overview
Scriptcase allows to create applications with Internationalization.

Using a Language Editor select which languages will be used in a project and maintain texts displayed on
applications.
With the Regional Settings Editor define rules to format numbers, currency, date and time.
Languages of the applications

Regional settings
Languages
The ScriptCase language tool allows to translate developed application standard messages enabling a
comfortable and friendly system usage.
Using this tool is possible to create customized messages to be used in different applications. A multi-language
project can be developed since language selection can be changed at authentication time or during application
execution.
Figure1: Language Settings.
Messages Menu
Using the messages menu is possible to select and edit messages by blocks, divided into ScriptCase Messages
and My messages. New blocks can be created using the item New Folder. Selecting a block an available
message index is displayed and open to edit.
Figure2: Message Menu.
Language Menu
Regional Settings
The regional settings allows to define monetary currency parameters, date and number formatting according to
the region where the application is used. Click in customize to enter the values better suitable to the applications.
Image1: Regional Settings.
Customizing the Regional Settings.
The item Number define parameters like decimal symbol, negative format, and digits grouping. These are
parameters applied in applications using decimal type field.
Image2: Regional settings - Number parameters.
In the Currency unit are available parameters like currency symbol, currency positive format among others.
These parameters applied in applications using currency type field.
Image3: Regional settings - Currency parameters.
The items Date and Time define parameters applied in date and time formatting used in Date and Time, Time,
and Date type fields.
Image4: Regional settings - Time parameters.
Image5: Regional settings - Date parameters.

Layout
Display
It is possible to edit or create layouts to be used in Projects developed with ScriptCase. ScriptCase Layouts can
be defined using: Themes, Templates, Buttons, Group Buttons and CSS Menus options. Themes option uses a
CSS Editor to create applications visualization standards. In Templates, edit and/or add Header and Footer
templates. Using Buttons and Group Buttons is possible create or edit Text or Image for buttons to customize the
generated applications. CSS Menus uses a menu CSS Editor to create menu themes for menu applications.
Figure1: Layout Interface.
Themes
Buttons
Group Buttons
Templates
CSS Menus
Themes
In Themes using a CSS Editor is possible to create applications visualization standards. It is possible to create
new themes or edit an already existing one.
Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.
When creating a new theme, it inherits all attributes of the selected theme.
Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Publishing Interface.
Buttons
Using the Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new buttons set associated to Schemas.
Buttons set can include text button or image buttons.
Figure1: Buttons Management Interface.
Creating a New Button Schema
Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar.
In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. Each button can have different
characteristics (image, text or link).
For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. For text and link buttons use the tabs:
Button style and link style to edit the CSS style.
Figure2: Buttons tab.
Editing Buttons style.
Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. All schemas already have a default style (it can`t
be removed). If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure the new style. Back in
the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4).
Figure3: Button style edit tab.
Configuring a button Link style.
As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style as css,
default or a new user created style.
Figure5: Link style edit tab.
Menu Icons
Using the Menu icons options the developer can set the standard icons for active and inactive tab that will be
used within the Menu created by Scriptcase. These icons will be bound to the application that will open.
Customizing the Menu icons
On this screen, we can see that the menu icons are divided into blocks according to the application, i.e. each icon
corresponds to a Scriptcase application type.
Select the icons that you want to use according to each application menu tabs for active and inactive tabs. Click
in the to open the Images Manager and select the images.
Templates
Templates resource allows to include HTML files to be used in Headers, Footers and Custom Grids(User defined
orientation). For example: billets, invoices, business cards, etc.
Figure1: Edit Templates Interface: Heading, Free Format and Footer.
It should be a HTML file. We can stipulate where Scriptcase fields will be displayed on the HTML file using "curly
brackets" {variable}. As you can see below:
HTML Code
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0">
<tr>
<td width="247" height="96" align="left" valign="center">
<font face="verdana" style="font-size:11px">
<b>{Name}</b><br>{Address}<br>{City}- {State}<br>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
Running the HTML code above.

{Name}
{Address}
{City}-{State}
{ZIP}
Remember that everthing that comes insde curly brackets are making reference to the application fields, so when
there is a {Name} it will be talking about the field "Name" of your application.
In the Template we can define a Loop feature using a flag (see in red):
Código HTML
<tr>

{ZIP}
</font>
</td>

</tr>
</table>
The red parts define where the loop will start and finish. The iterations amount is defined by "Columns per Page"
of the Grid.
eg: If "Columns per Page" is 3 so it will display the following result.
HTML code
<tr>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
{ZIP}
</font>
</td>
</tr>
</table>
Running the HTML Code above.
{Name} {Name} {Name}

{Address} {Address} {Address}
{City}-{State} {City}-{State} {City}-{State}
{ZIP} {ZIP} {ZIP}
Once ".html" file iscreated include it in Scriptcase accessing "Tools>>Layout>>Templates".
Select "Free Format" and Upload the file.
Then Create a new Grid application and select "User Defined" Option in "Orienation" setting.
Access "Grid>>Layout>>Settings" and select the "Body Template".
Now associate the template variables with the Grid fields. (Grid>>Select Fields)
Format the fields and Run.
Group Buttons
Using the Group Buttons Management option is possible to edit or create new group of buttons set. Buttons set
can include text button or image buttons.
Figure1: Buttons Management Interface.
Creating a New Button Schema
Click in New in the Button Schema Toolbar.
In the first tab (Buttons) is displayed the buttons used in the ScriptCase. Each button can have different
characteristics (image, text or link).
For images buttons is displayed an upload field to upload the button image. For text and link buttons use the tabs:
Button style and link style to edit the CSS style.
Figure2: Buttons tab.
Editing Buttons style.
Use this tab to define the CSS button style used in your schema. All schemas already have a default style (it can`t
be removed). If needed more then one layout for text buttons click in NEW and configure the new style. Back in
the Buttons tab is possible to select the new style (see Image4).
Figure3: Button style edit tab.
Configuring a button Link style.
As with text type buttons is possible to define more then one link type button and define each one style as css,
default or a new user created style.
Figure5: Link style edit tab.
Css Menus
The CCS menu is used to create/edit styles for the menu layouts.
Figure1: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor.
To create a new menu theme it will be needed to choose the target of this new theme, it can be saved as Public
(the theme will be avaliable to everyone who uses scriptcase to use it), it can be saved as Project (the theme will
be avaliable only for this particular project) and it can be saved as User (the theme will only be avalibale to the
use who create it).
On the CSS editor we can edit the CSS settings from the menu and his submenu, selecting the menu color, menu
hover color, font settings, alignment and edge configuration.
Figure2: ScriptCase CSS Menu editor.

Chart Themes
The Chart Theme tool is used when the developer want to create different char themes for their applications. The
Chart Theme allows you to edit atributes like Background color, Font, Margin, Data, Border and Shadow.
Figure1: ScriptCase Chart Theme Interface.
When creating a new theme, it inherits all attributes of the selected theme.
Figure2: ScriptCase Chart Theme Configuration.

Database Converter
Overview
The Database Conversor Tool will assist you to convert your XLS sheets, ACCESS database and CSV Files into
MySQL, SQLite, Postgres and SQL Server databases.
Database Conversor for ACCESS

Database Conversor for XLS
Database Conversor for CSV

Import Access
The Import ACCESS feature is used to convert one or more data sources from ACCESS files type in a structured
database, in a fast and secure way.
The tool will import the data saved in Microsoft Access files to one of the following databases: MySQL,
PostgreSQL, SQLite and SQL Server
Step 1 - DB Fonte
In the first step we need to select the ACCESS data source that we want to import, to import the ACCESS file you
must use one of the options below to load the data source.
Patch / File - Full path of a file or directory with one or more files from the data source. The path should be
located on the server where it is installed Scriptcase.
Select the files / Drag 'n Drop - Select or drag and drop one or more files from the data source to perform
the upload to the server Scriptcase and add them in the conversion list.
Step 2 - Options
In the second step we will identify the internal format of the file and choose the desired tables, review the types of
data, display data and make necessary adjustments.
Password - This option is used when the source file ACCESS requires a password to be accessed.
Table list - Button used to list the tables in the datasource selected in the previous step
By moving to the second step, Scriptcase will automatically display the tables found in the previously selected
source data. We have the option to select the desired tables, review the types of data, visualize data and make
necessary adjustments.
In the "Tables" tab all available tables will be displayed for import into the edit option and we can change the field
names, data type, size, primary key, auto-increment and set how many rows of source data will be read.
On the "Advanced" tab, there are settings available to add DROP TABLE before creating the tables, if we wish to
recreate the structure and data, if we wish to recreate or just recreate the structure only data.
Step 3 - DB Path
In the third step we will configure the connection in which we want to import the selected data source. Select a
connection from the existing database design or create a new connection to receive the converted data source
chosen in the previous step.
It is possible to create a new connection for MySQL, SQLite, Postgress and MSSQL (SQL Server) banks.
Import Xls
The Import XLS feature is used to convert one or more data sources from XLS files type in a structured database,
in a fast and secure way.
The tool will import the data saved in XLS files to one of the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite
and SQL Server
Step 1 - DB Fonte
In the first step we need to select the XLS data source that we want to import, to import the XLS file you must use
one of the options below to load the data source.
Step 2 - Options
First row is the column name - This option is used when the first line on the XLS file will be used as column
name.
Step 3 - DB Path
Import Csv
The Import CSV feature is used to convert one or more data sources from CSV files type in a structured
database, in a fast and secure way.
The tool will import the data saved in CSV files to one of the following databases: MySQL, PostgreSQL, SQLite
and SQL Server
Step 1 - DB Fonte
In the first step we need to select the CSV data source that we want to import, to import the CSV file you must
use one of the options below to load the data source.
Step 2 - Options
First row is the column name - This option is used when the first line on the CSV file will be used as
column name.
Column delimiter - Character used to separate columns in the CSV file.
Value delimiter - Character used to separate values in the CSV file.
End of Line - Character used to indicate ehe end of each line of the file.
Step 3 - DB Path
Options
Options
ScriptCase´s production and development environments are easy to manage. The developer can customize the
environment while managers can set security polices and fault recovery process.
The management options are grouped in categories as follow:
Settings - ScriptCase administrative tasks. The options in this menu allows the user to install licenses,
update to new ScriptCase versions, define projects security polices, manage fault recovery and Configure
systemparameters and attributes.
My ScriptCase - Customize the development environment.
Change password - Password administration.
Settings
Settings
The ScriptCase administration is restricted to users with ADMINISTRATOR profile. During the ScriptCase
installation a system administrator account is created.
Figure1: Administration Menu
Here is possible to customize the ScriptCase general environment.

System
System
Customize system folders, system default variables and other system settings.
Figure1: System Settings Options.
The ScriptCase environment according to the business group needs by selecting from the options below:
System Settings - Define ScriptCase default settlings: language, backup options, version control and others.
Default Values - Define attributes used as new projects´ default options.
System Folders - Define default path and folders.

System Settings
Figure1: System Settings Interface.
Attributes:
Language - Select ScriptCase Interface language. This is the language used in ScriptCase development
environment.
Quantity of compilations in parallel - Choose the quantity of Threads used to generate applications.
Display the compile time of the applications individually - Option to display the compile-time of each
application.
Number of Automatic Application Copies - Determine the number of application copies that ScriptCase
automatically saves. ScriptCase keeps multiple copies of each application. Each "version" can be identified
by a timestamp.
Alert if the last backup is older than (days) - Number of days used to calculate and display the "expired
backup" alert message. ScriptCase warns when a backup is due.
Show backup alert for - The users´ group informed with the “backup expired” message . The options are
Only Administrators or All the users.
Check for ScriptCase update versions after login - Days to check for ScriptCase new versions (at login).
The options are the following ones: Do not check, Check every day and Check define day.
Check version every - Used when option Check define day is selected for the item Check for ScriptCase
update versions (at login) above.
ScriptCase Session Timeout (min) - ScriptCase Session time limited in minutes. Useful when more then
one developer use a single license.
Use cache for table fields - Speed up long table processing. Useful when using very large tables.
SMTP Server - Enter the sending email server. Used to automatic e-mail, for example when the user forgets
the login password.
SMTP Port - Enter the server port , default is Port 25.
SMTP User - Enter the server user.
SMTP Password - Enter the user email server password.
SMTP E-Mail - Enter the email used to sent the password.
PROXYServer - Enter the proxy server id. Scriptcase uses it to access the web for update / version control
checks.
PROXY Gateway - Enter the proxy gateway.
PROXY User - Enter the proxy user.
PROXY Password - Enter the proxy password.
To use session in database - Store session data in database. ScriptCase Applications can use session
variables stored in the database. This options is very useful when working with session variables and also
load balance it also increase environment security.
Show an option in the deployment to store the PHP session in the Database - Select session data
storage format during deployment.
Default Values
All the attributes defined here are copied to new projects default options.
Figure1 Default ValuesInterface.
Attributes:
Use Ajax - Use Ajax processing in new projects. Useful when creating projects where Ajax resources are
undesirable.
Logo Image -Logotype image name used in application heading . Customize the project using the same logo
in all application header.
Report page row limit - Number of rows to display in each application page.
Themes - Color Schema.
Display Summary - Display summary line.
Templates
------------------------------------------------------
Grid Toolbar's Buttons
Each ScriptCase grid application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as
default to all grid applications in the project.
Form Toolbar's Buttons
Each ScriptCase form application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as
Search Toolbar's Buttons
Each ScriptCase Search application comes with basic pre-defined navigation buttons. Use the definition here as
System Folders
Define default path and folders.
Inform ScriptCase the path to the actual storage area where to locate information used by the applications.
Figure1:System Folders Interface.
Attributes:
Web Server Document Root Directory - WEB server root , for IIS the default is “inetpub/wwwroot”, for
the apache servers “apache/htdocs”.
Application Path - Path used to store created applications.
Common Libs Path - Path used to store Scriptcase Common Libs.
Documents Folder- Directory to stored documents in used the applications.
Images Folder - Directory used to store the images used in the applications.
Temporary Files Folder - This temporary storage is an HTML condition.
Projects And User
Projects And User
Figure1: Project and User.
The ScriptCase is based on the concept of Projects. It is used as applications logical repository. Users must be
associates to Projects with a development profile that is individual for each project.
Projects - Define projects´ security polices.
Users - Create users and associated profiles.

Projects
Display all projects developed and allows to manage the projects available.
Figure1: Project Management Summary Interface.
Click in the to display project attributes as in the following screen:
Figure2: Project Details Interface.

Users
Figure1: Interface.
Enter the a user name an click in to find a user.
Note: A user list is displayed with information about the available users and action options to apply to selected users.
Click in to display user details.
Click in to edit user information.
Click in o change user password.
Figure3: Password Interface.
To create a new user click in the “New User” button.

Figure4: Create User Interface.
Attributes:
User - User ID.

E-mail - User e-mail address.
New Password -Enter a new password to the user;
Confirms Password- Enter the password again to confirm;
Privilege- Define user ScriptCase access profile .
Project - Projects accessible to the developer. (select from the available projects)
The screen below allows you to select the projects to be managed by the user. All projects will be
displayed in the box left and right in the box will display the projects that were selected through the
selection bar, to be administered by the user. After making this process you must click the save button
and then the user will be included.
Figura5: Projects Administrator Interface.

Services
Services
Figure1: Services Options Interface.
Tools used in fault recovery management such as:
OnLine
Backup
Restore
ConImageLog
View Log
Online
ScriptCase users online log information.
Figure1: Online interface.
The following information is available about each user:

User – User login id.
IP – User work station IP.
Logon – User login time (hour and date).
Access –User last access time (hour and date).
OnLine – User login elapsed time.
Page – ScriptCase page that the user is accessing at the moment.
Application – ScriptCase applications that the user is executing at the moment.
Backup
Figure1: Backup Interface.
Enter a backup file name and select the backup option desired:
Partial Backup (only some objects will be selected) or General backup to backup all the objects.
Figure2: Partial Backup Interface.
Click in to select all the application elements (users, connections, projects, schemas,
templates, buttons, lookups, icons and images).
Click in the Action desired to perform the operation on selected element and select the element to
include in the backup.
A final report will be displayed when backup is completed.

Figure3:Backup Interface.
It is recommended to download the archive, in the end of in process to another machine.

Restore
A list of files available to restore is displayed.
Figure1: Restore Interface.
Upload a file to restore.
It is possible to upload a backup that is store in a zip file. Click in to upload and restore (.zip) files.
Enter the information about the file to upload or click in browse to find it.
Figure2: Restore Interface.
Once the files are available to ScriptCase select it from a display above.
Select the files to restore and click in the action buttons to perform the operation on selected file.
After selecting a file to restore choose the restore process by configuring the restore process directives.
Restore process selection.
Figure3: Interface options of Restore.
The file selected previously is displayed with information about creation time and usage Status.
If Duplicated - Select between the options : NOT TO RESTORE or OVERWRITE the applications.
Restore Type - Choose between restoring all files or a partial Restore.
Partial Restore
Figure4: Partial Restore Interface.
Select elements to restore individually.
Restore Report
A status report is displayed after the restore is completed.

Configure Log
The ScriptCase keeps a Log with information about user performed main operations. There is a default selection
of operations. The Log can be customized to record only specific operations according to business needs and
preferences.
Important: For security reasons do not unselect all options.
Figure1: Log Interface.

View Log
This feature allows the administrator to monitor the main operations carried by ScriptCase users. The operations
are displayed by Date and information such as: user login ID, user workstation IP , time, the operation type of and
Action is displayed.
In the displayed calendar the days are shown in three tonalities, clear means that he didn’t have log, darkest he
registers the days where he had access, and of pink color the day that this chosen team.
Figure1: View Log Interface.

Scriptcase Update
This option can be used to bring ScriptCase up to date. Including corrections, programs , documnetation lnew
versions, etc. All the update process is made through the Internet directly from ScriptCase site. We recommend
a connection with minimum speed of 128 Kbps.
Figure1: Interface Scriptcase Update.
FIRST STAGE (To verify ScriptCase Update)
In this first stage the verification in the site of the ScriptCase will be made if a new version of software ScriptCase
Update exists, in case that a version exists but new the update is made.
Figure2: Interface Verifying Update.
SECOND STAGE (To look updates)
Its system will be examined and identified the available updates directly of the site of the ScriptCase.
Figure3: Interface To lower and to install joined updates.
THIRD STAGE
The ScriptCase will directly lower of the site ScriptCase the found updates, and will make the update of its
system.
Figure4: Screen successfully effected Update .

Licenses
Licenses
To register the license, you will need the username and password of My Scriptcase of our site.
Having the username and password of My Scriptcase and Scriptcase license, open the scriptcase and go to the
"Help> License Registration" menu:
Select the option that you want to register Scriptcase:
Online Registration
Offline License Request
Offline License Installation
Online Registration
In this process, ScriptCase access the site and based on the user, password and serial informed, verifies and
updates all the inherent license permissions.
In this option you inform the user, password, and the license number, then click on "Register"
Figure 1: Online Registration Interface
After clicking "register", you will see the message below:

Offline License Request
After accessing the "Help> License Registration" menu, you have the option on the left side "Offline Request".
After clicking "Offline Request", the screen below where you inform the user, password, and the license number
and click "Request".
Click "scriptcase_v8.req" to download the file:
With possession of the file "scriptcase_v8.req", please visit the Scriptcase and login with your username and
password in the My Scriptcase.
Access https://www.scriptcase.net/licenserequest/ to appear in the image below.

Enter your serial and click "Choose File" to upload the file scriptcase_v8.req. After that click "Continue".
On the next screen to download the file "scriptcase_v8.lic".
After download file scriptcase_v8.lic you must access the Offline Registration option in Scriptcase.
Enter your username, password, license number and select the scriptcase_v8.lic file. After that click on "
Register".

Offline License Installation
After download file scriptcase_v8.lic you must access the Offline Registration option in Scriptcase.
Enter your username, password, license number and select the scriptcase_v8.lic file. After that click on "
Register".

My Scriptcase
It allows to define default values to Scriptcase.
Image1: My Scriptcase Interface.
Language - Define the language used in the Scriptcase GUI ( Error Messages, Control Messages, etc.).
Security Resources - Enables you to disable the use of security in the development.
Initial Information - Select information displayed in the ScriptCase Main Menu.
Pop-up Window - Enable pop-up window display for the selected resource.
Main MenuInterface - Updates Applications Menu (the space between the Treeview menu and the
applications display menu).
Application Edition Interface - Update the Application width.
Applications Creation - The options are the Wizard (Standard) and Express (Express Edition).
Auto Save - Allows automatically saving changes in ScriptCase.
Select the first menu item - Select the first menu item.
Change Password
Accessing Options > Change Password menu, is possible to update the password to access Scriptcase.
Image1: Main Menu - Options.
Type the old password, the new password, then confirm the new password. Click on Save to modify and save it.
Image2: Change Password Interface.
The password is case sensitive. That is, words can differ in meaning based on differing use
of uppercase and lowercase letters. admin is different from Admin and ADMIN
My Toolbar
It allows to define your own Scriptcase toolbar.
Image1: My Toolbar Access.
This option is used to customize the availability and order of the toolbar items. All the menu options are available
to create your customized quick bar.
Image 2: My Toolbar Interface.
This interface uses the drag and drop resource to make the arrangement of the toolbar items easier. Just move
the icon to the desired position on the toolbar.
On the bottom you can find the following options:
Save - Save the current settings.

Add a separator - Add a new separator as the last item of the toolbar.
Create Item - Use it to create a new item on the toolbar. Iform the URL, icon and description of the new item.
Return to default - Restore the default settings of the Toolbar.
Config.php
For security reasons, the file config.php was protected to restrict access. This file is important because it
contains the information of the base where the Scriptcase was installed.
Was added an underscore ( _ ) before the extension of the file (config_.php), making the access through the
browser impractical, until the protection is removed.
To access the file with a protection, a blank page appears, prevented a change in the information file.
Image 1: File access with protection.
To access the information contained in the file, we should remove the protection.
This requires access to the folder at the root of scriptcase server and rename the file to config.php
Image 2: File directory.
Then, you can access the information in the file using the browser.
Image 3: File information.
Note: after performing the changes, protect file again to prevent improper access the information.
Appendix
Appendix
See also some useful information at :
Programming Tips
Variables in Scriptcase
Variables In Scriptcase
Dependent Applications Concepts.
ScriptCase considers dependent applications those applications (Form or Grid) that need to receive external
parameters (variables) passed by Get or Post HTML methods.
To build a Dependent Grid specify which parameters receive external values by using square brackets [ ] to
indicate a "global variable" on the WHERE or HAVING clause. For example:
SELECT field1,field2 FROM table_duplicates WHERE cod_client = [glo_clientid]
Scriptcase uses variables in any application event or method. There are Local Variable and Gobal variables:
Local Variables It should be used as a common PHP variable (beginning with $).
$var1 = 'local';
It is used in only in an event or method. Its scope ends at the end of the event.
If it is being used in onLoad event it will be used just in that event.
Global Variables
Before the browser sends the information, it encodes it using a scheme called URL encoding. In this scheme,
name/value pairs are joined with equal signs and different pairs are separated by the ampersand.
GET Method - sends the encoded user information appended to the page request. The page and the
encoded information are separated by the ? character.
POST Method - transfers information via HTTP headers. The information is encoded as described in case of
GET method and put into a header called QUERY_STRING.
Scriptcase uses global variables with square brackets.
[var2] = 'global';
It can be called in any event or method of an application.
Note 1: A local variable can be a global variable if you use sc_set_global

$var3 = 'testing'; // var3 is a local variable
sc_set_global($var3); // transforming var3 in a global variable
echo [var3] ." global variables"; // Now we can call [var3] in any other event
Session Variables It is used like a global variable (with square brackets)

[var4] = 'session';
But you must access "Application>>Global Variables" to set var4 to be "SESSION".
Session variables can be called in any event of any application.

If created it in the login application it can be called it in any project application.
Note 2: Accessing "Application>>Global Variables" you can define if a global/session variable is IN or OUT
variable.
If the application is CREATING the variable, it should be an OUT variable.
If the application is RECEIVING the variable from another one, it should be an IN variable. (IN is default)
Note 3: Global and Session variables can be reseted using sc_reset_global macro.
sc_reset_global ([var3],[var4]);
Fields Variables Field values can be called in an event using "curly brackets".
{field_x} = 'field_x receive this value';
{field_y} = [var3];
{field_z} = {field_y};
Programming
Programming
This section offers PHP programming tips and available Macros in the ScriptCase.
PHP programming tips
Scriptcase Macros
SQL programming tips

Php Commands
if else elseif while do while
for foreach break continue functions
date strpos str-replace ltrim rtrim
trim substr substr- array activex

replace
Arrays
An Array in the PHP is currently a commanded map. A map is a type that relates values with keys. You can use
it as an array, or a list (vector), hashtable, dictionary, collection, stack, line and probably more. As you can have
another Array PHP as a value, you can easily simulate trees.The explanation of these structures is beyond the
target of this manual.
Syntax
An Array can be created with the constructor of Array() language.
array( [chave =>] value

, ...
)
// key pode ser tanto string ou um integer
// value pode ser qualquer coisa
<?php
$arr = array("foo" => "bar", 12 => true);
echo $arr["foo"]; // bar

echo $arr[12]; // 1
?>
The key can be integer or a string.
The value can be any type PHP:
<?php
$arr = array("somearray" => array(6 => 5, 13 => 9, "a" =>
42));
echo $arr["somearray"][6]; // 5
echo $arr["somearray"][13]; // 9
echo $arr["somearray"]["a"]; // 42
?>
If you to specify a key that already in use, then the value associated to it is updated.
<?php
array(5 => 43, 32, 56, "b" => 12);
// ... this array

array(5 => 43, 6 => 32, 7 => 56, "b" => 12);
?>
Creating/modifying with the square brakets syntax

That is another way to create and/or update an array as in the example below.
$arr[key] = valuer;
$arr[] = value;
//key can be integer or string
// value can be anything
To remove a pair key/value, you need to apply the unset().
<?php
$arr = array(5 => 1, 12 => 2);
$arr[] = 56; // The same as $arr[13] = 56;
$arr["x"] = 42; // new element to array with "x" key
unset($arr[5]); //remove an array element
unset($arr); // remove the complete array

?>
It notices that the greater entire key, used for, this necessarily don’t need existing in the Array. It can have
existed in the Array since the last time that the Array was indexed. He sees the following example.
<?php
// Creating an array
$array = array(1, 2, 3, 4, 5);
print_r($array);
// Removing the array values leaving an empty structure.

foreach ($array as $i => $value) {
unset($array[$i]);
}
print_r($array);
// Adding an item
$array[] = 6;
print_r($array);
// Reindexing
$array = array_values($array);
$array[] = 7;
print_r($array);
?>
The example above must produce the following exit:

Array
(
[0] => 1
[1] => 2
[2] => 3
[3] => 4
[4] => 5
)
Array
(
)
Array
(
[5] => 6
)
Array
(
[0] => 6
[1] => 7
)
<?php
$a = array( 'color' => 'red',

'flavor' => 'sweet',
'form' => 'round',
'name' => 'apple',
4// key 0
);
// or
$a['color'] = 'red';
$a['flavor'] = 'sweet';
$a['form'] = 'round';
$a['name'] ='apple';
$a[] = 4; // key 0
$b[] = 'a';
$b[] = 'b';
$b[] = 'c';
// array( 0 => 'a' , 1 => 'b' , 2 => 'c' ),
// or array('a', 'b', 'c')
?>
break
Break cancels the execution of commands like foreach while, do. .while or switch current.
Break accepts an optional numerical argument.
<?php
$arr = array ('um', 'dois', 'três', 'quatro', 'STOP', 'cinco');
while (list (, $val) = each ($arr)) {
if ($val == 'STOP') {
break;
}
echo "$val<br>\n";
}
$i = 0;
while (++$i) {
switch ($i) {
case 5:
echo "No 5<br>\n";
break 1;
case 10:
echo "N# 10;<br>\n";
break 2;
default:
break;
}
}
?>
Continue
Continue is used inside of loops structures to jump out the current Loop remaining portion of the iteration and to
continue the execution at the beginning of the next iteration.
<?php
while (list ($key, $value) = each ($arr)) {
if (!($key % 2)) {
continue;
}
do_something_odd ($value);
}
$i = 0;
while ($i++ < 5) {
echo "Out<br>\n";
while (1) {
echo " Middle<br>\n";
while (1) {
echo " Inside<br>\n";
continue 3;
}
echo "It will never be displayed.<br>\n";
}
echo "Neither this<br>\n";
}
?>
date
(PHP 3, PHP 4 )
date - Format the date and local hour.
Description
string date ( string format [, int timestamp])
String in accordance with returns one the format from string using the given whole number timestamp or to the
local current hour if no teamses tamp is given. In other words,timestamp is optional and the standard for the
value of time.
Table1. The following characters are recognized in format to parameter string.
format Exemples
Description
character (return values)
a Lowercase Ante meridiem and Post am or pm

meridiem
A Uppercase Ante meridiem and Post AM ou PM

meridiem
B Swatch Internet time 000 até 999
d Dia do mês, 2 digitos com leading 01 to 31

zeros
D Text representing day, with 3 letters Mon through Sun
F Text representing month January through

December
g 12-hour format no leading zeros 1 a 12
G 24-hour format no leading zeros 0 a 23
h 12-hour format with leading zeros 01 a 12
H 24-hour format with leading zeros 00 a 23
i Minutes with leading zeros 00 para 59

I summer time 1 summer time,
0 no summer
time
j Day no leading zeros 1 to 31
l Text representing week days Sunday through

Saturday
L leep year 1 leep year, 0

not leep year
m Month (numeric) with leading zeros 01 a 12
M Text representing month in short (3 Jan a Dec

letters)
n Month (numeric) no leading zeros 1 a 12
O Diferença ao horário de Greenwich Example: +0200

(GMT) em horas
r RFC 822 formatted date Example: Thu,

21 Dec 2000
16:01:07 +0200
s Seconds with leading zeros 00 a 59
S Sufixo ordinal inglês para o dia do st, nd, rd ou th.

mês, 2 caracteres Funciona bem
com j
t Days in a month 28 a 31
T Timezone setting Examples: EST,

MDT ...
U Seconds since the Unix Epoch See also time()

(January 1 1970 00:00:00 GMT)
w week day numeric 0 (for Sunday)

through 6 (for
Saturday)
W ISO-8601 week number of year, Example: 42 (the

weeks starting on Monday (added in 42nd week in the
PHP 4.1.0) year)
Y Year with 4 digits Examples: 1999

ou 2003
y Year with 2 digits Examples: 99 ou

03
z Day in a year 0 a 366
Z Timezone offset in seconds. The -43200 até

offset for timezones west of UTC is 43200
always negative, and for those east
of UTC is always positive.
Example 1. date() examples
<?php
// Prints something like: Wednesday
echo date("l");
// Prints something like: Wednesday 15th of January 2003 05:51:38 AM
echo date ("l dS of F Y h:i:s A");
// Prints: July 1, 2000 is on a Saturday
echo "July 1, 2000 is on a " . date ("l", mktime(0,0,0,7,1,2000));
?>
<?php
// Assuming today is: March 10th, 2001, 5:16:18 pm
$today = date("F j, Y, g:i a"); // March 10, 2001, 5:16 pm
$today = date("m.d.y"); // 03.10.01
$today = date("j, n, Y"); // 10, 3, 2001
$today = date("Ymd"); // 20010310
$today = date('h-i-s, j-m-y, it is w Day z '); // 05-16-17, 10-03-01, 1631
1618 6 Fripm01
$today = date('\i\t \i\s \t\h\e jS \d\a\y.'); // It is the 10th day.
$today = date("D M j G:i:s T Y"); // Sat Mar 10 15:16:08 MST 2001
$today = date('H:m:s \m \i\s\ \m\o\n\t\h'); // 17:03:17 m is month
$today = date("H:i:s"); // 17:16:17
?>
do..while
Loops do. .while is similar to loop, except for the fact of that the condition is verified in the end of each iteration
instead of in the start. The main difference of loops while regular is that the first iteration of a Loop of .while
guaranteeing is executed (the condition alone is verified in the end of the iteration) whereas it can necessarily not
twirl in a normal Loop while (the condition is verified in the start of each iteration, if it is evaluated as FALSE
soon in the start, the execution of the Loop would finish immediately).
It has only syntax for loops of while:
<?php
$i = 0;
do {
print $i;
} while ($i > 0);
?>
Loop above would twirl accurately one time, since that after the first iteration, when the condition is verified, it is
evaluated as it FALSE isn’t greater who zero 0) and the execution of the Loop finishes.
Advanced users of C can be made familiar to the differentiated use of the Loop of .while, allowing to the end of
the execution in the way them code blocks, generalizing them with it .while (0), and using the instruction break. I
break up it of code following demonstrates this:
<?php do {if ($i < 5) {print "i is not big enough ";break;}$i *=
$factor;if ($i < $minimum_limit) {break;}print "i is Ok";/*
process i */} while(0);?>
If it doesn’t worry if you it did not understand this of the certain form no way or. You can codify simple or exactly
powerful scripts without using this “resource”.
else
Frequently you go to want executing an instruction if a certain condition will be found and a different instruction if
the condition will not be found. That is what else makes. Else extends to a command if to execute an instruction
case the expression in the command if either evaluated as it FALSE. For example, the code to follow would
show it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b and it isn’t greater that b contrary case:
<?php
if ($a > $b) {
echo "a is greater than b";
} else {
echo "a is NOT greater than b";
}
?>
The command else is only executed if the expression if will be evaluated as FALSE, and if having any expression
elseif, if all they will only be evaluated as it also FALSE (it sees elseif).
elseif
elseif, as its name suggests, is a combination of if and else. In the same way that else, it extends to a command if
executing a different instruction in the case of the original expression if to be evaluated as FALSE. However, in
contrast to else, it will only execute that alternative expression if the conditional expression of elseif will be
evaluated as TRUE. For example, the code following would show it is greater that b, a it is equal the b or it she is
minor who b:
<?php
if ($a > $b) {
echo "a is bigger than b";
} elseif ($a == $b) {
echo "a is equal to b";
} else {
echo "a is smaller than b";
}
?>
If can have several inside of the same instruction. The first expression elseif(it will be had) that it will be evaluated
as TRUE will be executed. In the PHP, you also it can write “else if” (in two words) and the behavior will be
identical to one 'elseif' (in one alone word). The meaning syntactic is slightly different (if you are made familiar to
C, them you have behavior the same), but in the end of accounts both would have the same behavior accurately.
The command is only executed if the preceding expression if and any previous expressions elseif will be
evaluated as FALSE, and the current expression elseif will be evaluated as TRUE.
for
Loops will be is the bows most complex in PHP. They behave as its compatible in C. syntax of a Loop will be is:
for (expr1; expr2; expr3) instructions

The first expression (expr1) is evaluated (executed) a time unconditionally in the start of the Loop.
In the start of each iteration, expr2 is evaluated. If it is evaluated as TRUE, the Loop continue and (s) the
command (s) nestled (s) (they are) is executed (s). If she is evaluated as SHE FALSE, the execution of the
'Loop' finishes.
In the end of each iteration,expr3 is evaluated (executed).
Each one of the expressions can be empty.expr2> empty means that the Loop can twirl indefinitely (PHP
considers it implicitly as TRUE, as in C). This can’t be so useless how much you can think, therefore frequently
you can want to finish the 'Loop' using a break conditional instruction instead of using the expression-truth of it
you will be.
It considers the following examples. All they show to numbers of 1 the 10:
<?php
/* example 1 */
for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; $i++) {
print $i;
}
/* example 2 */
for ($i = 1; ; $i++) {
if ($i > 10) {
break;
}
print $i;
}
/* example 3 */
$i = 1;
for (;;) {
if ($i > 10) {
break;
}
print $i;
$i++;
}
/* example 4 */
for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; print $i, $i++);
?>
The first example seems to be prettiest (or perhaps the room), but you can perceive that the possible use of
empty expressions in bows will be if it becomes practical in some occasions.
The PHP also supports the alternative syntax of two-points bows will be:
for (expr1; expr2; expr3): instructions; ...; endfor;
foreach
The PHP4 (but not it PHP3) includes a constructor foreach, much similar to the Perl and other languages. This
offers an easy way to iterar on matrices. foreach only functions with arrays, and will launch an error if to try to use
it in an variable of any different type or in variable not initialized. It has two syntaxes; second it is an abbreviation,
but useful, of the first one:
foreach (expressao_array as $valor) instructions

foreach (expressao_array as $chave => $valor) instructions
The first form sweeps one given first one given for expression_array. In each Loop, the value of the current
element is attributed the $value and the internal hand of the matrix is advanced in a position (thus, in the next
iteration you it will be looking at for the next element).
The second form makes the same thing, except for the fact of that the key of the current element will be attributed
to the 0 variable $key in each iteration.
Note: When foreach initiates its first execution, the internal hand of the matrix is zeroed automatically for
the first element of the Array. This means that you do not need to call reset() before a Loop foreach.
Note: It also notices that foreach operates on a copy of the specified Array, not it proper Array, and
therefore, the hand of the original Array is not modified as in the instruction each(), that it modifies the
element of the selected Array, but this doesn’t reflect the original Array. However, the internal hand of
the original Array is put into motion by the processing of the Array. Assuming that the bow foreach twirls
until the end, the internal hand of the Array will be located in the end of the Array.
Note: foreach has the ability to prevent messages of error with “@”.
You can have noticed that following items is functionally identical:
<?php
$arr = array("one", "two", "three");
reset ($arr);
while (list(, $value) = each ($arr)) {
echo "Valor: $value<br>\n";
}
foreach ($arr as $value) {
echo "Valor: $value<br>\n";
}
?>
The following are also functionally identical:
<?php
reset ($arr);
while (list($key, $value) = each ($arr)) {
echo "Chave: $key; Valor: $value<br>\n";
}
foreach ($arr as $key => $value) {
echo "Chave: $key; Valor: $value<br>\n";
}
?>
More examples to demonstrate the uses:
Functions defined for the user

A function can be defined using it syntax as the following one:
Pseudo code to demonstrate function uses
<?php
function foo($arg_1, $arg_2, /* ..., */ $arg_n)
{
echo "Example function.\n";
return $retval;
}
?>
Any valid code PHP can appear inside of a function, exactly other functions and definitions of classrooms.
When a function is defined conditionally as in the two examples below, its definition can be processed before
being called.
Conditional functions
<?php
$makefoo = true;
/* We can't call foo() from here

since it doesn't exist yet,
but we can call bar() */
bar();
if ($makefoo) {
function foo()
{
echo "I don't exist until program execution reaches me.\n";
}
}
/* Now we can safely call foo()

since $makefoo evaluated to true */
if ($makefoo) foo();
function bar()
{
echo "I exist immediately upon program start.\n";
}
?>
Functions within functions
<?php
function foo()
{
function bar()
{
echo "I don't exist until foo() is called.\n";
}
}
/* We can't call bar() yet

since it doesn't exist. */
foo();
/* Now we can call bar(),

foo()'s processesing has
made it accessible. */
bar();
?>
The PHP doesn’t support overload of functions, and also it isn’t possible to cancel or to modify the definition of
functions previously declared.
Note: Names of functions are insensitive to the case, but it is better to call the functions in the same way that it
appears in the declarations.
if
The construction if is the one of the most important implementations of many languages, including PHP. Allows
the conditional execution of fragments of code. The PHP implements a structure if that it is similar to that one of
the C: /P>
if (express)
instructions
As described in the section on expressions, expression is evaluated by its Boolean context. If expression will be
evaluated as TRUE, the PHP will execute instructors, and it will have evaluated itself as FALSE, will be ignored.
More information on the evaluation for FALSE can be found in the section converting for Boolean.
The examples to follow would show that it is greater that b if $a will be greater that $b:
<?php
if ($a > $b)
print "a is grater than b";
?>
Frequently you go to want having more than an instruction is executed conditionally. And is clearly, does not have
necessity of generalize each instruction with a clause if. Instead of this, you can place some instructions in a
grouping of commands. For example, this code would show it is greater that b if $a will be great
Sql
INSERT
In SQL language the only way to add data to a table is using the INSERT statement like the following:
INSERT INTO adm_Category (CategoryID,NameCategory,Photo) VALUES (9,'CAR','carros.gif')
UPDATE
It updates a given line.
UPDATE adm_category SET NameCategory 'rent car' WHERE CategoryId = 9
DELETE
Exclude a given table line.
DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId = 9
/*it eliminates in the table adm_category the line with category code equal 9 *
Commands INSERT, UPDATE E DELETE in the ScriptCase.
To execute these commands the ScriptCase use the macro sc_exec_sql.
sc_exec_sql('DELETE FROM adm_category WHERE categoryId =9');
QUERY
Use the Query statement to search a given DB table. A Query has at least two components:
SELECT : It enumerates the columns name that contains the desired data.
FROM : It specifies the tables where the columns are located.
Ex.: SELECT categoryId,NameCategory,Photo FROM adm_category;
WHERE
It returns only the values from the lines that satisfies the conditions specified in the WHERE clause.
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE Sex = 'M'
Operators Description
= equal
!= Not equal
<> Different
> Higher
< Shorter
!< Not Shorter
!> Not Higher
>= Higher or equal
<= Shorter or equal
BETWEEN - AND : It specifies data range.
SELECT CustomersId,NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE BETWEEN '1997-01-01' AND '1997-

04-31'
SELECT SupplierId,Name_supplier FROM adm_supplier WHERE SupplierId BETWEEN 1 AND 9
IS NUL : Select lines where the content of the field is null (EMPTY).
SELECT CustomersId FROM adm_order WHERE DateOrder IS NULL
LIKE : Use masks in conditions to compare text values:
Substitute only one character: _ or? ;
Substitute a sequence of characters: % or *.
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomers LIKE 'RIC%';
SELECT NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE NameCustomersLIKE 'J_A_';
IN : Selects data from a given set or lists.
SELECT CustomersId,NameCustomers FROM adm_Customers WHERE IN ('ABCDE','ZXED','WW3CD')
Operators AND and OR
Allows to use more than one condition in one WHERE clause.
SELECT P.ValueOrderFROM adm_Customers C, adm_order P WHERE

(CustomersId ='CustomersId') AND
(P.dateOrder IS NULL AND C.CustomersId = 'ABCDE')
Arithmetical operators
+ Addition
- Subtraction
* Multiplication
/ Division
In the example to follow, we add 0,05 to Customer â??ABCDEâ?? order value.
SELECT DISTINCT C.CustomersId, C. NameCustomers,P.ValueOrder + 0,05 AS DISCOUNTING FROM

adm_Customers C, adm_order P WHERE C.CustomersId = P.CustomersId AND CustomersId= 'ABCDE'
Concatenation Operator
In the MySQL the function concat implements the concatenation functionality:
SELECT concat(Name Customers " Happy Birthdayâ??)fromadmCustomers where month (DateBirth)=

month(now()) AND day(DataBirth) = day(now()); ;
Note the use of the functions day, month e now, that manipulate date type fields.
Functions
Use functions to perform the operations on query results.
Aggregate functions
They produce one value from an entire data column. They are also called column functions.
AVG: Calculates the query selected items average.
SELECT AVG(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orderP CLASS="western" STYLE="margin-bottom: 0cm">
MAX : Returns the max value from the query selected items.
SELECT MAX(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order
MIN: min value from the query selected items.
SELECT MIN(ValueOrder) FROM adm_order;

SUM : Returns the sum of all items for the selected column.
SELECT SUM(ValueOrder) FROM adm_orders
COUNT : Returns the line count (number of records) of a query result.
SELECT COUNT(*)adm_Customers;
Not Aggregate functions
Return a value for each line.
MID : Display a part of a text. For example, it lists all the customers with only the 5 first characters of its name.
SELECT MID(NameCustomers,1,5) FROM adm_Customers;
UCASE : Returns a text in capital letters.
SELECT UCASE(NamCustomers FROM adm_Customers
LCASE : Returns a text in lower case.
SELECT LCASE(NameCustomers) FROM adm_Customers
LENGTH : Returns the amount of characters from a field/text/P>
SELECT LENGTH(Namesupplie) FROM adm_supplies
Breaks and Organization
Clauses that can be added to a query to organize the results.
GROUP BY
Used to group lines in the result.
SELECT F.Namesupplier,P.NameProduct FROM adm_supplier F, adm_product P WHERE P.SupplierId= F.

SupplierId GROUP BY F. SupplierId
Aggregate Functions cannot be used in GROUP BY clause.
HAVING
Apply search conditions to the lines in GROUP BY clause.
For example :
SELECT CustomersId MAX(ValueOrder),MIN(ValueOrder),MAX(ValueOrder) â??MIN(ValueOrder) as Differences

FROM adm_pedidos GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING MAX( ValueOrder)- MIN(ValueOrder) > 12700;
List all the customers who had made more than 20.
SELECT CustomersId COUNT(CustomersId) FROM adm_order GROUP BY CustomersId HAVING

COUNT(CustomersId) > 20;;
ORDER BY
Order (sort) the lines (records).

Pdfhelp en Us PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pdfhelp en Us PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Introduction

How does ScriptCase work?

You will be able to develop easily and really fast:

Always looking for new technology, ScriptCase has a variety of components:

ScriptCase brings some extra tools:

Image Management Center

Access, EXCEL and CSV Import tool

Using the scriptcase installer

Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer:

1 - Apache Web Server 2.4.3.

This manual will teach you to install ScriptCase in 3 simple steps:

1. Step 1:Execute ScriptCase's installer.

2. Step 2:Choose the installer settings.

Step 1: Execute ScriptCase's installer.

3 - Grant the Execute permissions to the file.

4 - Run the installer.

Step 2: Choose the installer settings.

1 - Select the installer language.

Click on "Forward" to continue...

This screen shows the installer welcome message.

Click on "Forward" to continue...

Click on "Forward" to continue.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

The installer will start the installation process now.

1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

7 - Completing the Setup.

Click on "Finish" to complete.

Step 3: Start Using ScriptCase.

Using the scriptcase installer

Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer:

1 - Apache Web Server 2.4.3.

This manual will teach you to install ScriptCase in 2 simple steps:

1. Step 1:Choose the installer settings.

Step 1: Pick the installer settings.

1 - Select the installer language.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

This screen shows the installer welcome message.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

Click on "Forward" to continue...

Click on "Forward" to continue...

The installer will start the installation process now.

Click on "Next" to continue.

Click on "Next" to continue.

7 - Completing the Setup.

Click on "Finish" to complete.

Step 2: Start Using ScriptCase.

Using the scriptcase installer

Scriptcase installer will install automatically in your computer:

This mannual will teach you to install ScriptCase in 2 simple steps:

1. Step 1: Choose the installer settings.

2. Step 2: Execute ScriptCase.

Step 1: Choose the installer settings.

1 - Select installer language.

Click on "Ok" to continue.

Click on "Next" to continue.

Click on "Next" to continue.

Click on "Next" to continue.

Click on "Forward" to continue.

The installer will start the installation process now.

1. Progress Bar: The overall installation progress.